Nokia 6670 User Manual
User Guide 9239098 9235449 Printed in USA 03/05 Guide dâÂÂutilisation 9235449 Imprimé aux E.U. 03/05
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Nokia 66 7 0 User Guide Phone info rmation Numbers Where is the number ? My nu mber Wire less service provide r V oic e mail numb er Wire less service provide r W ireless p rovide râÂÂs numb er Wire less service provide r Prov ider â s cu sto mer ca re Wire less service provide r Mode l num ber 667 0b Label on back of phone (u nd er bat tery ) Typ e num be r RH-68 Label on back of ph one (u nd er bat tery ) IME I numb er Label on back of phone (u nd er bat tery )
2 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 3 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia LEGAL INFORMATION DECLA RATION O F CONF ORMITY W e, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibil ity tha t the products RH-67 and RH-68 are in con formi ty wit h the p rovis ions of the fol lowin g Counc il Di rectiv e: 1 999/5/E C. A co py of t he Declaration of C onform ity can be found at http://www .nokia.com/phones /declaration_of_co nformity P ART NO . 9235 449, ISSUE NO. 1 Copyright é 2005 Noki a. Al l righ ts r eserv e d. Nokia, Nokia 667 0, Nok ia Connecting P eople, P op-Port , and the Nokia Original Enhanc ements logos are t rademar ks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Ot her company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respecti ve owners. This product includes software licens ed from Symbian Soft ware Ltd. é 199 8-2005. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian L td. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Java and all Java -based marks are trademarks of Sun Micros ystems, Inc. US P atent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2005. T egic Com munications, Inc . All righ ts reserved. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, I nc . This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Vis ual P atent P ortfolio License (i) f or personal and non-commercial use in connection with infor m ation which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and (ii) for use in connection wit h MPEG -4 video pr ovided by a licens ed video provider . No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See ht t p://www .mpegla.com . The inform ation contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 667 0 product . N okia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia re serve s the right to ma ke chang es to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. 168
4 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia UNDER NO CIRCUM STA NCES SHALL NOKIA BE R ESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LO SS OF DATA OR INCOME OR A NY SPEC IAL , I NCID ENTA L, AN D CO NSE QUEN TIA L OR IN DIRE CT DAMA GE S H OWSO EVER CA U SED. THE CO NTE NTS O F TH IS DO CUMEN T AR E PR OV IDED " AS IS ." EX CEPT A S RE QUIR ED B Y APPLI CABLE L A W, NO WARRA NTIES OF AN Y KIN D, EITHER EXPR ESS OR I MPLIED, IN CLUD ING, BUT NOT LIMITED T O, THE IMPLIED WA RRANTIES OF MERCHANT A BILITY AND F ITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, A RE MAD E IN REL A T ION TO THE ACC URACY A ND RELI ABILITY O R CONTEN TS OF T HIS DOCU MENT . N OKIA RESE RVES T HE RIG HT TO R EVISE THIS DO CUM ENT OR W ITHDRAW I T AT ANY TIME WITHOU T PRIOR NOTIC E. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, tech nology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our device may cause TV or radio interfer ence (f or example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or In dustry Canada can r equire you to stop using your telephone if such int erfer ence cannot be eliminat ed. If you require as s istance, contac t your local service facility . This device complies with part 15 of t he FCC rules . Operation is subject to the condition that this devic e does not cause harm ful interferenc e.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 5 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Noki a 667 0 phon e at a g lance Call key End key P owe r key ( on top ) P op-Port⢠connector , and microphone (on bottom) Five-w ay scrol l key Left sele ction key Me nu ke y Edit key Clear k e y Right sele ction key Display Earpiec e Camera len s Note: The int ernet symbol appear o n all phones. on the 0 key doe s not Speaker (on side) Charger port
6 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Quick guide Make a call Enter a phone number , and press the Ca ll ke y . Answer a call Press the Call key . Answer call during call Select Options > Answ er , or press the Call ke y . End a call Press the End ke y . Decline a call Press the End ke y . Mute a call Select Options > Mute dur ing a call. Red ia l Press the Call key twi ce. Adjust c all v olume Scroll left or r igh t w ith the Scro ll ke y du rin g a cal l. Use the in-call menu Select Options during a call. Save a na me and n umb er Enter a number , select Option s > Add to c o ntacts > Cr eate n ew , choose a category , enter a name, and select Done . See "Writ e text ," p. 52 . Look up a name Select Menu > Con tact s , and in the search field at the botto m of the scree n , key i n the fir s t l etter s of th e nam e y ou wa nt to fi nd. Us e 1-to uc h dia ling Press and hold a key ( 2 âÂÂ9 ). Y ou must assign a k ey to a number in Co nt ac ts . See "Assign 1-touch d ialing keys," p. 34. Check voice mail Press and hold the 1 key (contac t your serv ice provi der for details). Write and send text messages Select Menu > Messaging > New messag e > T ext message . Enter th e recipient in th e To field. Enter the t ext message, and select Op tions > Send . Send a pic ture Capture a pi cture, allow th e pictu re time to save, and then selec t O ptions > Send > Via multim edia . Enter the recipien t in the To field. Enter th e text message, and select Op tions > Send . Read a new message If a new me ssage arrives, select Show to display the message. Press Pres s a key brie fly and re lease it. Press and hold Press and hold a k ey for 2 t o 3 se conds and release it.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 7 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Contents 1 For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 About you r phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Network se rvices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Shared memo ry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Fol low graphic clues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Find t he phone label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 Contac t Noki a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Accessi bility solu tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remov e the bac k cove r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 Insert the SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 Insert the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 Insert the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 Charge the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 Switch the phone on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Tips on effi c ie nt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 If t he phone reques t s a PIN code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 If t he phone reques t s a lock code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9 Set th e time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Make a cal l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Ic ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Option s lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Common act io ns for all appli cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Search for ite m s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vol u me co ntrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Loud speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Key guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4 Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Make a cal l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Answ er a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cal l log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
8 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia 5 Personal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Contac t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Presen ce (net work service). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Positi oning ( n et work serv ice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Cal endar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 To-d o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Copy cont ent from compati ble Nokia phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 6 Multimedia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Came ra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Vi ew images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Movie di rector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Gall ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 7 Messagin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Wri te text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Write an d sen d messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Vi ew a multi media pres entation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 InboxâÂÂre ceive message s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 My folder s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Remote mailbox ( network servi c e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 View m essages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cell broadcas t (net work s ervice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Servic e co mma nd editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Messagi ng set tin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Cal l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connec tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Date an d time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Securi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Cal l rest riction (network serv ice). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5 Enhan c e ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 9 Tools and applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Applic ati on ma n ager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 9 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Fil e manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Voi c e comman ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Devi ce manage r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 10 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Them es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Go to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 11 Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Cal c ul ator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Convert er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Voi c e recorde r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Wall et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 12 Instant mes s aging (IM) (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 IM serv ice provide r ic ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Regi ster wit h an IM servic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Before u sing IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Log in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 IM set tin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 IM conv ersations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 IM cont acts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 IM Group ses sions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Log out servic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 13 Web (mobile browser). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Basi c ste ps for web acce ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Browse r servi ce set-u p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 Make a co n nec tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Downl oad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 End a conn e ctio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Cle ar the cac he . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Browse r sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1 0 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 14 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Bluetoot h con n ecti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 USB con nection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Connec tion manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15 Connec t you r phone t o a comput er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Use t he CD- ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Synch ron izat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Memory low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 19 Differe n t wa y s to st ore data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Phone di splay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Bluetoot h con n ecti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Mult imedia messagin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Messagi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Browse r servi ces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 PC connec tivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Applic ati on n o t res ponding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21 16 Reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Batte ry information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Enhan c e ments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Enhan c eme nts, bat teries, an d cha rgers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Care an d maint enance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Additi onal safet y informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Emerge ncy call s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Cert ificati on inform ation (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30 Tech nical i nformatio n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 1 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia F or you r s afet y 1 For your safety Read these simp le guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete us er guide for further in formation. SWITCH ON SAFEL Y Do not switch the phone on whe n wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inte rferenc e o r danger . ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Ob ey all l oca l laws. Alw ays keep yo ur ha nds fr ee to ope rat e the vehic le while driving. Y our first conside ration whi le driving should be road s afety . INTE RFERENC E All wire less phones m ay be susceptib le to in terference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF I N HOSPITALS Fol l ow a ny rest rictio ns. Swit ch the p hone off near m edical eq uipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restriction s. Wireless devices c an cau se interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUEL ING Don't u se the phone at a refue ling point. Don' t use ne ar fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTIN G Follow any restriction s. Don't us e the phon e where blasting is in prog ress. USE SENSI BL Y Use only in the norm al position as explain ed in the product docume ntation. Don't touch t he a ntenna u nnece ssarily . QUA LIFI ED SE RVIC E Only qualified personnel may install or re pair this product.
12 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ENHANC EMENTS AND BA T TERIES Use only approve d enhancements and batt eries. D o not conn ect incompatible products. W A T ER-RESISTANCE Y our ph one is not wate r-resistant. Keep it dry . BACK- UP COP IES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a writte n record of all important info rmation stored in your phon e. CONNEC TING TO O THER DEVICE S When connecting to any oth er device, read its us er guide for detailed safety instructi ons. Do not conne ct incomp atible products. EMERGE NCY CALLS Ens ure th e phon e is swit ched on and in se rvic e. Pr ess th e En d ke y as many times as neede d to cle ar the dis play and return to the main scr een. En ter the e merg ency nu mber , th en press t he Call ke y . Gi ve your location . Do not e nd the call un til given permission to do so. ⢠ABOUT YO UR PH ONE The No kia 667 0 phone comes in two model typ e sâÂÂthe N okia 667 0 phone, whic h is appro v ed for use in 900, 1800, and 1900 M Hz GSM netw or ks, and the N okia 667 0 b phone, which is approved for use in 850, 180 0, a nd 1900 MHz GSM netw orks. To view your mode l type, refer to th e information label un der the battery . For more inform ation abou t where this label is loc ated, see âÂÂFind t he phone labelâ on page 14. When using the features in this de vice, obey all laws and resp ect privacy and legitimate right s of others. Warnin g: To use any fea tures in this d evice, other th an th e alarm clock, the ph one must be switched on. Do n ot switch the device on when wirele ss ph one use may cause interfere nce or danger .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 13 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia F or you r s afet y ⢠N ETWORK SERVICES T o use the phone you m ust have servic e from a wire less service prov ider . Man y of the feature s in this device de pend on featu res in the w ireless network to function. T hese Netwo rk Services m ay not b e available on all netw orks, or you ma y ha v e t o make s pecific arra ngement s with you r servi ce provider be fore you can ut ilize Network Service s. Y our serv ice provider may ne ed to give yo u additional ins tru ctio ns for their use and explain w hat charge s will apply . Some net works may have li mitatio ns that affect how you c an use N e twork Se rvices. For ins tance , so me networ ks may not supp ort all lang uage-d epend ent char acters and ser vices . Y our service prov ider may have requeste d that certain features be disabled or not activated in you r de vice. If s o, the y will not ap pear on you r dev ice m enu. Contact your servic e provider for m ore informati on. When using the features in this de vice, obey all laws and resp ect privacy and legitimate right s of others. ⢠SHARED MEMOR Y The follow ing fea ture s in th is de vice ma y sha re mem or y: c ontac ts, t ext mess age s, e-mail messages, multimedia messages, instant messages, images and ringing t on es , vi deo recorder , RealPlayer , c alendar and to-do notes, themes, and downloaded applications. The use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remain ing features sharing me mory . For example, sav ing ma ny images may use all of the availabl e memory . Y our phone may displ a y a message that t he memory i s full when you try to use a shared m emory feature. In thi s cas e, delet e some of the informa tion or entrie s stored i n the shar ed memory features before cont inuing. Some of the features may have a certain amount of m emory specially allotte d to the m in addition to th e amoun t of memory shared with oth er features.
14 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 2 Gen eral inform ation Congr atula tio ns on yo ur pur chase of a Nok ia mobi le phon e. Y o ur pho ne prov ides many func tions that are practical for dail y use, such as a digital camera, a video recorder , m essaging, e-m ail, a clock, an ala rm clock, a c alculator , an d a calendar . Y our ph one can conn ect to a PC, laptop, or other devic e using a da ta c ab le or B lue to ot h t ech no lo gy . For m ore inform ation on con nectivity , refer to the PC Suite u ser guide on the CD-ROM supplied w ith your phone. The PC Suite user guide, Nokia PC Su ite, and all related soft ware can be down loaded from the Support section of w w w .nokia.ca . ⢠FOLLOW GRAPH IC CL UES This gu ide uses ce rtain icons to a lert you to important informatio n. Note: Explai ns a feature or points out an important concept. Impor tant: Indica tes critical i nformation on using a fe ature. Warnin g: Helps you avoid pe rsonal injury , damage to the phone, or property damage. ⢠F IN D TH E PHONE LABE L If you ev er need t o call the Noki a Custom er Care Cent er or your service provider , you will nee d to provide speci fic information a bout your phon e. This in formation is located on the phon e labels, which are found on t he back of th e phone be neat h the b atte ry . The inside c over of this gu ide has a chart in whic h you c an e nter the information from your phon e label so that you can refer to it e a sily . Inf ormat ion la bel unde r batt ery
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 15 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia General informat ion ⢠C ONTACT NOK IA To help Nokia promptly answ er your questions, ple ase have the following information av ailable before con tacting the Nokia Custome r Care Cente r (see âÂÂFind the phone labelâ on page 14 t o locate t his information) : ⢠Y our ph one model n umber ( such as No kia 66 7 0 or Nokia 667 0 b ) ⢠Type number (such as RH-67) ⢠IMEI n umber ⢠Y our loc al postal code ⢠The phon e or enhanc ement in questio n ⢠AC C ESSIBILITY SOLUTION S Nokia is comm itted to makin g mobile phone s easy to use for all users including those with disa bilitie s. For m ore infor mati on, visit www .nok iaa ccessibi lity .com . or cont act Noki a at 1-888 -226-65 42. For more information on accessibility e nhance ments, see also âÂÂPhone adapter HDA-1 0 a cce ssibility enha ncem entâ o n page 12 5. Nokia Customer Care Center , USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Blvd. Suite #1 60 T ampa, F lorida 336 14 Te l: 1-888-N OKI A-2U (1-888 -665-42 28) Fax: 1-8 1 3-24 9-96 19 We b s i t e: www .n okia.com/us In Ca nada c all: Te l: 1-888-2 2-NOKIA (1-888 -226-65 42) We b s i t e: www .n okia.ca For TTY users: 1-800-24-N OKIA (1-8 00-246-6 542)
16 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 3 Getting start e d To begin using your phon e, a SIM card m ust be inserted into the phon e. Y ou ma y als o u se a me mory card with the ph on e. Before you atte mpt to in sert or remove a SI M card or me mory card, revie w the follow ing proce dures to become familiar w ith the ins ide of y our phone. âÂÂNokia 667 0 phone at a glanceâ on page 5 identifies other features on your phone. ⢠REMOV E THE BAC K COV ER Note: Bef ore re movin g the phone cover , alw ays s witch off the powe r and disconnect the pho ne from the charger or any other de vice. Always store and use the phone with the c over a ttached. 1 To open the cover , with the back of the ph one facing you, press the locking catch in the direction of the arrow ( 1 ). 2 While pressing the locking catch, slid e the back cover off of t he phone ( 2 ). 3 Remove the battery from the phone if neces sary . ⢠IN SERT THE SIM CARD K eep all SIM cards out of th e reach of small children. For availabi lity and in forma tio n on using SIM card se rvices, contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service provider , n etwork operator , or oth er vendor . For a bett er u nderstanding of y our SIM card, see â SIM cardâ on page 1 19. 1 Locate th e SIM card slot . 2 To open the SIM card holder , slide the holder in the open dire ction ( 1 ), a nd lift the holder up ( 2 ). 3 P os ition the bottom of the SIM card in the top of th e ho lder , a nd c aref ully slid e th e SIM ca rd d own i nto th e hol der , until th e bottom of t he card fits in the base of the slot. SIM ca rd hold er SIM c ard slot
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 17 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started Make sure that the be v elled corner on the SI M card is at the top of the ho lder and that the gold-co lored contact area on the card is facing th e ins ide of the ph one. 4 To secure the SIM card, fold the SIM card holder bac k down into the phone ( 1 ), an d sl ide the holde r into the closed pos ition ( 2 ) un til it firmly s naps in to place. ⢠IN SERT THE MEMORY CARD This phon e uses a reduce d size multimed ia card (RS- MMC). Only us e RS-MMCs with this device. F or more inform ation on the m emory card adapter , s ee âÂÂAttach and remov e the memory card adapterâ on page 90. Other memory cards, such as secure digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the memory card slot a nd are not compatible with this device. Attempts to use a noncompatible memory card ma y damage the memory ca rd as well as the phone, and data store d on the noncompatible card may be corrupted. See âÂÂMemory cardâ on page 89 for further in formation. K e ep all me mory cards out of the reach of small childre n. See â Rem ove t he bac k c overâ on p age 16 for deta ils on rem oving the pho ne co ver . 1 Locate the me mory card slot. 2 Insert th e top of th e memory card under th e hood at the right side o f the slot a nd ca refully slide the memory card to the right until it fit s in the slot. Mak e sure th at the b eve lled co rner on the memory card is facing tow ard the bott om right side of th e phone and that th e gold-colored contact area on the c ard is facing downward. 3 Pr ess t he me mory card int o pla ce . bev elled corn er Me mory card sl ot b evell ed corne r
18 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠INSERT THE BATTER Y Warnin g: Use only batteries approved by Nokia for use with this particular m odel. The use of any other types ma y inva lidate any approval or warranty , and may be da n gerous. 1 Always us e original Nok ia batteries. See "Nokia batt ery authentication guidelines" on page 122. 2 Align the gold-colored con tacts of the battery with the c orresponding connectors on the ph one, a nd push th e oppo site en d of the bat tery un til it snaps into place. 3 Slide the cover ba ck onto the phon e. Y ou will he ar it click into place. ⢠C HARGE THE BATTERY Warnin g: Use only chargers approved by Nokia for use with this particular mod el. Th e use of any oth er ty pes may in vali date any appr oval or warr ant y , and may be dange r o us. Check the mode l number of any c harger before use with this device. This device is intended for u se when suppl ied with pow er from ACP-12. 1 Connect t he charger t o an ac wall outl et. 2 Connect the pow er cord from the charger to the base of the pho ne. (Y ou wil l hea r it click into pla ce.) The batte r y indic ator bar starts scrolling. Note that you can u se the phone w hile ch arging. When the battery is fully charge d, the ba r stops scrolling. 3 Disconnect the charger from the phone, then from the ac outle t. See "Battery information" on page 1 22. See also âÂÂOther compatible Nokia enha ncem entsâ on page 1 25 for a lis t of othe r compa tible charge rs.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 19 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started ⢠SW ITCH THE PHONE ON OR OFF Press and hold the Po w e r key . After it is switch ed on, the phon e goes through va rious s tart -up sta ges w hil e it is loa ding soft ware . It may be more than 30 seconds before the phone is ready for use . ⢠TIPS O N EFFICIENT O PERATION Y our ph one has an intern al antenna on the back of the phone above the camera lens. Not e: As w ith any ot her radio t ransm itti ng devi ce, do not touch the ant enna unn ecessaril y when t he device i s switche d on. Cont a ct wi th the antenna af fects call quality and ma y cause the phon e to ope rate at a hig her pow er leve l than otherwi se needed. Avoid ing contact with the antenna area when operating th e phone optimi zes the a nte nna perf orm ance and the bat tery li fe. ⢠IF THE PHONE REQUESTS A PIN CODE The PIN code is usually supplied w ith the SIM card. K e y in the c ode (dis played as ****), and pre ss OK . Fo r more in for matio n on PI N c odes , see âÂÂSecurity â on page 72. ⢠IF THE PHON E REQUESTS A LOCK CODE K e y in t he loc k code (disp layed a s *****) , and pr ess OK . The f actory set t ing for the lo ck co de is 12345 . For mo re infor matio n on secu rity co des, see âÂÂSecuri tyâ o n pa ge 72. ⢠SET T HE TIME AND D ATE If you are prompted to ente r t he time and date when you turn you r phone on, use the number ke ys 0 âÂÂ9 to ke y in the curre nt time, then the date. Press OK to accept the settin gs. See also âÂÂDate and timeâ on page 7 1. ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 In the standby mode, key in the ph one number , including t he area code. 2 If you m ake a mist ake, pre ss the Clear key t o cle ar nu mber s. 3 Press t he Send key , an d wait for th e answer . 4 Press t he End key to finish the call or can cel the c all atte mpt.
20 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠STANDBY MODE Indic ators are sho wn when the phone is re ady for use, w ith no characte rs k eye d in. In this state , the phone is in th e standby m ode. The graduated bar ( A ) shows the signal s trength of the cellu lar netw ork at your c urrent location. Th e hi ghe r the b ar , th e strong er the signal. The antenna symbol is replac ed with th e GPR S symbo l wh en t he GPRS c onne ction has been s et to When available and a connec tion is a v ailable in the netw ork or in the c urrent cel l. See "GPRS" on page 7 0. The area to th e right of the s ignal bar ( B ) shows an analog or a digital cl ock . See "Date and ti me" on page 7 1. The ar ea above t he date ( C ) in dicates in w hich c ellular ne twork t he phone is current ly being used. The graduated bar ( D ) shows the batte ry charge leve l. The high er the bar , the more ch arge left in th e battery . The navigation bar ( E ) shows th e currently active profile. If the selec ted profile is Norm al , the current date is displayed instead of th e profile name . Curre n t sh ortcuts ( F ) are assig ned to the L eft and Right sel ecti o n ke ys. The background image ( G ) may be a ny imag e you sele ct in th e st andb y mo de. See "Theme s" on page 83. Y our phone has a screen saver . I f th er e ar e no actions for 5 minutes, the d i splay is cleared and a screen saver becomes visibl e. To d eactivate the screen saver , press any key . Y ou can also modify the sc r een saver di sp lay an d the time th at elapses befo re th e scree n save r starts . See âÂÂTheme sâ on pa ge 83 an d âÂÂSt andby mod eâ on pa ge 67. ⢠ICO NS Several icons may be displayed while th e ph one is in t he standby mode. T he icons are re lated to a ctivit y , data conne ctions, e nhancem ents, or voic e volu me. A BC D E F G
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 2 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Getting started Activity indicator s One or more of the followi ng icons may be shown when th e phone is in the standby mode: Data connection indi c ators When an applicat ion is esta blishing a data connec tion, an indicator blink s in th e standby mode . When an indicator is show n con tinuously , t he conne ction is active. Y ou h ave rec eived ne w me ssa ges to the inbo x in Mes sagin g . If t he indicator is blinking, the phone memory is low , and you must delet e some data. See "M emory low" on page 1 19 . Y ou have re ceived on e or more voice m essages . See "C all voice mail" on page 26. Ther e are message s waiting to be se n t i n Outbox . See "Outbox" on page 60. The rin ging type has been set t o Sile nt , message ale rt tone to Of f , and IM ale rt tone to Of f in the currently activ e profile. See "Profiles" on page 82. Th e pho ne keypad is lock ed. T o unlo ck, pr ess th e Left sele ction ke y , then the * ke y . Y ou have an active alarm. See "Clock" on page 88. See "Calendar" on page 39. A Bluetoot h co nnection is active. All call forw arding is tu rned on. Indica tes that all calls to th e phone are forwarded to voic e mail. Se e "Call forw arding (network servic e)" on page 2 9. If y ou have two ph one lines, the forward indicator for the first li ne is and for the second line . See â Lin e in use (netw o rk servic e) â on page 68. Y ou c an m ake calls using phone line 2 only ( network service ). See " Line in use ( network ser vice) " on page 68. Data call GPRS conn ection. The G PRS symbol is shown in stead of the antenna sym bol when ther e is an ac tive GPRS connec t io n, when ther e ar e mu ltip le G PR S con n ect ions , an d for wh en t he GPR S co nn ec tion is put on hold du ring voice calls. Bluetooth connection USB con necti on
22 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Enhancement i ndicators V oice volume indicators â¢M E N U Press the Men u key to d ispl ay the mai n menu. In the me nu, yo u c an acces s all the applicat ions in your phone. Menu options are Open , List v iew or Grid view , Mov e , Move t o folder , New folder , Rename , App. downloads , Memory details , He lp , and Exit . Move in the menu Use t he Scro ll key a s follow s to n aviga te the me nu: ⢠Scroll up by pressing the Sc roll key up ( 1 ). ⢠Scroll down by pressing th e Scroll ke y down ( 2 ). ⢠Scroll le ft by p ressing the Scroll key left ( 3 ). ⢠Scr oll righ t by pressin g th e Scroll key ri g h t ( 4 ). ⢠Press the center of the Sc roll k ey (h ereaf t e r , press the Scro ll ke y) to ope n a selecte d applica tion or folder ( 5 ). Close applications Back step by pressin g Back or Ex it as ma ny ti mes as needed to return to th e standby mode, or sele ct Opti on s > E xit . If you pr ess the End key , the phone returns to the standby mode a nd the application is left ope n in th e background. Pre ssing the En d key will a lways end a call, e ven if another application is activ e and displa yed. When you sw itch the phon e off co rrectly , using th e Po w e r key , the phon e will attempt to s ave any unsa ved data and c lose any applic ations that a re still open. This process may take a short time. Head set conn ect ed Loopset connected Earpiece mode Loudspea ker mode 3 4 1 5 2
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 23 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started Rearrange the menu Y ou can rearrange the menu icons as required. Y ou c an place more rarely used application s in folders and move applicati ons that you us e more ofte n from a folder to th e ma in men u. Y ou can a lso crea te new folders. 1 Scroll to th e i tem you want to move, and selec t Op tions > Move . A chec k mark is placed b eside the application. 2 Scroll to w here you want the applic ation, and s elect OK . T o move an item to a fold er or f rom a fol der to th e menu, se e âÂÂCommon act ions for all applic ationsâ on page 23 . Switch between open application s If you h ave seve ral applic ations open a nd want to switch from one applicat ion to another , press and hold the Menu key . Th e a pplic at ion s wit chi ng window opens showing a list of application s that are currently open . Scroll to an appl ication and press the Sc ro ll ke y to go t o it. If memory is gettin g low , the phone may close some applications. T he phone sav es any unsaved data be fore an applicatio n is clo sed. ⢠OPTIONS LISTS Opt ions lis ts tell y ou which c omman ds are av ailable in diffe rent view s and situations. The available comman ds change depe nding on th e view . In s ome si tuatio ns, when you p ress the Sc roll ke y , a shorter options list appears , lis t ing the main comma nds av ailable in the view . ⢠COMMON A CTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS Open items for viewi ng âÂÂW hen y ou are vi ewing a list of files or folders an d wan t to ope n an ite m, scroll to the item a nd pre ss the cent er of th e Scr oll key , or select Options > Open . Edit ite ms âÂÂTo change the conte nts of an item, open it for viewin g and select Options > Edit . Us e t he Scro ll key to view all fie lds o f th e item. Rename items âÂÂT o giv e an item a new name , scroll to the file or folde r and sel ect Opti ons > Re name . Remo ve, de lete i tem s âÂÂScroll to the item, and sele ct Options > Delete ; or press t he Clear k e y . T o d e l e t e m a n y i t e m s a t a t i m e , m a r k e a c h i t e m a n d d e l e t e all of them at once.
24 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Mark an item âÂÂThere are several w ays to s elect ite ms in a list. ⢠To select one item at a time, sc roll to it, a nd select Options > Mark/ Unmark > Ma r k ; or press th e Edit key and th e Scroll key a t the s ame ti me. A c h e ck mark is p laced ne xt to t he it em. ⢠To s elect a ll items in the lis t, sele ct Opt ion s > Mark/ Unmar k > Mark a ll . Mark mul tiple i tems âÂÂPress and hold the Edi t key; the n scro ll up or down. As the sel ection mo ves , a c hec k m ark i s plac ed ne xt to t he it ems . To en d th e se lec tion, stop scrolling, an d release the Ed it key . ⢠After you have s elected all the items y ou wa nt, m ove or delet e them by selectin g Op tions > Mo ve to folder or Dele te . ⢠To unmark an item, s croll to it, and selec t Opti ons > Mark /U nma rk > Unm ark ; or press the Edi t key a nd the Sc rol l key at the s ame time. Create fo lders âÂÂT o crea te a ne w folder , se lec t Opti on s > New fol der . Y o u are asked to giv e a na me to the folder (up to 35 le tters). Mov e items to a folder âÂÂTo move item s to a folder or be tween folder s, select Options > M o v e to fo lde r ( not shown i f th ere are no f old ers availa ble). W h e n you sele ct Mov e t o fo lder , a list of available folde rs ope n s, and you can also see the root level of the application (for moving an item out of a fo lder). Select the loc ation to which you wa nt to move th e item, and select OK . Sen d ite ms âÂÂTo send i tems to co mpatible devices , scroll to the ite m that y ou wan t to se nd, and se lect Op tio ns > S end > Via mult imed ia or Via Blu eto oth . ⢠If you s elect to s end the item in a multime dia me ssage, an editor ope ns. Pres s the c ente r of t he Scr o ll k ey to sel ect th e recipi ents f rom the co ntacts dir ect ory , or write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To field. Add text or s ou nd, and select Opt ions > Se nd . Se e "Write and send messages" on page 55. ⢠If you select Via Bluetooth , see âÂÂSend data by Blueto oth connectionâ on page 1 13. ⢠SEARCH FOR ITEMS Y ou can sea rch for a name, fil e, fol der , or sho rtcut by using the sea rch field. In some situations the sear ch field is not visible automatically , b ut you ca n acti vate it by sele cting Opt ions > Fi nd or by starti ng to key in lett ers. 1 To search for a n item, start to k ey in text in th e search fie ld. The phone immediatel y starts to search for matches and moves the selection to the best match . 2 T o make the sea rc h more a ccur at e, key i n more let ters and th e sele ction moves to the ite m that be st matc hes the letters . 3 Whe n th e corre ct item is foun d, pres s the Scr oll key t o o pen it .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 25 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started ⢠V OLUME CON TROL When you ha ve an active call or are lis tening to a sou nd, scroll right or le ft to increase or decrease the v olume level, res pectively . See a lso âÂÂV oice volum e indicat orsâ on page 22. â¢L O U D S P E A K E R The loudspeaker al lo ws you to speak and liste n to the phone from a sh o rt di stance with out havi ng t o hol d the phone to you r ear . The lo udspeak er can be used du ring a call, with sound and vide o applications, an d when vie wing multi media messages. Sound and vi deo applicati ons use the louds peaker by defa ult. Using the loudsp e aker makes it easi er to us e other a pplications while in a call. T o activa te the louds peaker du ring an a ctive call, sele ct Loudsp. or Opti ons > Acti vate loud sp . A tone is playe d, is shown in the nav igation bar , and th e volume indic ator changes. The loudsp eaker ca nnot be act ivate d when a h eadset is connecte d to the ph one. To turn off the loudspeaker during an active c all, select Handset or Optio ns > Acti vate hand set . Impor tant: Do not hold th e phone near your e ar wh en the loudspeaker is in use bec ause th e volum e may be ex trem ely lou d. ⢠K EYGUARD Use the k eyguard (keypad loc k) feature to he lp prevent accidental key pre sses. In the st andby mode, pre ss the Left selection key; t he n q uic kl y pr ess the * key . When the keys are locked, appears on th e display . Press the Left sel ect ion key; the n q uickly p res s the * key t o un loc k the ke ys. When ke yguar d is on, pres s the Sen d key to answer a call. During a call, the phone ca n be operated in th e normal way . When the keygu ard is on, ca lls stil l may be possi b le t o the of f ici al emergency nu mber programmed into y our phone. Ent er the em ergency n umber (for example, 9 1 1 ), and press the Cal l key .
26 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 4 Y our ph one ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 In the standby mode, key in the ph one number , including t he area code. Scroll right o r left to m ove th e cursor . Press t he Clear key t o r emo ve a nu mbe r . For intern ational calls, pres s the * key twice for the interna tional prefix (the chara cter replace s the in ternational ac cess code), and key in the c ount ry co de, th e area cod e without 0, and t he phone numbe r . Calls describe d here as inte rnational m ay be made betwee n regions of the sam e nation. 2 Press t he Send key to call the numb er . 3 Press t he End key to end the call (or to can cel the call a ttempt). Pressi ng the End ke y always ends a call, even if another application i s active and displayed. Y ou c an ma ke a call u sing yo ur voic e so tha t you d o no t nee d to key i n the number . See "V oice dialing" on page 33. Use Contacts to make a call 1 To open the contac ts direc tory , sel ect Menu > Contacts , or pr ess the Scroll key in the standby mode. 2 To find a cont act, scroll t o the de sired n ame, or ke y in the first l etters of th e name. The search fiel d opens automatic ally and matching contac ts are listed. 3 Press t he Send key to sta rt the c all. If the contact has more than one phon e number , scroll to the number and press t he Send key to sta rt the c all. Call voice mail V oice m ail (n etwork service) is an an swering se rvice w here ca llers can le ave voice m essage s. ⢠To c all voice mail, press the 1 key a nd the Se nd k ey in the standby mode, or press and hold t he 1 key . ⢠If the phone as ks for the voice m ail numbe r , key it in an d press OK . Obtain th is numb er from you r service provider .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 27 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Y ou r phone To forwa rd calls to y our voice ma il, se e âÂÂCall fo rwar ding (netw ork s ervi ce)â on page 29. Each p hone line may ha ve its o wn voice mail nu mber . Se e " Line in use (net work ser vi ce) " on page 68. CHANGE THE VOI C E MAIL NUMBER To chang e the phon e numb er of you r voice mail , select Me nu > Too ls > Vo i c e m a i l > O p t i o n s > Change n umbe r . Key i n the numb er (obta ined fro m your ser vic e provid er) , and press OK . 1-touch dialing To view the 1 -touch dia ling grid, s elect Menu > T ools > 1-touc h . T o as sign a pho ne number to one o f th e 1 -touc h di alin g k eys ( 2 âÂÂ9 ), select Options > Assign . See also âÂÂAssign 1- touc h dia ling k eysâ on pa ge 34. To call the nu mber in the standby mode, pres s the co rresponding 1-tou ch dialing key and the Send key . To turn the 1 -touch dia ling fun ction on, s elect Me nu > S ettin gs > Cal l > 1-to uc h dia ling > On . If th e 1-tou ch dial ing functio n is set to On , press and hold the corresponding 1-touch dialing k ey until th e call is s tarted. Make a conference call (network service) Confere nce calling allows you to make a confere nce c all wi th up to six pa rticipan ts, depending on network lim itations. 1 Make a call to the fi r st participant . 2 To make a c all to a new part icipant, sel ect Opti ons > New cal l . 3 K ey in o r search th e memory for th e phone number of the participant, and press Call . The first c all is a utomat ically put o n hol d. 4 Whe n the new c all h as been answe red, sel ect O ptio n s > Conferenc e t o join the first particip ant in the confere nce ca ll. 5 To end th e ac tive c onfe renc e call , pres s th e End key . To add a new person to the call, re peat step 2.
28 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia To hav e a pri vate conversation w ith one of the participants, sele ct O ptions > Conf erence > Pri vate . Scroll to the desired participant, and press Priv ate . Th e confere nce call i s put on ho ld in your ph one, and the other particip ants ca n still continue talkin g with each other wh ile you ha ve a pr ivate discus sion with one participan t only . On ce you hav e finished the privat e convers ation, sele ct Options > Conference to return to t he conference call . T o drop one partici pant from the co nference ca l l, sele ct Opti ons > Conference > Drop par tici pant ; then s croll to t he participan t, and press Dr op . The quicke st way to make a new call is to dial th e number , and press the Sen d key to start the ca ll. The e xisting c all is a utomatica lly put o n hold . ⢠AN SWER A CAL L To a nswer an incoming ca ll, press the Sen d ke y . To end the call, press the End key . If you do not wa nt to ans wer a call, press th e End key . When a call c omes in, select Sile nce to quick ly mute t he ringing tone . Options during a call Selec t Options du ring a cal l for so me of t he fo llowi ng options: Answer , Dec line , Swap , Activate loudsp. or Activate handset , End active call , End all calls , Hol d or Unhold , Mute or Unmute , Conf erence , Tra n sf e r , Send t ouch t ones , and Help . Y ou m ight not have all of these option s. Contact your service provid er for more deta ils. Louds p eaker and Handset may be displayed as options for the Right selec tion key an d can be used as shortc uts for Activate handsfree and De activate handsfree , respectiv ely . Swa p is used to switch b etwe en the activ e ca ll and the call on h old. T ransfer is u sed to conn ec t an incom ing c a ll or a c all on hold with an active call an d to disco nnect yours elf from both calls. Send touc h tones is u sed to send DTMF tone sequen ces, for example, passwords or bank a ccount numbers : 1 K ey in the digi ts wit h the 0 âÂÂ9 ke ys. Each k eystroke gen erates a DTMF tone, whic h is trans mitte d while the call is activ e. Press th e * key repeatedly to produce * , p (inserts a pause of approximately 2 seconds before or between DTMF characters), and w (if you us e this ch aracte r , the rema ining seque nce is n ot sent un til yo u press the Send key a gain during the call) . Pres s th e # k ey to produ ce # . 2 To send the tone, press OK .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 29 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Y ou r phone Call wa iting (network service) If you ha ve activ ated the call wa iting service , the ne twork wil l notify you of a new incoming c all while you ha ve a ca ll in progress . 1 Du ring a call , press the Send key to answer the waiting call. The first c all is put on ho ld. 2 To switch betw een the tw o calls, pre ss Swa p . 3 T o end th e act ive ca ll, p ress th e En d key; or to end both calls at the same time, se lect Opti ons > End all cal ls . Call forwarding (network service) When ca ll fo rward ing is a ctivate d , y o u can direc t your i ncoming call s to ano ther number , for example , to your v oice ma il num ber . F or details, c ontact you r service provider . Select M enu > Se tti ng s > Call f or wardi ng . ⢠Selec t on e of th e fo rwar ding optio ns, for ex amp le, sele ct If bu sy to for ward vo ice ca lls whe n yo ur nu mb er is b us y or w he n you rej ect inco mi ng ca lls . ⢠Select Opti ons > Ac tivate to turn the forwarding settin g on, Cancel to turn the forwarding se tting off, or Ch eck s tatus to ch eck whet her th e forwarding is activ ated or not . ⢠To cancel all active forwarding, select Opti on s > Ca nce l al l forw ard s . See also â Ac tivity indicatorsâ on page 2 1. Call restrict ion and call forwarding c annot b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . S e e " C a l l restriction (ne twork se rvice)" on page 74. ⢠CAL L LOG Select Menu > Log . Y ou can use the log to monito r phone calls, text messages, data c a lls , and packet data connections registered by the phone . Filter the log to view just one type of event and creat e new contact cards based on the log inform ation. Conne ctions to your remote mai lbox, m ultimedia m essagi ng center , or brows er pages are shown as data calls or pa cket data connec tions in the ge neral commun ications lo g. Recent calls log Select Menu > Log > Rece nt cal ls . The phone registers the phone numbers of misse d, received, a nd dialed c alls, and the da te and time of you r calls. The phone registe rs missed and received calls only if the n etwork supports these funct ions and if the phone is switched on with in the net work serv ice ar ea.
30 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Op tion s in th e Missed , Received , an d Diale d v iews are Cal l , Create me ssage , Use n umber , Delet e, C lear list , A dd to Conta cts , He lp , and Exit . Miss ed c alls and re ceiv ed cal ls T o view a l ist of th e last 2 0 pho n e numb ers rece ived bu t not answere d (networ k ser vic e), sel ect Menu > Lo g > Rece nt cal ls > Mi ssed calls . If you receive indication of mi ssed calls while in the standby mode, press Show to ac cess th e li st of numbe rs. To call back, scroll to the num ber or na me y ou want to call, and pre ss the Sen d key . To view a lis t of the 20 num bers for calls most recently accepte d (network service), sele ct Me nu > L og > Re ce nt ca ll s > Rece ived ca lls . Dialed n u mbers To view the 2 0 pho ne num bers for the mos t recently called or attempted, select Log > Rece nt c alls > Di ale d num bers . ERASE RE CENT CALL LIST S To clear all re cent call lists, select O ption s > Clea r re cen t calls in th e Recent calls main vie w . To c lear one of the call logs, open the log you wan t to eras e an d sele ct Options > Clear lis t . To c le ar an individual event, ope n a log, scroll to the event, and press the Clear key . C onfirm by press ing Yes . Call timers Select Menu > Log > Call timers to view the duration of y our incomi ng and outgoing calls. Note: The actual time in voiced for calls by you r service pro vider may vary , depending upon network fe atures, rounding- off for billing, and so forth. To e rase call du ration timers, selec t Op tions > Clear ti mers . For this you ne ed the lock c ode. See "Security" on page 72. Note: Some timers may be reset during servic e or software u pgrades. GPRS data counter Select Menu > Log > GPR S co unter . The GPRS d ata counter allows you to check the amo unt of data sent a nd rec eive d during packet data (GPRS) c onnections. This ma y be he lpful if your service provider charges for GPRS connections based on th e amount of data sent and received. The actual am ount invoic ed by your service provider may vary depending on rounding , taxes, or other factors.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 3 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Y ou r phone View the gener al log Select Menu > Log an d scroll right. In t h e g ene ral l og, the send er or r ecipient na me, phon e numb er , na me of the servic e prov ider , or a cces s po int is dis play ed fo r each communi cation event. E v e n t s s u c h a s a t e x t m e s s a g e s e n t i n m o r e t h a n one part and packet data conn ections, are logged as one communication event. FILTE R THE GENERAL LOG 1 Select Opt ions > Filter . A list of filters opens. 2 Scroll to a filter , and press Sel ect . ERASE THE CO NTENTS OF THE GENERAL LOG To erase all the lo g con ten ts, rece nt ca lls log, and messaging delivery report s permanently , select Op tions > Clear log . Se le ct Ye s to confirm. P ACKET DAT A COUNTER AND CONNECT ION TIMER To v ie w how mu ch data, measured in kilobyt es, has been transferre d and how long a certain G PRS con nection has last ed , scroll to an incom ing or outgoin g even t la bel ed GP RS an d sele ct Options > View de tails . Log settings Select Menu > Log > Opt ions > Setti ngs to open th e lis t of settings. Log durat ion â The log ev ents remain in the phone memory for a set nu mber of day s after w h ic h they are au tomati cal ly erased to free m emory . If you sele ct No l og , all t he log conte nts, recen t calls log, a nd messa ging delivery reports are perm anently deleted. Show call dur ation âÂÂSet to Ye s or No . See "Call time rs" on page 30.
32 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 5 P ersona l info rmation â¢C O N T A C T S To open Contacts , pres s the c enter of t he Scro ll key in the st and by mode, or select Menu > C ont ac ts . In Contacts , yo u can store and manage contac t information , such as names, phone numbers, and addresses. Y ou can also add a perso nal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnai l image to a cont act card. Y ou can create co ntact grou ps, which a llow you to send text mess a ges or e -ma il to man y rec ipie nts w ith co mpa tibl e de vic es at th e s ame time . Opt ions in Con tac ts are Op en , Call , Cre at e message , N ew contac t , Open con versation , Ed it , Delete , Duplic ate , Add to group , Belongs to group s , Mark/ Unma rk , Copy to SIM direct. , Go to web ad dress , Send, Con tacts info , SIM directory , Ser vic e number s , Settin gs, Hel p , an d Exit . Create and edit contact c ards 1 Ope n Co nt ac ts and selec t O ption s > N ew contac t . An empty contac t card opens. 2 Fill in th e fields y ou want, and press Do ne . The contact card is saved in the phone memory and closed, after which you can see it in the co ntacts di rectory . To edit co ntact cards , see âÂÂComm on ac t ions for all applicationsâ on page 23. Options when editin g a cont act card ar e A d d th umbnail or Remo ve thumbn ail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , He lp , an d Exit . To de lete con tact cards, in the cont acts direct ory , s croll to the cont act card and sel ect O pti ons > Delete . T o attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open a contact card, and sele ct Options > Ed it > Options > Add thumbn ail . The thumbnail image is also shown when the c ontact is calling you. After you attach a thu mbnail image to a co ntac t card , sel ect Add thum bnail t o replace the image w ith a different thumbnail or R emove thum bnail to remove the thumbnail from the contact card. To as sign default numbers and addre sses to a contact card, open the contac t card, and se lect Opti ons > De faults . A pop -up window ope ns, listing the different options .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 33 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information Copy between SIM c ard and phone memory To c opy names and numbers from a SIM ca rd to your phone , open Contacts , sel ect O pti ons > SIM directo ry , scroll to the name s you wa nt to c opy , an d sel ect O ptio n s > Copy to Contacts . If you want to cop y a phon e, fax, or pager n umber fro m Contacts t o y o ur S I M card, s elect Contacts , ope n a conta ct card, scroll to th e numbe r , and sele ct Option s > Copy to S IM dir ect . Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group Y ou c an set a ringing to ne for each contact c ard and grou p. Wh en that contact or group me mber calls you, the phone plays th e chosen ringing ton e (if the callerâÂÂs telephone numbe r is sent with th e call and your phone recogn izes it). 1 Press t he Scro ll k ey to open a contact card; or scroll right to go to groups, and select a contact group. 2 Select Option s > Ringi ng ton e . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Scroll to th e ringing tone you wish to u se for the con tact or group, and press Select . 4 To re move the ringing tone , select D efault tone from the lis t of ringing tones. For an indivi dual contact, the phone will alw ays use th e ring ing t one tha t wa s assigned last. If you change a grou p ri nging tone, th en the ringing ton e of a single contact that belon gs to that group, the ringing tone of the single contact is used. V oice dialing Y ou can mak e a phone c all by saying a v oice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken words can be a voice tag. When reco rding, hold the ph one at a short distance away from your mout h. After the sta rting tone, say cle arly the wo rd, or words, you want to record as a voic e tag . REQUI REMENTS FOR VOICE TAGS Before using voic e dialing, note th e following: ⢠V oice t ags are no t la ngu age-dep enden t. They ar e depen dent on the sp eaker' s voic e. ⢠Y ou m ust say th e na me e xactl y as you sai d it wh en y ou reco rded it. ⢠V oice tags are sensitive to background nois e. Rec ord voi ce tag s, and use them i n a qu iet en vironm ent. ⢠V ery short name s are not accepted. U se long names, and avoid similar names for diffe rent numbe rs.
34 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Note: Using voic e tags may b e difficult in a nois y envi ronment or during an em ergency , so you shoul d not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumsta nces. ADD A VOI CE TAG TO A PHONE NUM BER V oice tags can only be added to ph one numbe rs stored in phon e memory . Se e "Copy between SIM c a rd and phone memory" on page 33 . 1 In Contacts , scroll to the conta ct to whic h you w ant to add a vo ice tag, and press the Sc ro ll key t o ope n the co ntac t car d. 2 Scroll to th e numb er t o wh ich you want to add the vo ice tag, a nd selec t Option s > Ad d voic e tag . 3 Press Start to record a voice tag. 4 After the starting tone, cl ea rly say th e words y ou want to use as a voice tag. After recording, th e phone plays the recorded tag, and Pl aying voic e tag is displayed. When the voice tag has been succe ssfully saved, Vo i c e t a g s a v e d is displayed and a be ep sounds. A symbol can be seen n ext to the nu mber in the conta ct c ard. To r ep lay , er ase , o r cha ng e a vo ic e t ag, sc rol l to t h e it em th at ha s a vo ic e t ag (indicated by ), and select Op tions > V oice tag > Playback , Change , or Delet e . MAKE A CAL L USING A VOICE TAG 1 In the standby mode, press and hold th e Right sel ection key . A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. 2 When you make a call by using a voice tag, hold the phone at a short dista nce from you r mouth, and s ay the voice tag cle arly . The phon e plays the original voice tag, displays the name and n umber , and dials the nu mber of th e recognized voi ce tag. If the phone plays the wron g voice tag or i f you want to retry voice dialing, press Retry . V oice dia ling should not be u sed whe n a dat a call or a GPRS c onnect ion is active b ecause the voice cal l will inte rrupt the conne ction. Assign 1-touch di a ling keys 1-tou ch d ialin g is a qui ck w ay t o c all fre que ntly used nu mber s. You can as sign 1-t ouch di ali ng k ey s to eig ht pho ne number s. Numbe r 1 is reserve d for voice mai l. 1 Open th e contac t card for w hich you want a 1 -touch dialin g key , a nd scroll to the phone numbe r you w ant to add to 1-touch dialing. 2 Select Opti ons > As sign 1-t o uch no. . The 1-t ouch dialing grid ope ns, showing you the numbe rs from 2 âÂÂ9 .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 35 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information 3 Scroll to a n umber and press Assi gn . Whe n yo u retu rn to the co nt act informat ion view , the 1 -touch dialing ic on is displayed n ext to the num ber . 4 To call the con tact by 1-t ouch dial ing in the stan dby mo de, press the 1-to uch di aling key and Se n d ke y , or pres s and hold th e 1-touch di ali ng key . View subscribed contacts Select Menu > Cont acts , and scroll to the second tab t o open the subscribed conta cts list. This list allo ws you to vie w presen ce data , incl uding ava ilability and IM st atus, f or all subscr ibed contact s . See also âÂÂPr esence (network se rvice)â on page 35 and âÂÂInstant messaging (IM) (network service)â on page 96. Op tions i n the s u bsc ribed contac ts vie w are Ope n , Call , Create message , Open con versation , Unsub scribe , Subscribe new , Ma rk/Unmark , My pres ence , Help , and Exi t . If you are not logge d in to th e presence service, y ou will se e only a few of the se options. Manage contact groups Select Me nu > Cont acts , and scrol l to the third tab to open the contact groups list. Options in the groups list view are Open , New group, Delete, Ren ame , Ringi n g tone , Contact s info , Se ttings , He l p , a n d Exi t . CRE ATE CO NTA CT G ROU PS 1 In the con tacts directory , scroll t o the groups tab . 2 Select Optio ns > Ne w grou p . 3 Wri te a name fo r the gr oup, or use the def aul t name Group 1 , and pr ess OK . ADD M EMBERS TO A G ROUP 1 In the contac ts directory , scroll to the conta ct you want to add to a group, and sele ct Optio ns > Add to gr oup. A list of availabl e groups opens. 2 Select a group, and press the Scroll key to ad d the cont act. ⢠PRESENC E (NETWORK SERVICE) Select Menu > Presence . Opt ions in P resen ce are Open , My availability , Viewers , Update presence , Login or Logou t , Settings , Help , and Exi t . Use t he pres ence ser vice to inf orm o the rs when , wher e, and h o w yo u want to be contacte d. Presence allow s you to view and create a dy namic profile and sh a r e informa tion or control services. Presence informatio n is visible to other users of the servi c e and can show where you are an d what you are doing, as well as let others know whe ther you are available and whether you pre fer for people to c all or send mess ages.
36 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Bef ore yo u can u se the p resen ce ser vic e, yo u mus t ch oose a se rvice pr ovide r and save the settings of that service . Y ou ma y receive the settin gs in a special text message, called a smart message, from the servic e provider that offers the presence service. See "Smart messages " on page 57. For more information, contact your service prov ider . Select Optio ns > Login or Logou t to log in and out of th e presence service. The pre sen ce appl icat ion on your ph one all ows y ou to change your ow n pu blishe d informat ion and determin e who is auth orized to see you r presence . T o v iew the presence in formation of oth ers, you must use th e Contacts a pplication. Se e "View subscribed contac ts" on page 35. Change your availability Select Optio ns > My av ailabi lity and one of the follow ing: Avail able â Y ou are available for people to call or send you messa ges, for e xample, your pho ne is set to Norm al profile. See " Profiles" on page 82. Busy âÂÂY ou may be available for people to c a ll or send you m essages, for ex ample, y our phone is in Meeti ng profile. Not avail able âÂÂY ou are not available for people to call o r send you m ess ages , fo r e xampl e, you r phone is in S ilent profile. Change your presence information Y ou can set up public, private, and blocked presence information , and define who can vie w you r inform ation. PUB LIC PRES ENC E Selec t Menu > Presence > Public pre s. t o cha ng e yo ur p ub lic p res en ce inf ormat ion. This information is availa ble to any one you have n ot blocked. Select Optio ns a n d one of the following: My ava ilabi lity âÂÂSele ct Availa ble , Busy , or Not available . Viewers âÂÂOpe n th e Curr ent v i e w ers list to see the n ames, pho ne numbers , or user IDs of the viewers whom you do not allow to view your private presence messages, but wh o are currently viewing your public presence. Y ou c an scroll to a v iew er , p ress Optio ns , and select from the following o ptions: ⢠Add to private list âÂÂA llow the v iew er to als o see your priv ate pres ence . ⢠Block â Prevent th e viewer from seeing you r presenc e information. ⢠Ad d to con ta cts âÂÂAdd the vie wer to you r con tacts dire cto ry . ⢠Re fre sh lis ts â Update the viewer lis ts. This option is only available when you are not logge d in to the presence service.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 37 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information Logi n or Logou t âÂÂConnec t to or disconnect from the pres ence service. Update pr esence âÂÂUpda te your pr ese nce inf orm atio n to th e pre sen ce se rvi ce. Set ting s âÂÂMa nage the publishing o f you r presence information. PRIVATE P RESENCE Select Menu > Presence > Pri vate p res. t o change your privat e presence informat ion. This inform ation is onl y available to th ose whom you have authorized to view y our priva te information . Select Options and one of the followin g: My ava ilabi lity âÂÂSele ct Availa ble , Busy , or Not available . My pr esen ce msg. â Wri te a tex t mes sage o f up t o 40 characters to describe your curre nt ava ilability . My p resenc e logo âÂÂAdd a logo to you r availability in formation. Logo files are st ored in Galler y . See "G allery" on page 48. Viewers âÂÂOpe n yo ur pri vat e p resen ce vi ew ers li st to see the na mes , pho ne numb ers, o r user IDs of t he viewe rs w hom yo u all ow t o view you r privat e pre sence mess ages. Y ou can scro ll to a vi ewer , press Option s , and select from the follow ing options: ⢠Add n ew âÂÂAd d a new vie wer ma nua lly or fr om y our cont act s di re ctor y . Y ou can only sele ct a co ntact w ho has a user I D in the co ntact ca rd. ⢠Block â Prevent th e viewer from seeing you r presenc e information. ⢠Ad d to con ta cts âÂÂAdd the vie wer to you r con tacts dire cto ry . ⢠Remo ve fr om list âÂÂR emove the view er from the private list. This option is available also wh en you mark s everal view ers in th e list. I f the list is em pty , the optio n is not available. Y o u can also scroll to a vie wer and press the Clear key to p rev ent that vi ewer fro m seein g y our p riva te prese nce mess ages. ⢠View d etails âÂÂS how the u ser ID inform ation o f the vi ewer . ⢠Re fre sh lis ts â Update the viewer lis ts. This option is only available when you are not logge d in to the presence service. Update pr esence âÂÂUpda te your pr ese nce inf orm atio n to th e pre sen ce se rvi ce. Logi n or Logou t âÂÂConnec t to or disconnect from the pres ence service. Set ting s âÂÂManage t he publ is hing of yo ur pre sence. BLOC KED PRESE NCE Select Me nu > Pres ence > Bloc ked pr es. t o change your bloc k ed presence informat ion. Blocked v iewers will see a screen cont aining n o personal de tails. Select Optio ns and one of the following: Viewers âÂÂOpen your blocked viewers list to see the names, phone num bers, or user IDs of the viewers wh om you have blocked from seeing you r public or pri vate pr esence in format ion. Y ou can sc roll to a viewe r , press Options , an d select fro m the fo llowing option s:
38 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Unbl ock âÂÂRemove th e viewer from the bloc ked list. Y ou c an also unblock a view er by scrollin g to the viewer and pressing t he Clear key . ⢠Add to private list âÂÂA llow the v iew er to als o see your priv ate pres ence . ⢠Add ne w â Add a new block ed viewer m anually or from your contacts dire ctory . Y ou can only select a c ontact who h as a user ID in t he cont a c t ca rd. ⢠Ad d to con ta cts âÂÂAdd the vie wer to you r con tacts dire cto ry . ⢠View d etails âÂÂS how the u ser ID i nfor matio n of the vi ewer . ⢠Re fre sh lis ts â Connect to the presence service to update the vie wer lists. This option is only availa ble when you ar e not lo gged in to the presenc e service. Update pr esence âÂÂUpda te your pr ese nce inf orm atio n to th e pre sen ce se rvi ce. Logi n or Logou t âÂÂConnec t to or disconnect from the pres ence service. Set ting s âÂÂManage t he publi shin g of you r pre senc e. Update your information Select Me nu > Pres enc e > Option s > Up date pre senc e . This option is onl y available when you are logged in to the presence serv ice, have change d your information i n the Pri vate Pr ese nce or Publ ic Pre sence view , an d have not u pdated that pres ence informat ion yet. Presence settings Select Opti ons > S ettings from th e Presen ce ma in menu, and select from the follow ing: Show pres ence to â Select from the following: ⢠Privat e & publ ic âÂÂBoth public and priv ate presence is publi shed. ⢠Priv ate viewers âÂÂOnly priv ate vi ewe rs can see yo ur pres en ce infor ma tion. ⢠Publi c vie wers â Both public and priv ate viewers see your public presence in formation. ⢠No o ne âÂÂY o ur presence information is not publishe d. Sync. wi th Prof iles âÂÂD ef ines whet her your published presen ce informati on is lin ked to you r phone profile settings. W hen you c hoose an option othe r than Off , be sure to define your profile pre sence informati on as well (see âÂÂCreate and customize profile sâ on page 8 2). Select from th e following: ⢠Off âÂÂY our pre sence inform ation is not change d, even if you change your phone profile setting. ⢠On âÂÂBoth A vailab ilit y an d Private message are changed w h en you c h ange your phon e profile setting. ⢠A vai labi lit y only â Pr ivate m essage is not chan ged when you ch an ge your profile . ⢠Privat e msg. on ly â Av ailab ility is not chan ged when you change y our profile settin g.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 39 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information Server settings âÂÂOpens th e Server settings me nu in t he IM fe ature. Select Pre se n ce l ogin type from this me nu to designate when you want to lo g in t o the presenc e service. Se e âÂÂIM settin gsâ on page 9 7 for further in formation on the login types. ⢠P OSITIONING (NETWORK SERVICE ) Select Me nu > Tools > Position ing . P ositi oning allows the netw ork to de tect th e po sition of your phone. By enabling or disabling P o si ti oning , yo u choo se wh en your position informat ion is provided to the net work. To e nab le positioning in your ph one, selec t Sett ing s > P o si ti oning > O n . If yo u need to e nter a lock code, see âÂÂSecurity â on page 72. When you rece ive a position request, a messag e is displayed showin g the service tha t is making the requ est. Pres s Acc ept to allow your pos ition information to be sent, or press Reject to den y th e reques t. P osition request messages are logged in the Recv . requests lis t. To v iew t hem, s elect Menu > P ositi oning > Rec v . request s . T he i con bes ide each reque st indica tes whethe r the reque st is new , rejecte d, or acc epted. If y ou want to see detai ls of a req uest, scroll to the re quest, and press the center of the Sc roll key . I f you wan t to cl ear the Rec v . requ ests list , sele ct Opti ons > Cl ear list . â¢C A L E N D A R In Calendar , you c an keep track of y our appointme nts, meet ings, birthda ys, anniv ersaries , and o ther ev ents . Y o u can also set a calendar alarm to remind you of upcoming events. Create entries 1 Select M enu > C alend ar > O pti ons > N ew e ntry and one of th e following opt ions: Meeti ng âÂÂCreates an appoint ment th at has a specific date and tim e. Me mo âÂÂC reates a general en try for a day . Anni vers ary â Creates a re minder for birthdays or speci al dates. Ann i ve rsary entr ie s are repeat ed ever y year . 2 Fill in th e fields, and scroll to m ove be tween fie lds. Subj ect or Occa si on âÂÂWrite a de scription of the event. Locat ion âÂÂIndicates the place of a me eting (optional).
40 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Sta rt t ime , En d time , Start d ate , an d End dat e . Al arm âÂÂSele ct On to display t he Alar m time and Al arm da te fields. Repeat â Press the center of the Scr oll key to change the entry to be repe ating. Shown w ith in the day view . Repeat un til âÂÂSet an ending date for the repeated ent ry , for example , the ending date of a weekly course you are tak ing. This option is show n only if you have s elect ed to repeat the ev en t. Sync hroni zati on â â¢ Privat e âÂÂAfter synchroniza tion the c alend ar entry c an be see n only by you a nd it will no t be shown t o others, even if they h ave online a ccess to view th e ca lenda r . ⢠Publi c âÂÂThe calendar e ntry is shown to othe rs who ha ve ac cess to view your ca lendar onli ne. ⢠None âÂÂThe calendar e ntry w ill not be copie d whe n you syn chronize you r calend ar . 3 T o save the en try , pre ss Do ne . When editi ng or deleting a repeated e ntry , choose how you want the change s to tak e effect: All oc curr enc es âÂÂAll repeated entrie s are changed. Thi s entry onl y âÂÂOnly the cu rrent e ntry will be chan ged. Cale nda r v iews Press t he # key in t he mont h, we ek, or day views to auto mat ically hig hlight todayâÂÂs date. To key in a ca lendar en try , pres s an y numb er k ey ( 1 âÂÂ0 ) in any calendar view . A meeting e ntry is opened, an d the characters you keyed in are added to the Subj ect field. To go to a c e rtain date, sele ct Option s > Go to dat e . W rite the d ate, a nd p res s OK . Icons in t he day v iew are memo and anniversary . Synchronization i cons in the w eek and mo nth views are red for private synchroniza tion, blue for public s ynchro n ization, pin k for no syn chronization, and black for more than one synchroniz ation entry in a day . Calendar settings Select Opti ons > S ettings and one of the following o ptions: Calendar alarm tone âÂÂSelec t a personalized al arm tone, or no tone at all . Def aul t vie w âÂÂSe lect th e vie w tha t is show n first when you open Calendar .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 4 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia P er sonal information W eek starts on âÂÂCh ange th e starti ng day o f th e week. I f yo u ch ange the setting s s o that the week starts on a day other than Sunday , the week numbers will not be s h own. W eek view title âÂÂC hange the ti tle of th e we ek vi ew to be the week numbe r or th e week da tes. Clear calendar memory T o remove more than one event at a time, go to the month vi ew , and select Options > De let e en try and one of th e following: Before date â D elet e all cale ndar entries that take place before a certain date. Enter the date before which all cale ndar entrie s will be deleted. All e ntri es â Dele te all c alenda r entries. ⢠T O-DO In the To- do list y ou can ke ep a list of tasks that you ne ed to do . The to-do list uses shared me mory . See " Shared memory" on page 13. 1 Select Menu > T o-do . 2 To start ente ring a to-do n ote, pre ss an y number k ey ( 1 âÂÂ0 ). The editor ope ns, and the cursor blinks afte r the lette rs you have e ntered in the Subje ct field. 3 Finish enteri ng th e ta sk in the Su bject field. 4 Scroll to the Due date field, and key in a date. 5 To set a priority for the t ask, scroll to the Pri ority fie ld, and select Hi g h , Norm al , or Low . 6 To sav e the to-do note, press Done . If you re move all characters from the Subj ect field and press Done , the note w ill be deleted, even if you are e diting a pre viously saved note . To open a to-do note, scroll to it, and press the Scro ll ke y . To delete a to -do note, scroll to it, and select Op ti on s > De lete ; or press the Clear key , and sele ct Ye s to co nfir m. T o mark a to-do note as completed, s c roll to it, and se le ct Opt ions > Mark as done . To res tore a t o-do note, select Opt ions > Mark as not done . ⢠COPY CO NTENT FROM COMPATIBLE NOKIA PHONE S Y ou can mov e calendar , contacts, and to-do data from compatible Nokia ph ones to your ph one using your P C and th e PC Suite con tent copier application. Instructions for us ing the ap plication ca n be fo und in th e help func tion of PC Suit e on the CD-ROM.
42 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 6 Mu ltime dia â¢C A M E R A Y ou can use th e came ra to tak e pict ure s and recor d videos w hile on the mov e. The images are automatical l y saved i n Gallery , where you ca n rename th em a nd or gani ze them in folde rs. Y ou can als o send ima ges and vide o recordin gs in a m ultimedi a message, a s an e-m ail attac hmen t, or by Blue toot h con necti on. The came ra pro duces JPEG im ages, and video c lips are recorde d in the 3 GPP file form at with the .3gp file e xtension. T ake picture s 1 Select Camera in t he standby mode, or select Menu > C amer a , a nd scroll left to m ake su re you are on the Ima ge tab . The camera opens, and you can see the viewfinder and the croppin g lines, whi ch sh ow y ou th e im age a rea to be captur ed. Y ou ca n al so s ee th e im ag e counter , wh ich shows you h ow many image s, depending on th e selected picture qual ity , fit in the memory of your phone or memory car d, if you use one . Options before taking a picture are Capt ure , New , Activate night mode or Deact. night mode , Self-timer , Go to Galler y , Settings, He lp , and Exit . 2 Scroll up to zoom in on your subject be fore tak ing the p icture; scroll down to zoom out again. The zoom indicator to the right of the display sh ows the zoom level. The resolution of a zoomed picture is lowe r than that of a non-zoomed picture, but the image re mains th e same size. Y ou may notice the differen ce in image qua lity if view ed on a PC. 3 To tak e a picture, press the Scro ll key . Do not move th e phon e before the cam era ap pl ication starts to sav e the ima ge. Th e im age is sav ed au toma ti cally in Gal ler y . Se e "Galler y" on page 48. To tak e a photo im mediately after anoth er , se lect Opt ions > Se tting s > Imag e > Show captured image , t hen se l e ct No . Th e phot os do not rema in on the d isplay after b eing t aken, are saved in th e Gallery , and the cam era is read y for us e again. If camera image s look smudgy , check th at the camera lens protection window is clean. See " Care and maintenan ce" on page 126 . The camera goes int o battery saving mode if there have been no key presses within a minu te. To continue taki ng picture s, press t he Sc roll ke y .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 43 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia OPT IONS AFTER CAP TURING AN IMAG E Options after a picture has been taken are Ne w , Delet e , Send , Se t as wa llpaper , Rena me image , Go to Gall ery , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . If you do not wa nt to s ave the imag e, select Options > Delete . To return to th e view find er to ta ke a n ew pic ture, press the Scro ll key . Y ou can insert an image into a contac t card. See " Create an d edit contact cards" on page 32. SELF-TI MER T o inc lude yourself in the picture, use the self-timer to delay the taking of a picture. Select Op tion s > Se lf-tim er > 10 sec on ds , 20 seconds , o r 30 seco n ds > Act iv ate . Th e camer a tak es th e pict ure af ter the se lect ed delay has elap sed. IMAGE S AND MEMORY C O NSUM PTION Y our phone has approximately 8 MB of free memory for images, contact information, calendar , messages, and so on. See "Shared memory" on page 13. Images taken u sing the h igh-quality setting and th ose taken in night mode take up the mo st me mory . By u sing a me mory card with you r phon e you ca n incre ase th e numb er of images you can store. To see how much memo ry is av ailable on your phon e and memory card, see âÂÂV iew memory consum ptionâ on page 78. The follo wing table show s approximately how many images w ould fit in 1 MB of memory , de pending on image type and qualit y : Record videos 1 Press Cam era in the standby mode, or select Menu > Cam era , and scroll right to the Video ta b . Options before recording a video are Record , New , A ctiv ate night mode or Deact. night mode , Mute, Go to Galler y , Sett ings, Help , and Exit . 2 Press t he Scro ll key to sta rt recordin g. To pause recording at any time, press Pa u s e . T o resume , pr ess Co ntin ue . Scroll up to zoom in on your subject before or during recordin g; scroll down to zoom out. 3 To stop recording, press St op . Image q ualit y Ima ge ty pe Bas ic Norm al Hig h Sta nd ard 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18
44 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia The video clip is saved to eith er phone memory or the me mory card, depending on the Me mory i n use setting. See "Camera and video settings" on page 44. To immediate ly play t he vide o clip you jus t recorde d, s elect Options > Play . To play previously saved video clips, go to Gallery . See "Galle ry" on page 48. Opt ions after you have re corde d a vi deo are New , Play , Dele te, Send , Renam e , Go to Galle ry , Settings, Help , and Exit . Camera and video settings Select Menu > Cam era > Op tions > Sett ing s to a djust th e settin gs for still image captures and video recordin g. Select the follow ing options: Ima ge âÂÂA djust the s ettings for still ima ges: ⢠Ima ge qua lity â High , Norma l , and Basic . Th e bett er th e ima ge q ualit y , the more memory the imag e consum es. S ee "Imag es an d memo ry con sumpti on" on p age 43. ⢠Show capt ured image âÂÂT o take a ph oto imme diately after anoth er , select No . The photos do not remain on t he display after being t aken, are saved in the Galle ry , and the ca mera is ready for use again. ⢠Def aul t imag e nam e â Allows y ou to set a na me for sa ved image s. By default, images are n amed Image(00 1) , Image(002) , Image(0 03) , and so forth when they are saved. ⢠Me mory in use â Selec t wh ether yo u want to save your images in phone memory or on the me mory card, if you use one. Video âÂÂAdjust the settings for recording v ideos: ⢠Leng th âÂÂAv ailable record ing time is displayed above the top right c o rner of the viewfind er . Select on e of the follow ing video le ngth option s: Max imum âÂÂRecorded video lengt h is restricted by available me mory . Recordings can last up t o 1 0 m inutes, depending on available memory . Shor t âÂÂRes tricts vide o length to optimize it for MM S sending. ⢠Vi deo res olut ion âÂÂSele c t 128x96 or 176x144 . ⢠Defa ult vide o name âÂÂAllows you to set a name for saved videos. By default, videos are name d V ide o(00 1) , Vi deo( 00 2) , Video(003) , and so forth when they are saved. ⢠Me mory in use â Se lect wheth er you wa nt to save you r videos in phone memory or on the me mory card, if you use one. ⢠VIEW IMAGES Pictu res taken wi th the cam era are sto red as im ag es in Gal le ry . See "G allery " on page 48. Select Me nu > Ga llery > Ima ge s , and selec t an image. Pres s the Scro ll key to dis play th e i mag e.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 45 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia In the i mages th umbnai l view : 1 Scroll right o r left to m ove between th e phone and memory card. 2 To browse the list of image s, scroll up and down. 3 Press t he Scro ll key to open an image. Wh en the i mage is o pen, you can see t he name of t he image . When vie wing an image, scroll right or left to go t o the ne xt or previous image in the current folde r . Options when viewing an image are Send , Set as wallpap er , Ro ta te, Zoom in , Zoom ou t , F ull s cree n , Delet e , Renam e , View deta ils , A dd to âÂÂGo t oâ , Help , and Ex it . Y ou c an vi ew anim ated GIF files in the same wa y as oth er images. Zoom on a sav ed image 1 Select Optio ns > Zoo m in or Z oom ou t . Y ou can see the zo oming rat io at the top of the displ ay . See "Keyb oard short cuts" on page 45. 2 Press Bac k to retu rn to the initial vie w . The zooming ratio is not s tore d permanent ly . If you zoo m in on GIF animati ons while they are playi ng, the anim ation w ill freeze un til norma l zoom is resum ed, whe n play will con tinu e. FULL SCR EEN When yo u sele ct Options > Full scr een , the panes around the im age are remo ved so t hat yo u ca n see more of th e im age. Pr ess the Right se l ectio n key to return to the initia l vie w . MOVE THE FOC U S When you ar e zo oming an im age , us e the Scro ll ke y to mo ve the focu s to the left, right, up, or do wn, so that you can take a c loser look at one part of the image, for example , its upper righ t corner . K eyboard shortcuts 1 keyâÂÂRo tat e i mag e 90 degre es count ercl ockwis e. 3 k eyâÂÂRotate image 90 de gre es clockwise. 5 keyâÂÂZoom in. 0 keyâÂÂZoom out. * keyâÂÂChange be tween full scre en and normal v iew . Scro ll key âÂÂScroll up, down , left, right. When you rota te an im age, the rot ation sta tus is n ot store d permane ntly .
46 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠PLAYE R Select Menu > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can play local m edia files stored in the phone memory or memory card, or stream media files over the air from a st reaming l ink. The s treaming link can be ac tivated durin g a browsing ses s ion or stored in t he phone mem ory or memory card. Media files are video, music, or au dio clips. F iles with th e extensions .3gp, .amr , .mp4, .ra, .rv , .rm, and .ram are support ed by RealPlayer . RealPlayer does not support all file formats or all t he variations of a file format. For exam ple, RealPlayer will a ttempt to open all .mp4 file s. However , some . mp4 files ma y include c ontent that is n ot co mpliant wit h 3GPP sta ndards and, therefore, is not supported by this phone. I n this case, the operation migh t fail and result in partial playback or in an error message. Play media files Opt ions in R ealPlayer are Play , Pa u s e , Contin ue, Stop , Mute, Unmut e , Cli p details , Settings , Help , an d Exit . T he available options m ay vary . T o play a media file , select Menu > RealPlayer > Options > Op en and one of the follow ing: Most recent c lips â Play on e of the las t six f iles p layed i n RealP layer . Saved cl ip âÂÂScr oll t o a f ile in ph one mem ory or on memor y ca rd, and pres s t he Scroll key t o play t h e file. Me m. car d sou nd cli ps âÂÂCreate a tra ck list from all sou nd files on the memory ca r d. Wh en yo u cr e a te a track list this way , the first song in the list automatically begins playing. STREAM CONT ENT OVER THE AI R ⢠Select a streaming lin k save d in G allery . B efore y our live cont ent begins streamin g, your phone will c onnect to the sit e and load th e file. ⢠Open t he link to a file i n the b rowser . T o str eam li ve con tent , you m ust fi rst c onfig ure y our def aul t acce ss po int. Se e "Access points" on page 68. For the default access poin t, some service provide rs will require you to use an ac cess point define d in your phone. Ot her service pr ov ide rs all ow yo u t o use a WAP a ccess point. Contact your service provider for more inform ation. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rt sp:// URL address. Y ou cannot open an http:// U RL addre ss. Ho wever , RealPlay er will recogn ize a n http lin k to a . ram file sin ce a .ra m file is a text file conta ining an rts p link. SHORTC UTS DURING PLAY When a m edia file is playing, use the Scro ll key t o se ek (m ove quickl y throug h the me dia file), an d to m ute the s ound, as follows :
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 47 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia Scroll up and hold to seek forward, or scroll down and h old to seek back ward through th e media file. Scroll left and hold un til th e indicator is displaye d to mut e the sou nd. Scroll right a nd hold until you see the indicator to turn on the sound. Change settings Select Opti o ns > Settin g s > Audi o , Vid eo , o r Connection . ⢠MOVIE DIRECTOR Select Menu > Mov ie . Use M ovie dire ctor to crea te edited v ideo clips t hat may con tain video, sound, and t ext. Editing is carried out automati cally according to t he sty le that yo u sele ct. Th e sty le det ermines the tran sition s and visual effect s that are used in the v ideo clip. Ope n Movie d irect or , a nd scroll right or left to move betw een th e ta b and the tab . In the tab , you can sele ct the following op tions: Quic k mu vee â Create video c lips suita ble to be s ent by mult imedia message . Y ou c an se lect s eve ral video clips and the styl e you wa nt to app ly to t hem . The duration of th e Qui ck mu vee video clip is typically less than 1 0 s econds. Custom mu ve e âÂÂCre ate custom video clip s by applying a styl e, music, an d a me ssage . You can set the duration and preview the video clip before saving. T o create a custom mov ie, see âÂÂCreate a custom m ovieâ on page 47 . Sty le d ow nld s. âÂÂDownload and install new sty les. Set ting s âÂÂSe lect th e se tting you wan t to cha nge: ⢠Me mory in use â Select Ph one memo ry or Memory card . ⢠Resolu tion âÂÂSele ct Hi g h , Low or Autom atic . ⢠Defau l t mu vee nam e â Enter a default name for y our video clips. The tab con tains a list of video c lips that you c an Pla y , Se nd , Rename, and Delete . Create a custom movie 1 Select Menu > Mov ie > C ustom mu vee . Define the followi ng items : ⢠Video âÂÂSelect the so urce file or file s you want to use. Selec t Mark/ Unm ark , Play , o r Captur e . ⢠Sty le âÂÂSel ect a st yle f rom the l ist. Sty les d eter mine t he ef fect s and mess age ca ption . Each s tyle is asso ciate d with d efault music and messag e text.
48 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Musi c âÂÂSele ct a music clip from the list. ⢠Messag e âÂÂA dd a caption to the beginni ng and end of th e video clip. Y ou can e nter a mes sage or selec t one from the te mplate. Y ou can edit the defa ult mess age tex t. 2 Select Option s > Cr eate muvee . 3 Select one of t he following du rations for the video clip : ⢠Multime dia message to c r e a t e a v id e o s iz e s u i ta b l e to b e s e nt b y M M S ⢠Sam e as mus ic to create a v ideo of the same duration as th e se le cted music clip ⢠Use r defin ed to enter the vid eo dura tion manua lly . Aft er the v ideo preview i s prep ared, t he Pr eview muve e v iew ope ns, wh ere you can Play , Sa ve the new video clip, and Recre ate ( to make a ne w varia tion of the v ideo clip). ⢠GALLER Y Select Menu > Ga ller y . Opt ions in Ga llery are Open (folder or item), Send , Delet e , Create new , Move to folder , Copy to folde r , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Edit , Renam e , Gallery downloads , Image uploader , Vie w details , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Sett ings , Help , and Exi t . Use Ga llery to store and organize your imag es, sound c lips, video clips, and streamin g links. Ope n Gall ery to se e a list of th e folders in the phone memory . Scroll right to see the folders on t he memory card, if a m emory c ard is ins talled. Scroll to Images , Soun d clips , Vi deo cl ips , or anothe r folder th at you ha ve created, and press the Scro ll ke y to op en it . The open folde r displays the follow ing informa tion: ⢠An icon d epicting the type of each file in the folder , or in the ca se of a n image, a small thumbnail pictu re giving a pre view of the image ⢠Th e name of the fi le ⢠The date and t ime a file w as sav e d or the size o f the file ⢠Subfolders, if present Y ou can brow se, open, and c reate folders; and y ou can m ark, copy , and m ove items to fold ers. See "Common actions for a ll applications " on page 23. T he options vary acco rding to th e content of th e list of me dia files.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 49 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia Open files Select any file and press the Sc ro ll key to o pen it. Each fi le will open in its correspo nding application as follows: ⢠Image s files op en in the image vie wer . Se e "View ima ges" on page 44 . ⢠Sound clips open and play in th e music player . ⢠Video clips and streaming links open an d play in RealPlayer . See "Player" on page 46. ⢠Subfolders open to display contents. Default images folders Select Galler y > Im ages . Th e Image s folder is the default lo cation where y our phone saves imag es tak en wi th the c ame ra. With in the Im ages folder , there ar e additional default folders calle d Pic ture m sgs. , Pre sence lo gos , and Wallap ers . PICTUR E MESSAGES FOLDER Select Ga llery > Im age s > Pictu re m sgs. . Use t his fol der to stor e pict ures sent to you in pictur e messages . To save a pictu re tha t you hav e rece ived in a pi cture messa ge, se lect Messa gin g > Inbox , open the message, and select Opti ons > Sa ve pict ure . Op tion s in the p ictur e mes sages fo lder are Op en , Se nd , Delete , Mark/Unm ark , Ren a me , V iew details , Hel p , an d Exit . PRESE NCE LOGOS FOLDER Select Galler y > Images > Presen ce logos . Use this folder to store logos for Presen ce . Se e "Presence ( network service )" on page 35. W ALLPAPE RS FO LDER Select Ga llery > Im age s > Wallp apers . Use t his fo lder to store p ic tures t hat you wa nt t o use as b ackgro un d images . Download files To download files into Ga lle ry usin g the browser , select Optio ns > Ga llery down loads > G raph ic dow nloads , Video do wnloa ds , or T one download s . The brow ser open s and you ca n cho ose a bookm ark for the site from which to dow nloa d. See "Bookmarks" on p age 1 0 7. To download files, you must c onfigure your de fault access point. See " Access points" on page 6 8. Once items have been downloaded, the browser clos es, and the phone retu rns to Gal l e ry .
50 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Upload images to a n image server (network se rvice) Y ou c an s end yo ur pi ctures to a n ima ge server to allow ot hers t o sha re yo ur pictu res online . B efore you ca n upload ima g e s, you must set up the i m a ge server; you c an get the specific settings from you r service provider: 1 Select Setti ngs > Image servers , and press the L eft selec tion key . 2 Fill in the details for e a ch field. (See âÂÂAccess pointsâ on page 68.) 3 Press t he Ri ght sele ction key . To upload images: 1 Select Options > Image uploader . 2 T o begin an uplo ad, mark the ima ges that you want to upload, and sel ect Uploa d . 3 Enter a nam e for the folde r on the image server in which th e images will be stored, and press the Left se lecti on key . T rack lists for audio files Y ou c an create a track list to play audio file s on your phone. Sele ct Menu > Ga llery > Op tions > Cre ate ne w > T r ack list , and follow the screen prom pts to select sound clips for the track list. T o add mult iple tracks at one t ime, pr ess the Edit key an d the Sc ro ll k ey s imultaneous ly to place a checkm ark beside ea ch tr ack you wan t to ad d, a nd select Opti ons > Sele ct marke d items . To pla y a track lis t, selec t Menu > Galle ry and locate the tra ck list in phone memory or on the memory card. Scroll to the track list, and press the Scroll ke y to begin playing it. To modify a track list, locate the track list in Galle ry , and selec t Opt ions > Edit tra ck l ist > Op tio ns > A dd s ound clip . To delete clips , open t he track lis t, scroll to a clip, and s elect Option s > D elete . Options when the track lis t is playing are Pause , Edit track list , Clip details , Settings , Hel p , and Exit .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 5 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Messaging 7 Messaging Note: This function can only be used if it is supported by your netw ork operator or service prov ider . Only devices that offe r compat ible picture message, m ultimedia m essage, or e -mail f eature s can receive an d display these messages. Devices that do n ot have multime dia features m ay re ceive de tails of a lin k to a web page. Select Menu > Messag ing . In Messag ing you can cre ate , sen d, r eceiv e, vi ew , edit , and or gani ze: ⢠T ext messa ges ⢠Multi m edia message s (MMS) ⢠E-mail m essages ⢠Smart messages When yo u open Mes sagin g , yo u can see th e New m essage selection a nd a list of default fold ers: Inbox âÂÂCont ains received messages e x cept e-mail and cell broadcast messages . E-mail mess ages are store d in Mailbo x . Y ou c an read c ell broadcast messages by selecting Optio ns > Cell broadcas t . My fo lders âÂÂFor organizing you r messages into folders. Mailb ox â When you open this folder , you can eit her connect to your remote ma ilbox t o retrieve y our new e -mail messages, or you ca n view your previous ly retri eved e-mail messages w ithout log ging in to the e-mail server . After you have de fined settin gs for a new mailbox, the n ame given to that mailbox will re place Mai lbox in the main view . See "E-mail" on page 63 . Dra fts âÂÂStore s drafts of mes sages that have not been sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂO th er settingsâ on page 65. Messages or data that h ave been sent by a Blue tooth connection are not sav ed in th e Dra ft or Sent fold ers. Outbox â Te m porary storage place for messages w aiting to be sent.
52 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging optio ns are Create messag e , Connect ( shown if you have defined set ting s for the mailbox) or Disconne ct (s h ow n i f t h e r e i s a n a ct iv e c o n ne c t io n to the m ail box), SIM message s , Ce ll broad cast , Se rvice com mand , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠WRITE TEXT Y ou can key in text in two different ways , using the method tradition ally used in mobile phones or an other method called predictiv e text input. T raditional text input The indi cator is shown on the top right of the display wh en you are writing t ext using tradition al text input. Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ), re peatedly until the desired character appears. Note that t h ere are more charac ters ava il a ble for a number key t han are printe d on the k ey . Icon s: and indica te the s elected case . means that th e first l ett er of the next wo rd is wri tte n in uppe r case , and all ot he r lette rs will aut omati cally be writte n in lowe r case . indicate s numbe r mode. To insert a number , press and hold th e corresponding n umber key . To sw itc h between letter and numbe r mode, press and hold th e # key . Re port s (n etw ork ser vice ) âÂÂYou c an reques t that the netw ork send you a delive ry report of the text messages , smart mes sages, and multime dia m essages you have s ent. To turn on delivery report reception, go t o the Messagi ng main me nu, se lect Optio ns > Setti ngs > T ext mes sage or Mu ltim edia me ssage , a nd se le ct Rece ive repo rt > Y e s . It might not be possible to receive a delivery report of a multime dia mess age that ha s been sent to an e-mai l addre ss. Not e: When s ending messa ges, yo ur device may disp lay the word s Mes sage Se nt . This is an indication that the message ha s been sent by your devic e to the m essage c enter number programme d into your de vice. This is not an indication that the mess age has be en recei ved at the intended desti nation. For more de tails about messaging services, check w ith your service provider . Before yo u create a multime dia messa ge, write an e-mail, or connect to your r emote ma ilbo x, yo u mu st ha ve the c orr ect c onne ctio n settings in place. See "Write and send m ess ages" on page 55. See "Settings ne eded for multi media me ssaging" on page 56.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 53 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging If the n ext lette r is locate d on the same key as the pre sent one, wait un til the cursor appears (or s croll right to end th e time-out period) , and key in the le tter . If you make a mistake, press the Clear key to remove a character . Press and h old the Clear ke y to c lear m ore than o ne charact er . The most common punct uation marks are available un der the 1 ke y . Pres s the 1 key repeatedly to re ach the de sired pu nct uation mark. Y ou can a lso press the * key to ope n a list of special ch aracters. Sc roll through th e list, and pre ss Selec t to sele c t a charac ter . To inse rt a spa ce, pr ess th e 0 k ey . To move the cu rsor to the ne xt line, press the 0 key thre e times. To sw itc h between upper and lowe r case, press the # key . Predictive text input To activate predictiv e text in put, pre ss the Ed it ke y an d select Pr ed ictiv e te xt on , or press the # key twice quickly when writing t ext. This will ac tivate predictiv e text input for all ed itors in the phone. The indica tor is shown at the top of th e display . 1 Write the desired word by pressing the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only once for one lette r . The w ord change s after every key pres s. For exam ple, to w rite Nokia when the English dic tionary is selected, press the fo ll owing keys : 6 key for N 6 key for o 5 key for k 4 key for i 2 key for a The word sugge stion changes after ea ch key p re ss. 2 When you have fin ish ed t he word , che ck tha t it is correct . If the wo rd is correct, con firm it b y scrolling right or by pressing the 0 ke y to insert a space. T he underlining disappears an d you can begin to write a new wo rd. If the word is not c orrect, you have the following optio ns: ⢠Press t he * k ey repea tedly to view t he match ing words the dict ionary has found one by one. ⢠Press t he Edit key , and se lect Pre d ict ive text > Matches to v iew a lis t of match ing words. Scroll to the wo rd you want to us e, and press the Scro ll key t o s elect it.
54 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia If the ? cha racter is show n aft er the word, the word you inte nded to wri te is not in the dictiona r y . To add a word to the dic tionary , press Sp ell , ke y in the word (up to 32 letters) usi ng traditional tex t input, and press OK . Th e word is added to the dictionary . Wh en the dictionary be comes full, a n ew word replaces the oldest added word. To r e m ov e t h e ? and clear characters one by one from the word, press t he Clear key . TIPS ON PR EDI CTIVE TE XT IN PUT Erase a c har acter âÂÂPr ess the Clear key . Press and hold the Clear key t o clea r more tha n one character . Chan g e b etween the diff erent charact er c ases âÂÂPr ess t he # key to chang e betwee n the char acter cases Abc () , abc () , a n d ABC () . Note that if yo u press the # ke y twi ce qui ckl y the p redi ctiv e tex t input is turned off. Inse rt a nu mbe r in let ter mo de â Press and ho ld the desired n umber key , or press t he Edit key , and select number mode. Key in the nu mbers you want, and press OK . Inser t symbols an d punctu ation mar ks â â¢ The most comm on symbol s and punctu ation marks are available u nder t he 1 ke y . Pres s the 1 k ey repeatedly to find the desired e ntry . ⢠Press and hold the * key to open a list of special cha racters. Scroll through the list, and press Se lect to select a c haracter ; or press the Edit ke y , an d sel ect Inser t s ymbo l . The predictiv e text input will try to guess wh ich commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is ne eded. The order and availability of the pu nctuation marks depend on th e language of th e dictiona ry . Choo se from m ultiple entri e s âÂÂPress the * key r epeat edly to view the mat ching words the dictionary h as found one by on e. Choo se predic tive te xt options âÂÂWh en a word has been entered with p red icti ve text on, press the Edi t key , sel ect Pr ed ic tive text , and select one of th e following opt ions: ⢠Mat ches âÂÂView a list of words that correspond to y our key presses. Scroll to the desired wo rd, and press the Scro ll ke y . ⢠Insert word âÂÂA dd a wor d (up to 32 le tters) to th e dict ionar y by usi ng traditi o nal t ext input. When the di ctionary beco mes full , a new wor d replac es the ol dest adde d word. ⢠Ed it w ord âÂÂO pen a view wher e you c an edi t the word . Thi s opt ion is available only if th e word i s active ( underline d). ⢠Off âÂÂTurn off predictiv e text in put for a ll editors in t he phon e.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 55 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging WRITE COM P OUND WORD S Write th e first half of a com pound word, and confirm it by sc rolling right. Write the last part o f the compoun d word, and pre ss the 0 key to add a space to comp lete th e co mpound word. Copy and paste text If you wa nt to cop y text to t he clipboard, the followin g is the easiest m ethod: 1 T o sel ect let t ers an d words, pr ess and hold the Edit key . At the same t ime, scrol l right or le ft. As the selecti on m oves, text is highlighte d. T o select lines of text, pr ess an d hold the Edit key . At th e same ti me sc roll d own or up. 2 To end the se lection, releas e the Scrol l key w hile h olding the Edit key . 3 To copy the t ext to the clipboard w hile still hold ing the Edit key , press Copy ; or rele ase t he Ed it key , a nd press it once to open a list of editin g commands, for example, Copy or Cut . If you want to r emove the selec ted text f r om the document , press the Clear key . 4 T o paste the text int o a d o cument, p ress and hold the Edi t ke y , an d pres s P aste ; or press the Edi t key on ce, a nd sel ect Pas t e . ⢠WRITE AND SEND MESSAGES Bef ore you c an create a mu l ti media m essag e, writ e an e -mail message, or con nect t o your re mot e mailbox , you must have the correct co nnection setting s in place. See âÂÂSettings neede d for multimedia m essa g ingâ on page 56. Opt ions in th e tex t mes sage edit or a re Send , Add recipient , Inse rt , De lete , Ch ec k names , Message details , Sending options , Hel p , and Exit . 1 Select New message and one of the following options: T ext message â Create and send a text message . T o se nd a pic ture mess age, sel ect O ptions > Inser t > Pict ure . Eac h pictu re mes sage is made u p of s everal text m essages . Therefo re , sending one picture message may cos t more th an sending one text message. Mult imedia mess age âÂÂCreate and sen d a multi media message (MMS). Copyright protection s may prevent some images, ringtones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or fo rwarded. E-m ail â Create and send an e- mail. If y ou h ave not set u p you r e- mail account, you w ill be prompted to do so.
56 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 2 Press t he Scro ll key to s elect rec ipients from the con tacts dire cto ry , or write the phon e number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To field if y ou a r e se nding an MMS or e-mail to the recipient. Press the # key to a dd a semi colon ( ; ) to separate each recipien t. 3 Scroll to th e message field. 4 Writ e t he m ess age. Y our device su p ports the sen ding of t ext messages beyond the normal 160- character limit. If your message exceeds 16 0 charac ters, it will b e sent as a series of two or more m essages. In t he navi gation bar , yo u can s ee the m essa ge lengt h indi cator co unting backwa rds from 160. For example , 1 0 (2) means that you can sti ll add 1 0 characters for the text to b e sent as two m essages. Using special (Unicode) characters such as ë, â, á, ì will ta ke up more space. To add a media ob ject to a multime dia messag e, select Options > Inse rt n ew > Im age , So und c lip , Video c lip , or Slide . Select the item you wish to add. 5 T o send the me ssage, s elect Opt i on s > Se n d , or press the Send key . Settings needed for multimedia messaging Y ou m ay rece ive the s ettings a s a s mart mes sage from your ne twork operator or service provider . Se e "Smart messages" on page 57. For ava ilability of a nd subscript ion to data services, c ontact your ne twork operator or service provi der . Selec t Me s sa ging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Access point in use and select the access p oi nt you created. See "Multimedia m essages" on p age 62. Settings needed for e - mai l Before you can send, recei ve, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-m ail to a separate e-ma il account , you m ust: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP). See "Conn ection" on pa ge 6 8. ⢠Define you r e-mail settings. See "E-mail" on page 63. Follow the ins truction s given by your remote mailbo x and Inte rnet service provider . ⢠VIEW A MULTIMEDIA PRESENTATION When you receiv e a mult imedia message that includes a presen tation, s elect Play pres entation . The presentati on opens and starts. A multime dia m essage conta ining pre sentation c ontent c an still be viewed as a standard mu ltimedia message.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 57 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging Object s with in the pres enta tion may not start automat ically . I f, for exa mple, a video does not play when th e presentation starts, move to the video clip obje ct, and press the Scro ll key . All objects can be selected indiv idually and ope ned. ⢠INBOXâÂÂRECEIVE MESSAGES Opt ions in Inbo x are Open , Cre ate mess age , Reply , Delete , Message details , Mo ve to folder , Mark/Unm ark, He lp , and Exit . Wh en there a re unr ead m essa ges in Inbox , the icon changes to . In Inbo x , the message icons indicate the kind of message : View multimedia objects Opt ions in Obj ect s are Open , Save , Send , Hel p , and Exit . T o see the available media obje cts in the multimedia mess age, open the message, and sele ct Options > Obj ects . I n Objects you ca n vie w files th at ha ve be en inclu ded in the mu ltime dia me ssa ge. Y ou ca n ch oose to s ave th e file in your phone or send it, for example , by Blueto oth connec tion to anot her compat ible devi ce. Impor tant: Multimedia m essage objects may contain viruses or be harmfu l to your d evice or PC. Do n ot open an y attac hment if you a re not su re of the tru stworth iness of t he sender . See "Certif. mana gement" on page 73. Smart messages Y our ph one ca n rec eive ma ny kinds of sm art mes sages; text messages tha t contain data (also called over-the-air (O TA) messages). To open a received smart mess age, open In box , scrol l to the smar t mess age ( ), and press th e Scro ll key . Pict ure me ssage âÂÂSaves the p icture i n th e Picture messages folder in G allery for later use; select Optio ns > Sa ve pic ture . If yo u receive a business card file that has a pictu re atta ched, the picture will be s aved to Contacts as we ll. An unread text message An unread smart mess age An unre ad multime dia mes sage An unre ad service message Data received by Bluetooth connection An unkno wn mes sa ge typ e
58 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Busi ness card âÂÂSav es th e cont act in fo rmati on; sel ect Op tio ns > S av e bu sin ess car d . I f certific ates or s ound file s are attached t o bu siness cards , th ey will n ot be s aved. Ringing tone âÂÂSa ves the ringi ng tone to Galler y ; sele ct Op ti ons > Sav e . Operat or lo go âÂÂSaves the logo; selec t Opti ons > S ave . The operator logo can now be seen i n the st andby mode in stead of th e netw ork operat orâ s ow n identific ation. Calendar en try âÂÂSa ves the en try to Calendar ; selec t Opti ons > Sav e to C al enda r . Web message âÂÂSaves the bookmark; select Options > Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to t he Bookmar ks list in bro wser servic es. If a message contains both browser ac ces s point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Opt ions > Sa ve all ; or to view the bookmark and access point informa tion separately , sele ct Opti o ns > View details . If yo u do n ot wa nt to save all data, select a setting or bo okmark, open the details, and select Opti ons > Save to Setti ngs or S ave to bookmarks , de pending on what you ar e view ing . E-mai l notifi cation âÂÂTells y ou how m any new e -mails you have in your remot e mailbox. An extend ed notificat ion may list m ore detaile d information such as subje c t, se nder , attach ments, and so on. Wal l et â Recei ves pa yment cards , loya lty card s, a ccess cards, addre ss ca rds, RFIDs, and t ickets . In addition , you can receive a text mes sage service numb er; voice mail nu mber; profile settin gs for remote synchroni zation; access po int settings for the browser , multimed ia messagin g, or e-m ail; pres ence a nd IM settin gs; a ccess point login sc ript settings; or e-ma il settings. T o save the settin gs, se lect Opt ions > Sa ve to SM S s ett. , Sa ve to Voice ma il , Sa ve to Se ttin gs , or Save to e-m ail se tt. Service messages (networ k service) Service messages can be, for example, notifications of news h eadlines, and they may contain a te xt messag e or address of a browser service. F or availability a nd subscription, contac t your service provider . â¢M Y F O L D E R S In My folder s yo u can o rganiz e you r mess ages int o fold ers, crea te new folders, and rename and delete folde rs. Y ou c an use Te m p l a t e s to create text tem plates for messa ges th at yo u send often. To create a new templa te, selec t Op ti ons > N ew tem plat e .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 59 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging ⢠REMOTE MAILBOX (NE T WORK S ERVICE) When you open th is folder , y ou ca n conne ct to y our remote mailbox to do the following : ⢠Retrieve new e -mail head ings or messages. ⢠View your pre viously retrieved e-mail headings or messages without logging in to the e -mail server . If you s el ect New message > E-mail in Messag ing , a nd you h a v e not s et up your e-mail accoun t, you will be pro mpted to do so. See "W rite and send me ssages" on p age 55. When yo u create a new mailbo x, the name yo u give to the mailb ox automa tica lly replaces Mail box in Mes sag ing . Y ou can have up to six mailboxes . Open the mailbox When you open th e mailbox, you c an choose whethe r you wa nt to view the pr evi ous ly retrieve d e-mail messages and e-ma il headings w ith or w ithout connec ting to the e-m ail server . When you scroll to your mailbox and press the Scro ll key , Connect to mail b ox? appears. S elect Ye s to con nec t to you r mailb ox o r No t o v i ew pr ev io u sly re t ri eve d e-mail messages while not l ogged in to the e-mail server . Another way to start a c onnect ion is to select O ptions > Conn ect . Retrieve e- mail messages If you are not l ogged in to the e-m ail server , sele ct Option s > Conn ect to st art a connection to a re mote mailbox. 1 When you ha ve an open con nection to a remote mailbox, sele ct Option s > Retriev e e-mai l and one of th e following: New â Retri eve all n ew e-mail messages t o your p h on e. Sele ct ed âÂÂRetri eve onl y the e- mail mes sages that have been m a rked. Use the Mark/U nmark > Mar k or Unma rk c omma nds to sele ct m ess ages one by one. See "Comm on actions for all applications" on page 23. Al l âÂÂR etrieve al l messa ges fro m th e mailbo x. To c ance l re tri evi ng , p ress Can ce l . A fte r you ha ve retr iev ed th e e-m ail message s, you ca n co ntinue vi ewing them o nline . 2 Select Optio ns > Disconnect to close th e conn ection a nd vie w the messages offline from the e-m ail server . 3 To open an e-m ail mes sage, scroll to t he e- mail you w ant to view , and press t he Scro ll key . If the e-mail m essage h as not bee n retrieve d (arrow i n the icon is point ing outwards) and you are offline from the e-mail server , and select Open , you will be asked if you wan t to retrieve this me ssage from t he mailbox .
60 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia To view e- mail atta chments , ope n a mess age tha t has th e at tachmen t indicator , and se le ct O ptio ns > Attachm ents . In At tach ments , you can retrieve, open, or save attachments in supported formats. Y ou can also send at tachm ents by B luetoo th conne ction. Impor tant: E-m ail attach ments ma y con tain virus es or othe rwise be harmful to y our device or PC. Do not ope n any a ttachme nt if you are not su re of the trustworth iness of t he sende r . If your m ailbox uses the IM AP4 protocol, you can decide whether to re trieve e-mail headings on ly , m ess ages only , or messages and attac hments. With th e POP3 protocol, the opt ions are e-mail headings only or messages and attachme nts. See "E-mail" on page 63. Delete e -mail messages To dele te a n e- ma il fro m the p ho ne wh ile still r etai ning it i n th e rem ot e ma ilbo x, sel ect O pti ons > Delete > Phon e only . The ph one mirrors th e e-mail headings in the remote m ailbox. If y ou de lete the messag e conte nt, the e -mail he ading stays in your ph one. If you wan t to remove the hea ding, delet e the e-mail message from your remo te mailbox first ; then ma ke a co nnect ion from your pho ne to the re mote mailbox again t o up date th e stat us. To delete an e-mail from both the phone and the remote m ailbox, select Option s > Delet e > Phone and serve r . If you are not logged in to the e-mail server , the e-mail will be delete d from your phon e. Duri ng the nex t conn ection to the remote m ailbox, it will be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the PO P3 protocol, messages marked to be de leted are removed on ly after you h ave closed the co nnection to the rem ote ma ilbox. UNDELETE ME SSAGES WHEN OFFLINE FROM TH E E-MAIL SERVER To u ndelete an e-mail from both the phone and server , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted durin g the n ext connection ( ), and select Option s > Unde lete . Disconnect When y ou are online , select Option s > Disconn ect to end the d ata ca ll or G PRS connec tion to the remo te mailbox. ⢠OUTBOX Outbox is a temporary storage plac e for messages t hat are wait ing to be sent. Status of the messages in Out box are as follows: Sen ding â A conne ction is being m ade and th e message is being sent. Waiting or Queue d âÂÂW hen there are tw o similar ty pes of mes sages in Outbo x , one of th em is w aiting until the firs t one is sen t.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 6 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Messaging Resend at (time)âÂÂSe nding ha s failed. The phon e will try to se nd the me ssage ag ain after a tim e-out period. Press Sen d if y ou want to resta rt the sending imm ediately . Def erred âÂÂY ou can set doc uments to be on hold w hile th ey are in Out box . Scroll to a message th at is be ing sent, and selec t Opt i on s > De fer send ing . Failed âÂÂThe maximu m numbe r of sendin g attempts has bee n reache d. If you were trying to send a text m ess age, ope n the messa ge an d chec k tha t the sending s ettings are correct. ⢠VIEW MESSAGES ON A SIM CARD Select M ess agin g > Op ti ons > SIM mes sag es . ⢠CELL BROADCAST (NETWORK SERVICE) Select Me ssaging > Option s > Cell b roadcast . Y ou m ay be a ble to rece ive m essag es on various t opi cs, su ch as weather or t raff i c condition s, from your service provider . For available topics and relevant topi c numbers, con tact your service provider . In the main view you can se e: ⢠The status of t he topic: for ne w , su bscribed me ssages an d for new , unsubscr ibed mess ages. ⢠The topic nu mber , topic name, and whethe r it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. You will be no tified whe n messages belonging to a flagged topic have arrived. Opt ions in C ell bro adcast are Open , Subscribe or Unsub scrib e , Hotma rk or Remove hotmark , T opic , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Note: A packet data (GPRS) conn ecti on may preve nt cell broadcast recep tion. C ontac t your network operato r for t he corr ect GPRS s etti ngs. See "GPRS" on page 7 0. ⢠SERVICE COMM AND E D ITOR Select M ess agin g > Op ti ons > Se rvi ce c om ma nd . Key in and send service requests (also know n as USSD comman ds) for network services to you r service provider (for e xample, a reque st for activation com mand s). ⢠MESSAGING SETTINGS Messag ing settings ha ve been divided int o groups according to th e different messag e types . Scroll to the s etting s you want to e dit , and press th e Scro ll key .
62 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia T ext messages Select M essa gin g > Op tio ns > S ett ings > Text me ssa ge to ope n the following list of settin gs: Messag e cent ers âÂÂLists all the m essage c enters that have been defined. Msg. cente r in us e (mes sage cent er in u se)âÂÂDe fin es which m e ssag e center is used for delivering text messages an d smart messages su ch as picture messages. Option s when edi ting messa g e c enter se tting s ar e Edit , New msg. center , Del ete , Hel p , and Exi t . Receiv e repor t (delivery report )âÂÂWhen this netw ork se rvice i s set to Ye s , the status of th e sent mess age ( Pe n d i n g , Failed , or D eli v ered ) is show n in the reports (network servic e). Me ssage v a li dity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the message is removed from t he message service center . Note that the network m ust support this fe ature. Maxi mum t ime is the ma ximu m amount of t ime allowed by th e network. Mess ag e sent as âÂÂThe opt ions a re Te x t , Fa x , Pa g i n g , an d E-m ail . For furth er information, con tact your ne twork operator . Change this option only if you are sure that yo ur message ce nter is able to conv ert text messa ges into the se other formats . Prefe rred co nn ection âÂÂYou can send text mess ages ov er the norm al GSM network or b y GPRS, if su pported by the network. Rep ly vi a same ct r . (network servic e)âÂÂBy setting this option to Ye s , if the r ecip ient repl i es t o you r message , the return message is sent u sing the same mes s age service cente r numbe r . Note that this may not work betwee n all operators. Multimedia messages Select M essag ing > Option s > Se ttings > Mult ime dia m essage to open t he following list of settin gs: Acces s poi nt in us e âÂÂSel ect whi ch acc ess poin t is us ed as the p referre d con necti on f or the mul tim edia m ess age c ent er . See "S etting s ne eded for multimedia me ssaging" on page 56. If you rec eive multimed ia message settings in a smar t message a nd save them , the received set tings are aut oma tic ally used f o r t h e access poin t. See "Smart messages" on page 57 . Mult imedia rece ption â Select from the following: ⢠Only in home net. âÂÂReceiv e multi media me ssag es only when you are i n yo u r home ne tw ork. Wh en you a re o ut sid e yo ur home ne tw ork, mu ltim ed ia me ssage re ception is turned off. ⢠Alwa ys o n âÂÂAllow your phon e to re ceive mu ltimedia m essages . ⢠Off âÂÂDo n ot receive multime dia mes sages or adv ertiseme nts at all.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 63 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging If Only in home net. or Alway s on is sel ect ed, you r phone can ma ke an a ctive data call or GPRS connection w ithout y our knowle dge. On r eceiv ing msg. â Select from the following: ⢠Retr . im media tely â The phone will try to retrieve multime dia messages instantly . If there a re m essages w ith deferre d statu s, the y will be retrie ved as well. ⢠Def er ret rieva l âÂÂThe multime dia messa ging ce nter wil l save th e messa ge to be re trieved la ter . Whe n you want to re trieve the m essag e, set On re ceiv ing ms g. to Retr . imm edia tely . ⢠Reje ct mes sa ge âÂÂRe ject m ultimedia m essag es. The multime dia mes sage cente r will delet e the message s. Allow anon. m essages âÂÂSe lec t No , i f y o u w a n t t o r e j e c t m e s s a g e s c o m i n g f r o m an anonym o us sen der . Receive ads âÂÂDe fine w hether yo u wa nt to allow reception of multi media message adverti sements or not. Receive repo rt âÂÂS e t to Ye s i f you want the status of the sent message ( Pe n d i n g , Fa i l e d , or Deliv ered ) to be sh o w n in the reports. Rece ivin g a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-m ail address might not be possible. Den y rep ort se ndin g âÂÂC hoose Ye s if yo u do n ot want your phone to send delivery re ports of rece ived mu ltimedia m essages. Message validity (network service)âÂÂIf t h e r ecip ient of a message cann ot be re ache d within the validit y period, the message is removed from the multim edia mes sage center . Max imum t ime is the maximum amount of ti me allowed by the ne twork. Ima ge size âÂÂDefin e the size of the image in a multim edia m essage. Th e options are Sma ll (up to 16 0x120 pixels) and Large ( u p to 6 40x480 pix els). E-mail Select M essa gin g > Op tio ns > S ett ings > E-m ail . Sele c t Mailboxe s to open a list of mailboxes that have been defined, or select M ailbox in use to choose which mailbox you w ant to use. Options when e diting Mailbo x settin gs a re Editing options , Ne w mailbox , Delete , Hel p , and Exit . If no mailboxe s have be en defined, you will be prompted t o do so. The following list of se ttings is show n (thi s information is available from your e-mail service provider): Ma ilbox na me âÂÂWrite a descriptive nam e for the m ailbox. Acces s poi nt in use ( must be defined)âÂÂThe Internet access po int (IAP) used for the mailb ox. Choose an IAP from the lis t. See "Conne ction" on page 68.
64 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia My e-mail address (m ust be define d)âÂÂWrite the e-mail address given to y ou by your service provider . The address must contain the @ characte r . Replies to your messag es ar e sent to thi s addres s. Outgo ing m ail se rve r (must be defined)âÂÂWrite the IP address or host name of th e compu ter that sends yo ur e-mai l. Send message (network service)â Define how e-mail is sent from your phon e: ⢠Imme diate ly âÂÂA con nection to the mailbox is started imm ediately after you have s elect ed Sen d . ⢠Dur i n g next conn. âÂÂE-mail is s ent whe n you connec t to yo ur remote mailbox th e next t ime. Send copy to self âÂÂSel ect Ye s to save a copy of th e e-mail to yo ur remote mailbox and to the address d efined in My e-mail add r ess . Inclu de sign atur e âÂÂS ele ct Ye s if you want to attach a signature to yo ur e-m ail messages an d to st art to write or edit your signat ure text. Use r name âÂÂWrite y our user name, giv en to you by yo ur service provider . Pa s s w o r d âÂÂW rite you r passw ord. If yo u leave thi s field bl ank, you will be prompted for the password whe n you try to connect to your rem ote mailbox. Inco ming ma il serv er (mu st be defined)âÂÂW rite the I P address or host name of th e compu ter that receiv es you r e -mail. Ma ilbox ty pe â Defines the e-mail protocol you r remote mailbox service provider recomme nds. T he options are POP 3 and IMAP 4 . This s etting can be selected onl y once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from th e mailbox settings. Sec urit y âÂÂUsed w ith the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure th e connec tion to the remo te mailbox. AP OP se cure login âÂÂUsed w ith the PO P3 protocol to encrypt the sen ding of passwords to the remot e e-m ail server . Th is option i s only shown if PO P3 is selecte d for Mail box type . Re trie ve at tac hme nts âÂÂRetrieve e-mail w ith or withou t attac hments . This option is only shown if the Mailbo x ty pe is set to IM AP4. Retriev e head ers âÂÂLim it the number of e-mail headers you wa nt to re trieve to your phon e. The options are All and Us er defin ed . Used with th e IM AP4 protocol only . Service messages When yo u sele ct Messaging > Opti o ns > Settin gs > Ser vice mes sage , the following list of setting s opens: Ser vice me ssag es âÂÂC hoose wheth er or not you want to a llow rece ption of ser vic e me ssa ges . Download messages âÂÂChoos e if you wa nt to receive s ervice m essage s only from authoriz ed sources.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 65 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging Cell broadcast (network service) Check with yo ur service provider about whethe r C ell broadc ast is available and what the av ailable topics and related topic nu mbers are. Se lect Mes sagin g > Op tio ns > S ett ings > C ell broa dca st to change the setting s: Recept ion â On or Off . Lang uag e â All allows you to receiv e cell broadcast message s in every possible language . Selec ted allows y ou to ch oose in w hich la nguages you wish to receive cell broadcas t mess ages. If th e language you prefe r is no t in the lis t, sel ect Othe r . T o pic de tection âÂÂI f you receive a message that does not belong t o any of the existing topics , s e lect On t o save the topic nu mber a utomatica lly . The topic number is saved to the topic list and show n wi thout a n ame. Select Off if you do not wa nt t o sa ve ne w topi c num bers a uto mati ca lly . Other settings Select M essa gin g > Op ti ons > S ett ing s > O ther to ope n the follow ing list of se ttings: Sav e se nt m e ssa ges âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multime dia mes sage, or e-mail th at you have se nt to the Sent folder . No. of sav ed ms gs. âÂÂDe fine how man y sent mes sages will be sa ved to the Se nt folder at a time. Th e default limit is 20 messa ges. Wh en the lim it is rea ched, the oldest me ssage is deleted. Me mory in use âÂÂDefin e t he mem ory st ore. Cho ic es ar e p hon e m emo ry or memory card, if on e is used.
66 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 8 Set ting s Select M enu > Setti ng s . 1 Scroll to a setting group, and press the Scro ll key t o op en i t. 2 Scroll to a setting yo u want to change and press t he Scro ll key to : ⢠Switch between options if there are only tw o ( On /Off ). ⢠Open a list of options or an e ditor . ⢠Open a slider view (scroll righ t to increas e or left to decrea se the value). Y ou m ay be able to rece ive some settings from you r service provider in a smart message, or some set ting s may be preprogrammed in to the phone . See "Smart messages" on page 57 . ⢠PHONE Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Phon e > Ge neral , S tand by m ode , or Di s pla y . General Phon e language âÂÂY ou c an change the language for the display texts in your phone. This c hange may also affect the format us ed for date and tim e and th e separators used, for example, in cal culations. If you select Automa tic , the phone selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the display text language, you must restart t he phone. Note: Ch ang ing th e se tt ings for Phone langua ge or Writing langua ge affects ev ery application in your phone and the change remains effecti ve unt il you ch ange these se ttings aga in. Writ ing l ang uag e âÂÂY ou can change th e writing langu age of your phone. Changing the langu age affe cts t he follow ing feature s: ⢠The cha racters av ailab le when you p ress any ke y ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) ⢠Th e predic tive te xt dic tiona ry us ed ⢠The spe cial char ac ter s t hat are av ailable whe n you press the * and 1 keys Pr edic tiv e te xt âÂÂSet pred ict ive t ext inp ut On or Off for all editors in the phone. Select a language for entering predictiv e text from th e list available. Y o u can also ch ange this settin g when you a re in an editor . Press the Ed it key , and s elec t Pr edic tive tex t > On or Off .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 67 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings Welcom e note or log o âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed brie fly each time y ou switch on t he phone. Select De faul t if you wa nt to us e the default image or a nimation. Se lect Te xt to write a welc ome note ( up to 50 letters ). Select Im age to choose a photo or picture from Ga llery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂY ou can r eset some of the setti ngs to the ir orig inal val ues. To do this, you need th e lock code . See "Security" on page 72. Afte r resetting the sett ings, the p hone ma y take a longer time to power on. All doc uments and file s t hat you ha ve created are l e ft as the y are. Standby mode Left selec tion ke y and Right selecti on key â Y ou can change the shortcu ts that appear ov er the Left selecti o n key a nd Right selection key in the stan dby m ode. In addition to the applications, you c an have the s hortcut poin t to a function , for example, New messag e . Display Brightness âÂÂAdjust the slide bar between Dark an d Bright . Scr een saver timeo u t âÂÂThe screen saver is activated after the screen sav er time-out period. When the s creen saver is active, the display is cl eared and you can se e the scre en sav er bar . To deac tivate t he scree n save r , p ress any ke y . â¢C A L L Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Ca ll > Se nd my cal ler ID , C all wa itin g , Aut omati c redial , Summary af ter call , 1-to uch dialing , Any key ans w er , or Line in use . Send my caller ID (network service) This service allows you to di splay you r phone num ber ( Ye s ) or hide your n umber ( No ) from the person you call. Th is option may be set by your n etwork operator or service provider when you subscribe. Call wa iting (network service) The networ k w ill no tify you of a ne w incoming c all w hi le you have a ca ll in progr e ss. Select Acti vate to re quest the network t o activ ate call waiting, Cancel to request the n etwork to deactiv ate call waiting, or Check status to ch eck if th e function is active or not. Automatic redial When this s etting is ac tivate d, your phone at tem pts to co nnect the call a maximum of ten tim es after a n un succes sful call attempt. Press the End key to stop automa tic redialing.
68 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Summary after call Activa te this s etting i f you want th e phone to b riefly dis play th e approxim ate duration of th e last call. 1-touch dialing Selec t On , and the number s assigned to the 1-touch dialing keys ( 2 âÂÂ9 ) can be diale d by pressi ng and holdin g the ke y . See "Assig n 1-to uch dial ing key s" on pa ge 34. Anykey answ er Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key , exce pt t he Rig h t select ion key , the Po w e r ke y , and the End key . Lin e in use (netw ork serv ice) This setting is shown only if th e SIM card supports two subscriber nu mbers, that is, two ph one lines . Select the phon e line ( Li ne 1 or Line 2 ) you w ant t o use for making c alls and sending short messages. Calls on both line s can be answ ered regardl ess of the sel ected line . Y ou c annot make calls if you se lect Line 2 and have not subsc ribed to th is netw ork service. To prevent line selection, s elect L ine c hange > Dis able if your SIM card supports this funct ion. T o change this se tting, you need th e PIN2 code. â¢C O N N E C T I O N Select Menu > Se ttings > Conn ection > Acc ess po ints , GPRS , Dat a cal l , o r Co nfigur ati ons . Access points An access point is where your phone connects to the mobile Internet by way of a data call or pack e t d a ta co nnecti on . A n access poi n t ca n be p rovi d ed, fo r example, by a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), ser vice provider , or network operator . Many servic e providers require an Int ernet access poin t (IAP) for y our default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a browser access point. Contact your servic e provider for m ore informati on. To define acce ss point s etting s, select Menu > Sett ings > Conne ction > Acc ess poin ts . If you have n ot yet use d you r phone to make a WAP co nnect ion, you may nee d to contact yo ur servic e prov ide r for assistance with the first-time con nectio n. Fill in th ese settin gs from t he top beca use you r Dat a bea rer se l ec t ion determine s which fie lds are a vailable: ⢠Conn ection na me âÂÂGive a de scriptive nam e for the data c onnect ion.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 69 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings ⢠Data b ear er âÂÂThe options are GPRS and Data ca ll . The data bearer selection affects the other fields that a re available. F ill in al l fields marke d with Mus t be defi ned , or with an asterisk. Othe r fields can be left empty , unles s you have been instructed oth erwise by your service provider . To u se a data con nection, your network operator or service provider must support this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. ⢠Access point name (fo r packet dat a only )âÂÂTh e access poi nt na me is n eeded to establ ish a conn ection to the G PRS network . Y o u obtain the access point name from your netw ork operator or service pro vider . ⢠Dial-u p number (fo r Dat a cal l only)âÂÂEnte r the the modem telephone number of the access poin t. ⢠Use r na me â Ente r a us er na me i f th e se rvic e p rovide r req uir es it . Th e us er name m ay b e need ed t o make a dat a conn ection an d is usually provided by the ser vice prov ider . The us er name is ofte n case -sensi tive . ⢠Promp t passwo rd âÂÂI f you mu st key i n a ne w pass word every tim e you l og on to a server o r if you do n ot want t o sa ve your password to the phone, cho ose Ye s . ⢠Pa s s w o r d âÂÂA passwo rd may be needed to make a data c onnect ion and is usually provided by the service provider . The password is often case-sensitive. When you a re writin g th e password, the characte rs you enter a re sh own bri efly an d the n cha n ge d to aster isks (*) . The ea sies t way t o enter numbers is to press and ho ld the n umber you want to enter , an d then continue enterin g lette rs. ⢠Auth enticati o n â Norm al or Secur e . ⢠Homepage âÂÂThis setting de pends on what you a re setting u p. Writ e e ither the service address or t he address of the multimed ia messaging center . ⢠Dat a cal l type (for data ca ll only)â Analog , ISDN v .1 10 , or ISDN v .120 defi nes w hethe r th e pho ne use s an a nalog or digita l co nnecti on. Th is se tting depends on both your GSM ne twork operator and your Internet service prov ider (ISP) becau se some G SM netw orks do not sup port cer tain typ es of ISDN connec tions . For de tails, co ntact y our I SP . If I SDN co nnection s a re available, they conne ct more quic kly than analog methods. ⢠Maximum da ta speed (for da ta call onl y)âÂÂT he opti ons are Automatic , 9600 , o r 14400 , depen ding on what yo u hav e chosen in Data call type . This opti o n all o ws y o u to l imi t the m aximum conn ection speed when G S M data is used . High er data rates ma y cost m ore, depen ding on th e servic e provid er . These sp eeds repre sent the maximu m speed at which yo ur connectio n w ill operate. During the connect ion, the operating speed may be less, depen d ing on network conditions.
7 0 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia ADVANC ED ACCESS POINT SET TINGS If yo u need to enter a dvanc ed settings , co ntac t y our In tern et se rvic e prov ider . T o a ccess advanced a ccess point settings, sele ct Menu > S ettings > Conn ection > Access poin ts , selec t the access po int you want to m odify , an d selec t O ptions > Adv anced sett ings . Y ou c an then define the follow ing settin gs: ⢠Phon e IP address âÂÂThe IP addre ss of your phone ⢠Primar y name serv er âÂÂThe IP addre ss of the prim a ry DNS server ⢠Sec on d. nam e se rve r âÂÂThe I P address of the secondary DNS server ⢠Proxy s erv . addr ess â The IP add ress of the prox y server ⢠Proxy p ort nu mb er âÂÂThe port num ber of the prox y server These additional set tings are shown if you se lected Data ca ll as the Da ta bearer type: ⢠Use cal lback âÂÂThis opt ion allows a serve r to c all yo u bac k once y ou make the ini tial call. C ontact y our service provider to subscribe to this s ervice. The phon e expects that the callbac k will use th e same data call settings . The netw ork must support that type of c all in both d irections. ⢠Callback type âÂÂThe options ar e Use serv er no. or Use ot her no. As k you r service provider which setting t heir con figuration uses. ⢠Callback number âÂÂK e y in the phone data ph one numbe r that the dial back server u ses. Usually , this n umber is th e data call phon e number of your ph one. ⢠Use PP P compressio n â Wh en s et to Yes , th is opti on speed s up the dat a tra nsfe r , i f the remote PPP server supports the compression. If you hav e problems with es tablishing a co nnec tion, try setting th is to No . Co nta ct your servic e provider for gu idance. ⢠Use login s cript âÂÂThe option s are Ye s or No . ⢠Logi n script âÂÂInsert the login script. ⢠Mode m in itiali zati on (mode m initialization s tring)âÂÂThis option controls you r phone u sing modem AT comman ds. If modem init ialization is re quired, enter characters specified by your service provider or Inte rnet service provider . GPRS GPRS ( general packet radio service) is a netw ork se rvice that a llows mobile phones to send and receive data ov er a n IP -based network. GPRS i s a d ata bearer that enables wirele ss ac cess to data netw orks, such as the mobile In ternet. The applic ations that may use GPR S are mult imedia , IM and t ext mess aging, pr es enc e, streaming, browsing sessions, e-mail, data sync, Java⢠application downloading, and the PC dial-up (such as Internet and e -mail). To use GPRS technology , you mu st first do the following: ⢠Contact you r servic e provider for a vailability and subs cription. ⢠S ave the GP RS se ttin gs for eac h of th e applica tions u sed.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 7 1 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings For information on pricing, contac t your service provider . To de fin e GPRS connection settings, select Me nu > Setti ngs > Conne ction > GP RS , a nd spe cif y th ese sett in gs: GP RS con nec ti on âÂÂIf you se lect When available and your ne twork supports packet data, the phone registers to the GP RS net work. Also, st arting an activ e packet d ata connection, for exam ple, to s end and re ceive e-mail, is quicke r . If you select Wh en needed , the ph one will use a packe t da ta co nne ction only if yo u start an applicat ion or ac ti on th at ne ed s i t. The G PR S c on nec t ion ca n b e c l ose d after the applica tions no longer use it. If there i s no GP RS cover age and y ou have chose n Wh en avail able , the phone periodica lly tries to e s tablish a packet data conn ection. Acces s poi nt âÂÂTh e access point name is nee ded when you use your phon e as a packe t dat a mode m to yo ur com pute r . Data call Onlin e time âÂÂThis set ting af fect s all acce ss points usi n g a GSM data ca ll. If there are n o actions, the data call is dropped automatic ally after a t ime-out period. Select Use r def ined ( in which c ase you ente r a tim e) or Unli mite d . Configurations When y o u open a message that contain s co nfiguration settin gs for your phone, the me ssage is displaye d in this viewer . If yo u do not h ave a ny configu ration settings messages, this scree n will be e mpty . To delet e a messa ge from th is scr een, pr ess the Clear key . Options in the co nfigurations v iewer are Save , Message details , and Mov e to folder . ⢠DATE AND TIME Select M enu > Setti ng s > Date an d time . The D ate and time settings allow you to define t he date and time used i n your phone, as well as c h ange th e date and time form at and separators. Y ou can also chan ge the following se ttings: Clock type âÂÂSel ect An alog or Dig ital to change how the c lock is displayed in the standby mode . See "Clock" on page 88. Clock alar m tone âÂÂC hange s the t one p layed when t he cloc k rea c he s an al arm t ime. Auto t ime update âÂÂAllow s the n etwork to update time, da te, and time zon e informat ion to you r phone (network servic e). For the auto tim e update setting to take effect, th e phone needs to be restarted. Che ck any alarms because they may be affect ed by th e au to time update. GMT off set âÂÂC ha nges t he ti me zo ne fo r the c lock time . Day light -sa ving âÂÂSe ts daylight saving time on or off.
72 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠SECURITY Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Se curit y > Ph one and SI M or Certif. management . Phone and SIM If your ph one requests a s ecurity cod e, refer to the follow ing explanation s to determine wh at you should enter . If y ou forget or lose a PIN or PUK code or if you have no t rece ived s uch a code, conta ct your s ervic e prov ider . Y ou can change the followi ng codes: lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . The PUK (pe rsonal unblocking ke y) code is required t o change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 c ode is required to c han ge a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, c ontact your service provider for the codes. The PUK and PUK 2 codes are 8 digits long. Avoid using security co des similar to emergency numbers, su ch as 9 1 1, to prevent acciden tal dialing of the eme rgency nu mber . ⢠PIN cod e re quest âÂÂW hen the PIN code request is act ive, the code is reques ted ea ch time the p hone is switche d on . Note that deactiva ting the PIN code request m ay not be allow ed by some SIM cards. ⢠PIN cod e (4 to 8 digits) âÂÂThe PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN c ode is usually su pplied w ith the SIM c ard. ⢠After three cons ecutive incor rect PIN code ent r ies, the PIN code is b locked. I f the PIN co de is blo cked, you need to unbl ock th e PI N cod e bef ore yo u can use th e SIM card again. See also the in formation below ab out the PUK c o de. ⢠PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits)âÂÂTh e PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards and is required to acc ess some functions, such as fixed dialin g numbe r s (FDN). ⢠Aut olock pe riod â Y ou can set an autol oc k period, a ti me-out after which the ph one is au tomatic ally l ocked a nd c an be used only if the corre ct lock code is entered. Key in a num ber for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the a utolock period. To unlock the phon e, key in t he lock code . When the phone is lock ed, calls may still be possible to the official e mergency number programmed into y our phone. ⢠Lock co de (5 digit s) â The loc k code can be u sed to lock the ph one and keypad to av oid unauthorized use. The fact ory setting for the loc k code is 12345 . T o prevent unaut horized use of your phone, change the lock code. K e ep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. If you forget or lose the lock code, contact you r service provider . ⢠Lock if SI M changed âÂÂSele ct Ye s if yo u want the ph one to pr ompt for the loc k code when an unknown, new SIM car d is inserted in to your phone. T he phon e mainta ins a list of SIM cards th at are re cogni zed as the ownerâÂÂs cards.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 73 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings ⢠Fixed dialing âÂÂYou can restrict your ou tgoing calls to selec ted phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. Y ou n eed the P IN2 code for this function. When this function is active , you can on ly call those phone num bers th at are in clud ed in the fixed dialing list or wh ich begin w ith the sam e digits as a phone number on th e list. Press t h e Scrol l k ey to set fix ed dialing on. W hen fixe d dialing is activ ated, calls s till may be possible to th e official e mergency num ber programme d into your phone. To add new nu mbers to th e fixed dialing list, select Options > New conta ct or Add from Contacts . Options in fixed dialing are Open , Call, A c tiv . fixed dialing or Deact. fixed dialing , New co ntact , Edit , Del ete , A dd to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Find , Mark/Unmark , He lp , an d Exit . ⢠Closed u ser group ( network service)âÂÂY ou can specify a group of people who m you can ca ll an d who can call y ou. Fo r more in for mat io n, con tact your netw ork operator or servic e provider . Select one of the following: Def aul t âÂÂActivate the default group agreed on with the net work operator . On âÂÂUse another group ( you need to know the group index number). Off âÂÂDo not u se closed user groups. When calls are limited t o closed user groups , calls s till may be possible to the offic ial emergency n umber programme d into your phone. ⢠Co nfir m SIM serv ices (n etw ork ser vice) âÂÂS ets t he p hone to disp lay confirmat ion messages when you are u s ing a SIM card servic e. ⢠Restore ser v er âÂÂR es et yo ur co nnect ion s etti ngs allo wing you t o re cei ve new settings from y our service provider . Certif. management Opt ions in C ert if. ma nag emen t are C ertificate deta ils , Delete, T rus t settings , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exi t . In the ce r tificate manageme nt main view , you can see a list of au thor ity certificates that have been stored in y our phone. Scro ll r ight to see a list of pe rsonal certif icates, if available . Authority ce rtificates are us ed by so me br o wse r se rvi ces , su ch as ba nkin g se rv ices , for chec king signature s or serv er certificates or other aut hority certific ates. Ser ver cert ificates are used to improv e security i n the conn ection bet ween the phone and the gateway . The phone receives the ser ver cert ificate from th e service prov ider before th e co nnec tion is establi she d, and it s validi ty is che cked using th e aut hority certifi cates sav ed in th e phone. Serv er cert i fi cates ar e not sav ed. Server certi ficates m ay b e need ed, fo r exam ple, w hen you wan t to d o the f ollowin g: ⢠Connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confide ntial information .
74 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Decrease the risk of viruses or other malic ious software and be sure of the authent icity of so ftware whe n down loading and installing software . Impor tant: Note t hat e ven if th e use of ce rtifi cat es mak es th e risk s involve d in remote con nections a nd software in stallation con siderably smaller , they must be used correctly in orde r to benefit from incr eased security . The existence of a certificate does not offer any pro tection by itself; the certificate manage r must con tain correc t, authentic , or trusted ce rtificates fo r incre ased security to be available . Certificates have a restricte d lifetim e. If E xpired c ertifi cate or Cert ifica te not valid y et is show n even if the c ertificate should be v alid, check that the c urrent da te and time in your device are correct. Before ch anging any c ertificate settings, y ou must m ake su re that yo u really trust th e owne r of the certificate and t hat the c ertifica te really belo ngs to the listed owner . CHA NGE THE TRUST SET TINGS OF AN A UTHORIT Y CERTI FICATE Scro ll to an authority certi ficate, and select O ptions > Trust setting s . D epending on the ce rtificate, a list of the applications tha t can use the selected c ertifica te is s hown. For example: ⢠Inte rne t âÂÂTh e certificate can ce rtify e-ma il a nd imaging server s. ⢠Ap p. in stal la tion â The c ertificate can certify the origin of ne w so ftware. ⢠CALL RESTRICTION (NETWOR K SERVICE ) Select Menu > Sett ings > C all res tric tion . Call restric tion allo ws yo u to restrict outgoing a nd inco ming calls w ith your p hone. For this function, y ou nee d the re stricti on password, which you ca n obtain from you r service provider . Select Optio ns , and choose one of the follow ing: Act iv ate âÂÂReque st th e net work to se t call res triction o n. Cancel âÂÂSet the s elected call restriction off. Check statu s âÂÂChec k whe ther th e c alls ar e blocke d. Ed it r est r . pa ssw . â Change the restriction password. Canc el all r est rict. âÂÂC ancel all activ e call re striction s. Y ou cann ot restrict incom ing calls while call forwa rding or fixed dialing is ac tive. See "Call forwarding (ne tw ork serv ice)" on page 29 . See a lso âÂÂSecurityâ on page 72 . When calls are restricted, cal ls still may be possible to cert ain official em ergenc y n umbe rs.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 75 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings â¢N E T W O R K Select Me nu > Set ting s > Networ k > Operator selec tion or Cell in fo di splay . Operator selection Aut om ati c âÂÂSet the phone to automatically search for and select one of th e cellular n etworks a vailab le in you r area. Man ual âÂÂSelect the desired network manually from a list of networks. If the connec tion to th e manually selecte d network is lost, the phone w ill sou nd an error tone and ask you to select a netw ork ag ain . The se lecte d netw ork m ust have a roaming a greem ent w ith your h ome ne twork, that is , the opera tor whose SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display On or Off âÂÂSet the phon e to indicate when it is used in a cellular netw ork based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception (network servic e). â¢E N H A N C E M E N T Select Menu > Setti ngs > Enhanc ement and one of these options: Enh anc eme nt in us e âÂÂI f yo u are usi ng an enh ance ment suc h as a loopset, headset, or TTY adapter , you m ust activate it by selecting Headset , Loop set , or TTY . If you ha ve activ ated a loopset, th e head set will use the s ame settings as the loopset. Headse t , Loopset , TTY , a n d Handsfre e âÂÂFor each of these ite ms, define the following se ttings: ⢠Default profile âÂÂS elect the profil e to be a cti vated eac h time yo u connec t a cert ai n enh ancement to y o ur p hon e. See " C hang e the profi l e" on page 82. ⢠Aut om ati c an sw er â Set the phone to answ er an incomin g call autom atically after 5 seconds time when you conn ect a cert ain enha ncem ent to your phone. If t he inc oming ca ll alert is set to Beep once or S ilen t , you mu st answer th e phone ma nually . Th is option is not av ailable for TT Y . See also âÂÂE nhanc ement indicatorsâ on page 22.
76 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 9 T o ols an d appl ications Select Menu > T ools to access c ommon tools and a pplications. F or instructions on voice mail a nd 1-touc h dialing, se e âÂÂCall voic e mailâ on page 26 and âÂÂ1-touch dialin gâ on page 27. ⢠APPLICATION MANAGER Select Me nu > Tools > Ma nage r . In App. ma nager you ca n instal l new comp atible Symbian op eratin g system applications (SIS file s) and Ja va application s (Java MIDle ts and MI Dlet suites). Y ou can also update and unin stall a pplications from the phon e and mon itor the installation h istory . Opt ions in App. m an ager are Install , Vie w de tails , V iew certificate , Update , Go to web address , Remo ve , View l og , Send log , Se t tings , App. do wnlo ads , Help , an d Exit . Whe n y ou o pen A pp. manag er , you can se e a list of: ⢠Applicati ons saved in App . man ager ⢠P arti ally in stall ed ap plic ati ons (ind icated by ) ⢠Fully in stalled applic ations th at you can remo ve (indica ted by ) Y ou c an only us e Sym bian opera ting syst em application s with a .SIS ex tension. Y our phone supports J2MEâ¢Java applications. Do not download P ersonalJav a⢠applications to your phone; they cannot be installed. Install applications Y ou c an install appl ications t hat are specifica lly intende d for this phone an d suitable for the Symbian operating s ystem. If you in stall an a pplication t hat is not intended specifically for this phone, it may func tion and look different from w hat was originally in tended. Applications may be downloaded to your phone during browsing, re ceived as attach ments in multime dia messa ges or e-m ails, or rec eived by Blue tooth connection from another de vic e, for examp le, a phone or a c ompatible PC. Impor tant: Onl y install a pplications from s ources tha t offer adequa te protection agains t harmful softw are.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 77 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia T ools and applications T o increase protecti o n, t h e applic ation installation sy stem uses digital signatures and certific ates for applicatio ns. Do not ins tall the applic ation if App . m anage r gives a security warni ng during installation. If you in stall an u pdate or rep air to an existing appl ication, th e original applic ation is removed and t he update or repair take s its pl ace. Y ou must have the original application or a fu ll backup copy of it in order to re store it after it h as been rem oved. To restor e the o rigin al appl icati on, fir st rem ove th e upda ted or r epair ed application, and th en ins tall again from the original application or the bac kup c opy . During installation , the phon e checks t h e integrity of th e application to be insta lled . The phon e sh ows in form ation a bout t he check s bei ng c arried o ut, a nd you a re gi ven optio ns on w het her to c onti nue or cance l the in stal latio n. Once the phon e has chec ked th e integri ty of th e applic ation , it is inst alled on y our phon e. INSTA LL APPLIC ATIONS Ope n App . man ager , scroll to t h e applicatio n, and select Opti ons > Install to start the installati on. Y ou c an also s earch the phone memory or the me mory card, select th e applica tion, and press the Sc ro ll key to start the installation . Some applic ations may give th e option of partial installa tion, all owing you to select t he particu lar com ponents of an applica tion that you want to install. If you are installing an applica tion without a digital signature or a certificate, the phone w arns you of the risk s. Cont inue installa tion onl y if you a re abs olutely sure of the origin and conte nts of the application. INS TAL L JAV A⢠APPL IC ATI ON S The .JAR file is required for in stallation. If it is missing, the phone may ask y ou to download it. If there is no access point define d for App. man ager , you will be asked to select one. When you are downloading the .J AR file, you may need to ente r a user na me an d passw ord to acce ss the server . Y ou obt ain th ese from the supplier or m anufacture r of the appl ication. ⢠T o start a dat a connection an d to view ex tra information abou t the application , scroll to it a nd select Op tions > Go t o web addre ss . ⢠T o start a data c onn ection and check i f there is an update a vailable for the application , scroll to it a nd select Op tions > Upda te . JAVA S ETTINGS T o chan ge the defau lt acce ss point tha t a Java applicatio n uses for d ownloadi ng extra da ta, sele ct Op tions > Set ting s > Acc es s point . See "Access points" on page 68. T o change th e security settings that determine the actions that a Java application is permi tted to d o , sele ct Options > Settings . Not all Java appli cations pe rmit you to cha nge the s ecurity se ttings.
78 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Remove an application 1 Scroll to th e application and select Options > Remove . 2 Press Ye s to confirm the remov al. If you re move an applicatio n, you can only reinstall it if you h ave the origina l application or a full back up of the re mo ved ap plicatio n. If yo u remo ve a n application, you may no long er be able to open documents create d with that app licat ion. If anoth er a ppl icat ion d epe nds on t he a pplic ation tha t you re move d, the oth er application may stop working. Refer to the docume ntation of t he installed a pplication for deta ils. ⢠FILE M ANAGER Select Me nu > Tools > F ile mngr . Opt ions in F ile ma nager are Open , Send , Del ete, Move t o folder , Copy to fo lder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Re nam e , Fi nd , Vie w details , Memory de tails , Help , and Exit . In File man ager , you can browse, open, and manage files and folders in the phone m emory or on th e memory card, if you use one . Ope n File ma nager to se e a lis t of t he folders in t he phone me mory . Scroll right to se e t he f olders on the m em ory c ard , if you use one. Y ou can bro wse, open, and create folders, mark, copy an d move items to folders. See "Common actions for all applic ations" on page 23 . Not all fo lders are visible in File man ager ( for e xample, syst em folde rs ar e not visible) . View memory consumption If you h ave a memory ca rd install ed on your phon e, yo u will h ave a ch oice of two memory view s, one for the phone mem ory and one for the memory card. Scroll right o r left to m ove from one me mory tab to another . To chec k mem ory co nsumpt ion of the cu rrent me mory , sele ct Options > Me mory detai ls . The phone calcu lates the approximate am ount of free me mory for storing data and installin g new a pplications. In the memory views, y ou can view the mem ory cons umption of the diffe rent data groups: Cal en dar , Contacts , Docu ments , Messag es , Ima ges , So und file s , Vi deo cl ips , App licat ions , Mem. in use , an d Free memory .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 79 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia T ools and applications ⢠V OICE COMMANDS Select Menu > T ools > V oice co m. . Opt ions in Voice c omman ds are A dd vo ice command , Ope n , New application , Playback , Chan g e , Delete , Delete all , He lp , and Exi t . Y ou can use voice comm ands to start applications and profile s, and to dial numbers from Contacts , without ha ving to look at th e phone display . Y ou record a word, or words, ( voi ce comm and) and then say this voice command to open an application, activate a profile, or dial a numbe r . Y ou can hav e only one voice command pe r item. Any spoken words can be a voic e comm and. When reco rding, hold the ph one at a short distance away from your mout h. After the sta rting tone, say cle arly the wo rd, or words, you want to record as a voic e comm and. V oice comm ands have the same requirements as voice tags. Before recording a voice comm and, see âÂÂRequire ments for voice tagsâ on page 33. Note: Y ou mu st sa y the voice com mand ex actly as yo u said it whe n you recorded it. This may be difficult in , for examp le, a n oisy env ironment or during an e mergency , so you should n ot rely solely u pon voice com mands in all circumsta nces. Add a voice command to an application 1 In Vo i c e c o m m a n d s , scroll to the application to which you are addin g a voic e command, and select Option s > Add voice command . T o ad d a voice com mand to a profile, you must h ave the Pro files folder open and a specific profile sele cted. Pre ss â StartâÂÂ, t hen speak af ter tone is dis played . 2 Press Start to record a voice c ommand. The phon e sounds a starting tone , and the n ote Speak now is displaye d. 3 Say t he voice c omm and. The phon e will stop rec ording after approx imately 5 seconds. Aft er recording, the phone plays the recor d ed command. V oice command sav e d is displa yed, and a beep sounds. A sym bol can be seen next to the application. If you do not want to save the recording, pre ss Qui t be fore the recording stops .
80 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Add an application to the list Y ou can assign vo ice comma nds to othe r application s that are n ot listed in th e Vo i c e c o m m a n d s mai n vi ew . 1 In the V oice comman ds main v iew , s elect Opt ions > New application . Available applications are display ed. 2 Scroll to th e application that y ou want to add, and p ress Sele ct . 3 Add a voice command to the new applic ation. See "Add a voice command to an application" on page 79. Use a voice command to start an application 1 In the standby mode, press and hold th e Right sel ection key . A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. 2 When y ou start an a pplication by saying a voice command, h old the p hone a sho rt di stance fr om you r mout h, and sa y the voice co mman d cl early . The phon e plays the original voic e com mand and starts the appli cation. 3 If the phone plays the wrong vo ice command, press Retry . R epl ay , eras e, o r chan ge a vo ice co mm and T o repla y , erase, or c h a nge a vo ice co mmand, scr oll to the item that has a voic e command (in dicated by ), and select Options and one of the following : Playback â Listen to the voice c omm and again. Delet e âÂÂEra se the voice co mman d. Change âÂÂRecord a ne w voice comm and. Press St art to re cord. ⢠DEVICE MANAGER This feature is ope rator dependent and ma y not be available on all phones. Con tact your se rvice provide r for informa tion and availabili ty . Select Menu > T ools > Dev . mgr . Opt ions in D evi ce man age r are Co nnect , New profile , Edi t profile , Delet e profile , En able or Disable configurations , Vi ew l og , Hel p , and Exit . When you ne ed hel p wi th difficult phone c onfiguratio ns, D evi ce man ager allows a third party , s uch as your servic e provide r , to assist you directly with phone settings. To allow device ma na gement, your phone must establish a connection and synchronize with the third partyâÂÂs server . Y ou can start the synchronizatio n session from your phon e, and you can accept or reje ct server-ini tiated synch ronization attempts.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 8 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia T ools and applications A device ma nager profile must b e defined before you can conn ect to a server . The th ird party who is assisting you ca n help defin e the profile settings: Ser ver na me âÂÂDisplay name of the server . Ser ver I D âÂÂRemote device manager server ID. Serv er passw ord âÂÂP a ssw ord used in ser ver alert s. En ter th e pa ssw ord that mu st be provided by the de vice manager server when synch ronizing with you r phone . Acces s poi nt âÂÂInter net ac cess p oint you r ph one us es to estab lis h the se rver connection. Choose from the list of acce ss points defined in your ph one. See "Access points" on page 68. Host address âÂÂDe vice manage ment server URL. Po r t â Device managem ent server port. Use r name âÂÂY our u ser nam e for this profile. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂY our passw ord for this profile. Allow configuration âÂÂDev i ce management allowed on this server . Select Ye s or No . Auto-acc ept all r eq s . âÂÂA utomatic or approve d device manage ment on this ser ver . S elect Ye s t o allow sync hronization w ithout you r verifica tion, or select No to verify e ach syn chronization attemp t.
82 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 1 0 P e rsonalization ⢠PROFI LES Select Menu > Pr ofiles . Use Prof iles to adju st and c ustomize sound tones for different events, environments, or c aller groups. The c urrently sele cted profile is define d at the top of the di splay in the standby mode. If the Normal profile is in use, only the curre nt date is shown. Opt ions in Prof iles are Act iv at e , Cu st om ize , Cre ate n ew , Delete profile , He lp , and Exi t . Change the profile 1 Select Menu > Pr ofiles . A list of profiles opens. 2 Scroll to a profile, and select Op tio ns > A ctiv ate . Sh ort cut : T o ch an ge the profi le i n the s tan dby mode , pres s the Po w e r key b riefly , scroll to the profile yo u wa nt to a ctivate, a nd press OK . Create and cu stomize profiles T o cre ate a new profile , select Op ti ons > C re ate ne w . To modify a profile, select Opti ons > Customi ze . Scroll to th e se tting you wan t to change , and pre ss the Scr oll ke y to o pen the c hoices: Ring ing to ne âÂÂSe t the ringing tone for voice calls. Cho ose a rin ging ton e from the list. Press any key to stop th e sound. If a memory card is us ed, tone s stored on it have the icon nex t to the tone name. Rin ging tones u se sha red memory . See "Shared memory" on page 13. Y ou can also change ringing t ones in Contacts . See "Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group" on page 33. Ringin g type âÂÂWhe n Ascen ding is selecte d, the ringing t one volu me start s from level on e and inc reases le vel by level to t he set v olume l evel. Ring ing volu me â Set the volume level for the ringing an d mess age alert tones. Messag e alert t one âÂÂSe t the t one f or mes sages . IM a lert ton e âÂÂSet t he tone f or instan t message s. Vibrating alert âÂÂSet t he p hone to vibrat e at in comin g voic e call s and m essag es. Ke yp a d to n e s âÂÂSe t the volu me level for keypad tones.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 83 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P ersonalization Warnin g tones âÂÂIns truct the phone to sound a warnin g tone, for e xample, when the battery is running low on power . Aler t for âÂÂSet the phone to ring only wit h calls from pho ne num bers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from pe ople outside the selecte d group will have a silent ale rt. Y ou can select A ll calls , or you can sele ct items from a list of contact groups, if yo u have created t hem. See "Create contact groups" on page 35. A vai labi lit y â Choose Av ailab le , Bu sy , o r Not avail able to be displayed as your presence inform ation for th e selected profile . This option is dis played only if you activate the proper Sy nc. wi th Pr ofiles setting in the Pr esence application. See "Presence settings" on page 3 8. User avail ab . alerts âÂÂEnter a cus tomized mess age (up to 40 charact e rs) to display your current pre sence status f or the se lected profile. Th is option is displayed only if you activate the proper Sync. wi th Profi les setting in the Prese nce application. Se e "Presence settings" on page 38 . Prof ile name âÂÂIf you are creat ing a n ew profile, us e this s etting t o give it a name. Y ou c an rename a profile a nd give it any n ame you want . The No rmal profile cann ot be renamed. ⢠THEMES Select Menu > T hemes . Y ou can ch ange the look of your ph one display by act ivat i ng a theme . A th eme ca n in clude t h e idle screen wa llpaper , color pa lette, screen saver , and background image in Go to . Edit a theme for more detaile d personalization. When yo u op en The m es you will s ee a list of the avai labl e themes . The cur rent ly activ e them e is indicated by a c heck mark. Scroll right to se e the th emes on th e memo ry card, i f you u se one. T o previ ew a theme, scroll to the t heme, and sel ect O ption s > Pre view . P res s Se lec t to activ ate the the me. Y ou can activ ate the the me without previewing it by s electing Op tions > Appl y fro m the m ai n view . Opt ions in Themes are Preview , Apply , Edit, Th eme do wnl oads , Delet e, He lp , and Exi t . Y ou can cop y themes th at you hav e downloaded. To copy a theme from your memor y card to the phone memory , scroll to the theme and select Op ti on s > Copy to ph one m em. . To copy a theme from your phon e memory to the me mory card, scroll to the th eme an d select Options > C opy to m em. card. .
84 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Edit themes To personalize themes fu rther , you can group together elements from oth er th emes or im ages from Gal lery : 1 Scroll to a theme, and select Opt ions > Edit to change the following options: Wallpaper âÂÂChoose an image to use as a background ima ge in the stan dby mode. Select an im age from one of the available the mes or from Galle ry , where your ow n ima ges ar e saved. Col or pa lette âÂÂChan ge the colo r used on the di splay . Scr een saver âÂÂSelect what is shown on the screen saver bar . Choose to displ ay the time and date o r wr i te t he text yo u want d ispl ayed. T he locatio n and background color of the screen saver bar change s in one minut e intervals . Also, t he scree n save r change s to in dicate the number of n ew me ssag es a n d mis sed ca lls . Y ou ca n se t t he time th at e lap se s b efor e th e screen saver is activated. See "Standby mode" o n page 67. Ima ge in âÂÂGo to â âÂÂChoose an image to use as a background i m age i n Go t o . Y ou can select an image from one of the available the mes or from Galle ry , where your ow n ima ges ar e saved. 2 Select Back to acce pt the c hange s. 3 Select Options > Set to se lec t the cu rren t theme. Y o u c an prev iew the updated th eme by selecting Op tions > Previ ew . Not e that you ca nnot preview all elements . Restore themes To restore the curre ntly s elected theme to its original settings, s elect Op tions > Resto re orig. theme wh en editi ng a theme. â¢G O T O Press Go t o ( Right sele ction key) in the standby mode, or select Me nu > Extr as > Go to . In Go t o , you can store shortcu ts, sav ed browser pages, and links t o your f avorite photos , video clips, n o t es, re cor der s o un d f iles, and br owse r bo okma rks. Opt ions in Go to are Op en , Edit shortcut name , Mov e , Lis t view or Grid vie w , Hel p , and Exi t . Default s hortcuts in Go t o : âÂÂopens Calendar to t he cu rrent date , âÂÂopens the Mes sagin g inbox, and âÂÂopens the Notes edit or .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 85 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P ersonalization Y ou can only add shortcuts from preinstalled applications and functions. 1 Open the applica tion and scroll to the item that you want to add as a short cut. 2 Select Optio ns > Add t o âÂÂGo toâ , and press OK . A shortcut in Go t o is autom atically upda ted if you mov e the ite m to wh ich it poin ts, for exa mple , from on e fold er to anoth er . Hints on using shortcuts: ⢠To open a shortcut, scroll to th e icon, and press the Sc ro ll key . The file opens in the corresponding app lication. ⢠To delete a s hortcut, s croll to th e shortcut , and s elect Opti ons > Delete sho rtc u t . Removin g a shortc ut does not affect the fil e to which it refers. ⢠To change the shortcut n ame, select Op tions > Ed it sho rtcut nam e . Write the ne w name . This c hange affec ts only the s hortcut, n ot th e file or item to whic h the shortcut refers. The de fau lt shortcuts can not be deleted.
86 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 11 E x t r a s â¢N O T E S Select M enu > Ex tras > No tes . Y ou c an link not es to Go t o and sen d them to oth er devices. Plain text files (T XT forma t) you rece ive can be saved t o No tes . Press any key from 1 to 0 to s tart to write. Pre ss th e Cl ear ke y to cl ea r let ters. Press Do ne to s ave . ⢠CALCUL ATOR Select M enu > Ex tras > Calc ula tor . Op tions in th e calcu lat or a re Last r esu lt , Memory , Clear screen , Hel p , and Exi t . 1 Enter the firs t numb er of your calculation. To add a decimal, press the # key . If you m ake a mist ake, pre ss the Clear key t o eras e it. 2 Scroll to an arithmetic func tion, and press the Scrol l ke y to s elect it. 3 Enter the second num ber . 4 T o exec ute the cal culati on, sc rol l to and press t h e Scro ll key . Press and hold the Cl ear ke y to clea r t he r esult of th e pre viou s ca lcul atio n. Use and to view previous calc ulations and mov e in th e shee t. Note: Th is calcu lator has lim ited acc uracy and is designe d for simple calcu lations. Ro unding errors may occu r , espe cially in lon g division . â¢C O N V E R T E R Select M enu > Ext ras > C onv er ter . In Converter , yo u ca n co nvert mea sure s fr om on e unit to an othe r; for exam ple, you ca n con ver t length from yards to meters. Converter has limited accurac y and round ing errors may occu r . Convert u nits Opt ions in Con ver te r are Conversion type , Currency rates (not appli cable to other un its), Hel p , and Exit . T o make curr ency c onvers ions , you must first set t he ex chan ge rat e. See "Set a base curre ncy and exchange rate s" on page 87. 1 Scroll to Type , and press th e Scroll key to open a list of me asures.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 87 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras 2 Scroll to th e m easure yo u wa nt to us e, and press OK . 3 Scroll to th e first Un it field, and press the Sc roll k ey to open a list of avail able units. 4 Select the unit from whi ch yo u want t o conv ert, a nd pr es s OK . 5 Scroll to the next Unit field, and select t he unit to whic h you wa nt t o c onver t. 6 Scroll to the first Am ount fiel d, and ke y in t he val ue yo u want to c onvert . Press t he # k e y to add a decima l, and press the * ke y to ins ert the , - (for tempe rature), a nd E (expone nt) symbols. The se cond Amount fiel d changes autom atica lly to show the conv erted value . The con ver sion o rder ch ange s if you writ e a value in the s econd Amoun t field. The result is s h own in the first Am ount field. Set a base currency and exchange rates Before you ca n ma ke c urrency conve rsion s, y ou mus t cho ose a b ase currenc y (usually your dom estic currency) and add exchange rates. The rate of the b ase curre ncy is alw ays 1. Th e b ase cu rrenc y d etermin es th e conver sion rat es of t he other c urrencies. 1 Selec t Cur ren cy as the measure type, and select Options > Currency rates . A list of currenc ies opens with the current base curre ncy at the top. 2 To ch ange the b ase currenc y , scroll to the currenc y (us ually your dome stic currenc y), and select Optio ns > Set as base curr . . When you change base currency , all previously set exchange rates are reset to zero, and y ou must ente r new rates. 3 Add exchange rate s, scroll to th e currency , and k ey in a ne w rate, that is, how man y u nits of the currenc y equa l one unit of th e base currenc y you have select ed. 4 After y ou have inserted all the required e xchang e rates, mak e the c urrency conversions. See "Conv ert units" on page 86. ⢠V OI CE RE CORD ER Select M enu > Extra s > R ec order . Opt ions in V o ic e record er are Reco rd sou nd clip , Delete, Rename sound clip , Send, Go t o Gal lery , Settings, A d d to âÂÂG o toâ , Help , an d Exit . The voic e recorder allow s you to record te lephone con versations an d voice memos . If you a re recording a teleph one con versation, b oth parties w ill hear a tone every 5 secon ds during recording. V oice re corder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS c onnect ion is act ive. Rec or ded fi les a re st ored in Galler y . S ee "Gallery" on page 48.
88 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Select Opti ons > Rec o r d soun d clip , scroll to a function, and press the Scro ll key t o s elect it: â¢C L O C K Select M enu > Ex tras > Cl ock . Opt ions in C lock are Set alarm , Reset alarm , Re mo ve alarm , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Change settings To change the time or date , select Op ti on s > S ett ings . Se e also âÂÂDat e and tim eâ on page 7 1. Set an alarm 1 To se t a ne w al ar m , sel ec t Op ti ons > Se t ala rm . 2 Enter th e alarm time, and press OK . When the a larm i s active, the indica tor is show n. T o cance l an alarm, se lect Clock > Options > Remove alarm . Stop an alarm Press Stop to turn off the alarm. Press Snoo ze to stop t he alarm for 5 m inute s, after w hich it will res ume. Y o u can do this a maximum of 5 times. If t he a larm time is reac hed w hile th e ph one i s swi tche d off , t he p hon e sw itch es on and starts soun d ing the alarm tone. If you press Sto p , you rece ive a message asking w hether you w ant to a ctivate the ph one for calls . Press No t o s w i t c h o f f the pho ne or Ye s to make and re ceive c alls. Do not pre ss Yes when wireless phone use is prohibited or whe n it may cause interferenc e or dange r . Record Pa u s e Stop F ast forw ard Fa st r e w in d Play an opened sound file
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 89 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras P er sonalize the alarm tone 1 To pers on al ize t he al arm ton e, se lec t Options > Settings > Clock ala rm tone . Whe n yo u scr oll thro ug h the lis t of tone s, y ou ca n st op on a tone t o li sten to it before y ou ma ke you r se lection . 2 Press Select to s elec t the current tone. ⢠MEMO RY CARD Select Menu > T ools > M emory . Opt ions in Memor y card are Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Fo rmat mem. car d , Memory card n ame , Set password , Change pas sword , Remo ve password , Memory details , Hel p , and Exit . K e ep all me mory cards out of the reach of small childre n. For details on ins erting a memory card i nto th e phon e, see âÂÂIn sert t he mem ory cardâ on page 17 . Y ou c an use the memory c ard to back up informat ion from phone mem ory and to store your mu ltimedia files such as video clips, sound files, photos, messaging data, etc. Y ou r ph one may come with a Reduced Si ze M ultiMediaCard (RS-MMC ) that may contain add-on applic ations from independent developers. These a pplications are designed by th e devlopers to be compatibl e with your phon e. Nokia does not provide any w arranty or support for these applications. Contact the con tent provider for any ass i stance needed. Use only compat ible MultiM ediaCards (MMC ) with this device. Other m emory cards, s uch as Secure Digital (SD ) cards , do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compa tible with this device . Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memo ry card as well as the device, and data stored on the i ncompatible card m ay be corru pted. B Y USI N G THE APPLICA TION S PROVIDED ON THE RS-M MC, Y OU ACKNOWLEDG E THE SOFTWARE AND /OR APPLICATI O NS (COLLECTIVEL Y , THE "SOFTWARE" ) ARE PROV IDED "AS I S" W ITHOUT WA RRANTY OF A NY KI ND E XPRES S OR IMPL IED AND TO THE MAXIMUM E XTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIA TES MAK E ANY REPRESENTA TI ONS OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS O R I MPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NO T LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITL E, MERCH ANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULA R PU RPOSE OR TH A T THE SOFTWARE W ILL NOT INFRINGE ANY TH IR D PAR T Y PATE N TS , C OP Y RI GH TS , TRADEMARKS OR O THER RIGHTS. T H E R E I S N O W A R R A N T Y B Y N O K I A O R B Y I T S A F F I L I A T E S T H A T A N Y A S P E C T O F THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET Y O UR REQU IREMENTS OR THAT TH E OPER A T ION OF THE SOF TW ARE WI LL BE UN INTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. Y OU ASSUME A LL R ESP ON S IB IL I T Y AND RISK FOR TH E SELE CTION OF THE SOFTW ARE T O ACHIEVE
90 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Y OUR INTENDED RESULTS AND FOR THE INSTALLA TION, USE AND RESU L TS OBT AINED FROM IT . TO THE MAXIM UM E XTENT PERM ITTED BY APP LICABLE LAW , IN NO EV ENT SHALL NO KIA, IT S EMPLO YEES O R AFFI LIA TES B E LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFIT S, REVEN U E, SALES, DAT A, INFORMATION OR COSTS OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES, PRO PERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY , I NTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS , OR FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRE CT , INCIDE NTAL, EC ONO MIC, COVER, PUNI TIVE , SPECIA L OR CON SEQU ENTIAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND WHETHER ARISING UNDER CONT RACT , TORT , NEGL IGEN CE, OR OTHER THEOR Y OF LIABIL ITY A RISIN G OU T OF TH E IN ST ALL AT ION OR US E OF OR INA BILI TY T O USE T HE SO FTW ARE, E VEN IF N OKI A OR ITS AFFILIA TES ARE ADVISED OF THE PO SSIBILI T Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUS E SOME COUNT RIES/STATES/JURI SDICTI ONS DO NOT ALLO W THE ABOV E EXCLUSION OR LI MITA TION OF LIAB ILITY , BU T MA Y ALLO W LIAB ILITY TO BE LIMIT ED, IN SUCH CASE S, NOK IA, IT S EM PLO YE ESâ OR AF FILIATES' LIABILIT Y SHALL BE LIMITED TO U.S.$5 0. Nothin g containe d in this disclaimer s hall prejudice the statutory rights of an y party dealing as a consume r . Attach and remove the memory card adapter The RS-MMC comes with an adapter attach ment tha t allows you to use the card in regular sized MMC slots (for instance, in other Nokia phones or in a card reader). Be sure to rem ove the adapte r whe n you use the R S-MM C in your Nokia 667 0 phone. See " Insert the mem ory card" o n page 17. To remove the adapter , press t he arrow labeled Push to re lease the catch ( 1 ), an d gently pull the RS -MMC a way from t he adapter ( 2 ). To reattach the ad apter , locate the lon g side of the RS-MMC ( opposite from the side with the bevelled corner) and slide the card in to the meta l slots of th e ada pter . Make sure the RS-MMC is at tache d securely to t he adapter before y ou attempt t o use the card in anot her Nokia phone or in a card reader . Format memory card When a memory card is form atted, all data on the card is perman ently lost. Some m emory cards are supplied pre -formatted and ot hers require form atting. When format ting, t he memo ry card should always be formatted in your Nokia 667 0 phone to ensure correct operation. The memory acce ss and performance cannot be guaranteed whe n formatti ng with another operating syste m. 2 1 be velle d corner
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 9 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Extras Y ou can us e Fil e manager to che ck for da ta o n a mem ory c ard be fore for matti ng it. See "File m anager" on page 78. To format a memory card, select Options > For mat mem. card , and select Yes to confirm. When form atting is comple te, key in a nam e for the me mory card (up to 1 1 le tters or num bers). Back up and r estore information Y ou can back up the phone memory and re store it to your ph one. To back up information fro m ph one memo ry to th e memory card, select Options > B ackup phon e mem. T o restore information from the m emory card to phone me mory , sel ect O pti ons > Restor e from ca rd . Lock the memory card Y ou c an set a pa ssword to lo ck your me mory card again s t unauthorized use . Select Opti o ns > Se t pass word . Y ou will be aske d to enter and confirm y our password. The passw ord can be up t o eight characters long. The password is stored in your phone a nd you do not have to enter it again while you are using th e memory c ard on the same phone. If you wa nt to use the memo ry card on anothe r phone, you will be a sked for th e password again to unlock the c ard. Unlock a memory card If you insert an other password-protected mem ory card in your phone, you w ill be pro mpted upo n startup to enter the password of the card. En ter the passwo rd, and press OK to unlock the card, or pre ss Can cel to leave the card loc ked. To unlo ck the ca rd lat er , sel ect M enu > Ex tras > M emo ry > Opt ions > Unloc k memo ry c ard . Enter the password, and press OK . Remove memory card password To remove a memor y card password ent irely , select Options > Remove password . Once the pas sword is remov ed, the memo ry card is un locked and can b e used on your ph one or anothe r phone with out a password. Check m e mory consumption Y ou can check the me mory consum ption of different data grou ps and th e available memory for inst alling new applications or softw are on you r memory card. Selec t Opt ions > Memo ry de tails .
92 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠WALLET Select M enu > Ex tras > Wal let . Wal l et prov ides you with a storage area for your pe rsonal information, such as credit and debit card numbers, addresses, and other useful data (for exam ple, user names and passwords). The inform ation stored in the w allet ca n be easily retrieved while browsing to autom atically fill in on line form s on browse r pag es, fo r exam ple , when the service as ks for credit card details. Data in the wallet is encrypted and prote cted with a walle t code that y ou define. Y ou can group wallet dat a into p rofiles that can be ac cessed, for example , for making purchases onlin e. Beca use o f the na ture o f th e walle t, it wil l autom atically close after 5 mi nutes . Enter the wallet c ode to re gain ac cess to the con tents . Y ou can ch ange t h i s auto matic ti me-ou t perio d, if r equired . See "W alle t setting s" on p age 95. Opt ions in Walle t are Ope n , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Enter the wallet code Each t ime you ope n the wallet y ou will be prom pted for a wallet code . When you open th e walle t for the first time, you mu st cre ate your o wn secu rity code : 1 Enter a code of y our choice (4âÂÂ1 0 alphan umeric characters), and pre ss OK . Y ou w ill be prompte d to verify the code. 2 Enter the same cod e, and pres s OK . Do not gi ve you r wall et cod e to any o ne e lse. If you ente r the wallet code incorrect ly on three cons ecutiv e attempts , the wallet application is blocked for 5 minut es. The block ed time in creases if further in correct walle t codes are e ntered. If you forget your w allet code, yo u will ha ve to reset the code, and you w ill lose all inf ormation stored in th e wallet. S ee "Reset the wallet and wallet cod e" on pa ge 95. Store personal card details Options when view ing or editing c ard details are Dele te , Hel p , an d Exit . 1 Select Cards from the main wallet menu .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 93 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras 2 Select a type o f card: P a yme nt ca rds âÂÂCredit and debit cards Loyal ty ca rds âÂÂMembership an d store cards Onlin e acc. ca rds âÂÂP ersonal u ser names and passwords to onlin e services Addre ss cards âÂÂBasic contact details for hom e/office Use r inf o car ds âÂÂCu stomized personal pre fe rences for online s e rvices 3 Select Options > Create new . An empty form opens. 4 Fill in th e fields, a nd press Done . Y ou can also receive card inform ation di rectly to the phone from a card issuer or service prov ider (if they offer th is service). Y ou are notified as to whic h category the card belongs. Save or discard the c ard. Y ou can view and rename a saved card, but you cann ot ed it it. Y ou can ope n, edit, or de lete the fields in the card. Any c hanges will be saved upon exitin g. Create personal notes P ersonal notes are a mean s of storing sensiti ve in formation, for exam pl e, a bank accou nt number . Y ou ca n access the data in a personal note from the browser or send a note as a m essa ge. 1 Select P e rson al notes from the main wallet m enu. 2 Select Options > Create new . An empty n ote opens. 3 Pre ss any key fro m 1 to 0 to start writing, and press the Clear key to clea r characte rs if ne cessary . 4 Press Do ne to s ave . Create a wallet profil e Once you have s tore d you r perso na l detai ls, y ou can com bine th em into a wa llet profile. Use a wallet profile to retrieve walle t data from different cards and categories to the browser . 1 Select Wallet pr ofiles from the main walle t men u. 2 Select Options > Create new . A new w allet profile form opens. 3 Enter a nam e for the profile in the Prof ile name field.
94 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 4 Scroll to each of the following fields, and press the Scro ll key t o op en a li st of select ions: P a yme nt ca rd â Select a card from the list. Loyal ty ca rd â Selec t a ca rd from the list . Onlin e acces s card âÂÂSel ect a card f rom th e list. Ship ping addr ess âÂÂSelec t an addr ess f rom the l ist . Bill ing ad dres s âÂÂBy default t his is Us e shippin g ad. If you requ ire a billi ng address that is different from the shipping address, select one from the billing address list. Use r inf o car d âÂÂS elect a ca rd from th e l ist. Re ceiv e e-r ece ip t âÂÂSelect a destination from the list. Del i ve r e-recei pt âÂÂSe lect T o phon e , T o e-m ail , or T o ph o. & e-mail . RFID sen din g âÂÂSe t to On or Of f . De fines w hether or n ot yo ur unique phon e identificat ion is sent with the wallet profile (for future de velopment dependent on RFID-based tic k eting). 5 Press Do ne to sa ve th e new profile. Retrieve information from wallet to your browser When usin g online mobile services support ing the wallet functi onality , you can upload t he data s tored in yo ur walle t to automatic ally ente r your de tails int o an online form. For example, by u ploading your p ayment card details, you do not ne ed to key in the car d number and expir ation date eac h ti me you n eed them (de pending on the c ontent being browsed). Also, you can ret rieve your u s e r n a m e a n d p a s s w o r d s t o r e d a s a n a c c e s s c a r d w h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a m o b i l e service that re quires auth entication. See "Pu rchase an item" on page 1 1 0 . View tic ket details Y ou can re ceive notifi cations of electronic t ickets purchased online w ith the brow ser . R eceive d ticket noti fications ar e stored in t he walle t. To view the not ifications: 1 Select Tickets from the main Wa ll et me nu. 2 Select Options > View . Th e tick et deta ils are d is playe d in a form. None of th e field s in the t ick et notification form can be edited. Opt ions in Ti c kets ar e Vi ew , De let e , Rename , Mark/U nmark , He lp , and Exit .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 95 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras W allet settings Select Opti ons > S ettings from the main wa llet menu to m odify the following it ems: Wal l et c o de âÂÂChan ge your wallet code. Y o u will be prompted to e n ter the current code, create a ne w code, and ve rify the ne w code. RFID â Set t he ph one I D co de, typ e, and send ing o ptions ( for futu re de velop ment dependent on RFID-based tic k eting). Aut om ati c clos e âÂÂChang e t he automa tic tim e-o ut period (1â 60 m inutes). After the tim e-out period h as elapsed, the walle t code must be re -entered to gain ac cess to the con tents . Reset the wallet and wallet code T o re set both th e c ontents of the w allet and the w alle t code: 1 Ke y in *#737 0925538# in the standby mode. 2 Enter the ph one lock cod e, and press OK . See "Security " on page 72 . 3 To con firm t ha t th e dat a is era sed, pre ss OK . When openi ng the wa llet aga in, yo u mus t enter a new w allet code. See "Ente r the wallet code" on page 92. ⢠GAMES Select Menu > Ga mes . T o start a game, scroll t o the game icon, a nd press the Scroll key . For i nstructi ons on how to play the game , select Options > Hel p .
96 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 12 Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Select Menu > IM . Opt ions in Instant M essaging are Open , Login or Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . T ake te xt me ssagin g to th e next l evel b y exp er ien cing instant messaging in a wi reless en vironme nt. Engage in instant me ssaging with frie nds and family as lon g as you all use th e sa me IM se rvice. C heck with y our wireless s ervice prov ider for availability . Before you can start using IM on your phone, you must make s ure that yo ur phone can e stablish a GPRS connecti on. Yo u must also register wi th the IM servi ce you want to use. See â IM se rv ic e pr ovid er icon sâ on pa ge 96 fo r more in for mati on. Note: Due to va riations in IM and wirele ss service providers, y ou may not have a ccess to all of the fe atures describ ed in th is guide. ⢠IM SERVICE PROVIDER ICONS Since each IM service has its own display text and icons associated with it, the display text and icons on your phon e may appear differently for each IM service provider . If you have any questions a bout the differences in the various IM service providersâ display text an d icons, contact your w i reless service provider for more info rmati on. Exa mples of I M ic ons a nd th eir desc ri ptio ns are as follows: Contac t onl ine Contact not logged in to IM Contact bloc ked Tracking set for c ontact New unre ad message
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 97 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) ⢠REGISTER WITH AN IM SERVICE Before yo u can use IM , yo u must re gister wi th an I M serv ice to obtain an IM user name and passw ord . Y ou can obtain an IM u ser name and password by registering over th e I nternet ( using y our c omputer) with t he IM service provider y ou have selecte d to use. Du ring th e registration process, yo u will hav e the opportunity to creat e the user name and passw o rd o f your choice. For more informat ion about signing up for IM serv ices, contact your wireless s ervice prov ider . ⢠BEFORE USING IM Before you can u se the IM fe a tur e, your p hon e m ust have at le ast on e access poin t defin ed. See " Acce ss points" on pag e 6 8. An IM se rver m ust also b e defin ed in y our phon e: 1 Select Menu > IM > Opti ons > S etting s > Se rver s ett ings > Ser vers . 2 Select a s erver from the l ist, or select Option s > New server to d efine a new serve r . If you n eed he lp definin g a new server , conta ct you r wirele ss service provider or IM service provider . Y ou mu st also obtain a user name and password (see âÂÂRegister with an IM serviceâ on page 97). For mo r e information about si gning up for instant m essaging service s, contact your wireless se rvice provider . â¢L O G I N Select Menu > I M > Opt ions > Log in , ente r your us er name and pas sword , an d press OK . Afte r you h ave logged into IM initially , you h ave the optio n of a manual login or an automatic login. See â Autom atic loginâ on page 9 8. ⢠I M SETTINGS Y ou ca n cus tomiz e your IM set ting s, d epend ing upo n th e IM ser vic e you ha ve sel ecte d. S e l e c t O pti ons > Sett ings > IM setting s from the ma in IM m enu screen, and select the follow ing: Use s creen name âÂÂS elect Yes to key in a ni cknam e (u p to 10 char acters ). IM pr esence âÂÂSelect on e of the follow ing options: ⢠Acti ve for all âÂÂAll othe r users see you r status as online an d you receiv e availability information an d messag es from all ot her users. ⢠Acti ve for c ntcts. âÂÂEve n though only the c ontacts in IM con tacts s ee y our status a s online, you re ceive a vailability inform ation and m essages from all other use rs. ⢠No t ac tive âÂÂY ou r status to other users appears to be offlin e from th e IM service, bu t you re ceive availability inform ation and message s from all other use rs.
98 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Allow mes sage s from and A llow in vita tio ns fr om âÂÂThe se settings de fine whether you receive instant messages or group inv itations from All , IM co ntac ts onl y , o r None . Messag e speed âÂÂSelec t the sp eed at which new mess ages ar e disp layed. Auto-r eload availab . âÂÂCho ose how to upda te i nfor mati on whe n yo ur IM contacts log in or ou t of the IM se rvice. Select Auto maticall y or Manua lly . Reload user availab . â Use this setting to define wh ich IM conta cts are i ncluded in a manual or automatic status update . Select For all contacts to r efre sh the status information of all you r IM conta cts, or choose s pecific I M contacts . Automatic login Y ou can log in autom atically when y ou start th e IM applic ation. First yo u mu st ensure that y our IM us er ID and passw ord are entered for your IM server . To check this, go to the I M main menu, a nd sele ct O ption s > Sett ings > Se rver setti ngs > Servers and the IM s erver you a re us ing. Scroll to th e Us er ID and Pa s s w o r d fie lds to ente r your inform ation. To turn autom atic login on , scroll to t he IM login type fiel d in the Ser ver setti ngs sc ree n, and se lec t On app. st a rt- up . If you wan t to t urn automatic login off, se lect Manual . Set up presence status updates Presence allows you and other users to know who is online and available to cha t. Y ou can s et your phone to update a con tactâ s presen ce status aut o ma ticall y every time i t is changed. From the IM main m enu, select Options > Se ttings > IM se tti ngs > Relo ad us er av ailab. Y ou can also designate wheth er your own presence inform ation is update d when you log in to IM. From the IM ma in men u, select Opti ons > Settings > Ser ver se ttin gs > Pr esen ce log in typ e > Au to matic , A ut. in ho me net . (automa tic in h ome ne twork), On app. start-up , o r Man ual . For more information on the presence feature, see âÂÂPresenc e ( n etwork service )â on page 35. ⢠IM CONVERSATIONS Select Menu > IM > Co nver sations . Opt ions in Conv ersation s are Op en , De lete , Add to IM cont acts , New conversati on , Set auto re ply on , Blocking options , Cl ose conversation , Settings, Help , and Exi t .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 99 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Y ou can send i nstant messages to any o ne who uses t h e same I M service as y o u do, as long as you have that per sonâ s user name. Y ou ca n als o add th at perso n to IM c on tac ts du ring an I M con vers ation . Se e âÂÂIM cont actsâ on pag e 1 00 for more inform ation. More than one IM conversatio n can be active at the same time. Conversations li sts all ac tive co nversati ons by IM conta ct name. Se lect one of the nam es to open the conversati o n wi th that p erson. The co ntact âÂÂs name is displayed at the t op of t he screen, and as t he conversation pr ogresses, the most recent message appears at the bottom of the screen, causing the last message to move up one le ve l. Start a conv ersation Y ou must be able to select a contact who is online before you can begin a conversation. 1 From the IM main me nu, sele ct Conversations . 2 Select Options > N ew conv ersa tion > Se lect reci pien t or Enter Us er ID . If yo u choose Sel ect recipie nt , a lis t of your IM c ontac ts who are curren tly online is dis played. If you s elect Enter Us er ID , you mu st en ter the exac t user ID of the contact. After you select a recipient, a conv ersation view is opened with the re cipientâÂÂs name dis played at the t op of the screen. The conversation is still active, even if you leave t he convers ation v iew . Y ou can re turn to it when you want by selecti ng Conversati o ns from the IM main m enu. Write and send to contact 1 Start a new c onversation or open an ac tive one from Convers ations . 2 Enter you r mes sage in the field a t the bottom of th e scre en. See " Write text" on page 5 2. 3 T o send the me ssage, press t he Scro ll key , o r sele ct Opt io ns > Sen d . Th e mess age is di spla yed i n the co nvers ati o n v i e w for that cont act. Receive me ssage and reply When you receive an instant m essage , your phon e beeps (if the phone is not set to the Sile nt profile) and th e senderâ s reply appears b eneath the most recent mes sage in th e conv ersati on. Select Co nve rsations from the IM main menu an d open the co nversation wit h the new message indicated by the icon. Y ou can also select IM cont ac ts from the IM ma in menu, and the new message ic on is displayed by th e contact who sent you th e message. Select the name to open the conversation.
1 00 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Save To sa v e your conversation or group con versation, perform the follow ing steps be fore yo u end the conv ers atio n: 1 From the conversation view or group conversation v iew, select Options > Record c onv ers. . 2 In the Co nversa tion name screen, en ter a name for the co nversati on, and sel ect OK . The conversati on is saved as a note un der the Extras phone men u. 3 To stop recording the conversation, select Options > Stop rec ordin g . T o view sa ved con versat ions, se lect Menu > Ex tra s > Notes , and open t he co nver sati on yo u wa nt to vi ew . To de lete a saved conversation, highlight it in the list of Notes docum ents, and sel ect O pti ons > Delete . End a conversation Select Co nv er satio ns fro m the IM mai n menu , op en the con ver sati on yo u want to end, and select Opt ions > En d co nvers ati on . â¢I M C O N T A C T S Add to IM con tact s the nam es of your frie nds an d family with w hom you wan t to intera ct freque ntly t hr o u gh I M. Opt ions in IM c ont acts are Op en co nvers ation , Con tact details , Switc h tracking on or off , New IM contact , Edit , Delete , Blocking options , My se rver contacts , Se arch , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Add manually or from phone Contacts list From the IM ma in men u, select IM co ntac ts > Option s > Ne w IM con tact and one of th e following: Ent er man ually âÂÂTh is option opens a new c ontact card. At a minimum , y ou must enter an ex act IM user ID in th e User ID field. Y ou may also enter a first name, last name, and ot her conta ct nu mbers on this contact c ard. If you w ant to modify t he contact card later , see âÂÂContactsâ on page 32. Add fr om Contac ts âÂÂThis option dis plays a lis t of entries from yo ur contact directory . T o select a contact to add to y our IM contacts lis t, scroll t o the contact , and press the Scroll key to select it ( this places an X in th e box beside the c ontact na me). W hen y ou have chosen a ll the con tacts you wa nt to a dd, press OK .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 10 1 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Search To s e arch for a person or group that is curre ntly online, fro m the IM con tact s scr een, sele ct Options > Search and one of the fo llowing: Grou ps âÂÂSelect t his option to search for an IM group b y Grou p n ame , Top ic , or Grou p mem bers . If you search by group m ember , you must enter the memberâÂÂs exa ct IM us er ID. Use rs â Select this op tion to sea rch fo r an IM user by Use râÂÂs n am e , User ID , Phon e number , or E-mail ad dres s . The search crite ria doe s no t have to be an exact match for the item for whic h you are s earching. Add contact to IM contacts during IM session 1 Select Conversations from the IM main menu. 2 Scroll to th e contact yo u want t o add, and select Op ti ons > Add t o IM co ntac ts . Yo u can al so open th e conversation, and select Opti ons > Add to IM co n tac ts . A conta ct card is op ened for th e new con tact, and th e co ntactâÂÂs IM u ser ID is automatica lly entered in the Use r ID field. Y ou may also sp ecify a first name, last name , and other contact ph one numbers on this contac t card. 3 Select Opti ons > O K . Re mov e From the I M main menu, select IM con tacts , the contac t you want to re move, and Del ete > Y es . Block and unblock To block a cont act, selec t the c ontact name in IM cont acts or in Conver sations , and sele ct Optio ns > Blockin g options > Add to blo cked list . To unblock one or m ore contacts from t he IM c ontacts list or from an open conv ersat ion, sele ct Op tions > Bl ocking options > Un block , scroll to the c ontac t, and press the Sc ro ll key to select it (this places an X in the box beside th e conta ct name ). When you have c hosen all th e contac ts you wan t to unbloc k, press OK . View blocked list From the IM contacts list or from an open con versation, select Op tions > Blockin g options > View blo cked list . Set or re move alert T o s et an alert for a contact to notify you whe n the contactâÂÂs a vailability changes, go to the IM c ontac ts scree n, and select the contact for whom you wan t to set an alert; then s elect Op tions > Switch trac king on . To remove th e ale rt, sele ct Options > Switch tracking off .
1 02 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia ⢠IM GROUP SESSIONS Select IM g rou ps from the IM main menu . The group featu re allo ws yo u to converse with multiple participa nts simultane ously . Y o u ca n create your o wn private group or be invi ted to join a live group in progress. During a group conversation, all messages are displayed in one group conversation view screen. Y ou can al so sav e a group conv ersation history . See âÂÂSaveâ on page 1 0 0. In IM g roups , a list of IM groups that you h ave saved or a re currently joined t o is s hown. The ico n next to a group indicates wh ether it is: ⢠A group that you saved an d are currently join ed to ( or ) ⢠A group that you saved bu t are not currently join ed to ( or ) ⢠A group tha t you are curre ntly joined to but h ave not saved ( ) Op tion s in th e IM g rou ps view are Ope n , Join group , Create new group , Lea ve IM group , IM group , Se arch , Settings , Help , an d Exit . Options when you have an IM grou p conversation ope n are Send , Se nd privat e msg. , Reply , Fo rwa rd , Send invitation , Leave IM group , A dd t o banne d list , IM group , Reco rd conv ers. or Stop recording , He lp , an d Exit . Create an IM group 1 Fro m the IM main menu, select IM g roups > Option s > Create n e w group . 2 Select each of the follow ing options and follow the promp ts to ente r the appropriate information: Grou p na me âÂÂEnter a name for the new group, and select OK . Grou p topi c âÂÂEnter a conv ersation topic for the group, and select OK . T he default topic is General . Wel c om e n ot e âÂÂEnter a we lcome n ote of up to 1 00 characters, and select OK . The we lcome note is displayed to any group membe r who logs in to the grou p. Grou p size â Enter the m aximum group size, and select OK . The de fault size is 1 00 memb er s. Allow se ar ch âÂÂDeter mine whet her s earch engine s are al lowed to sho w th e group as a search result. Select either Ye s or No . Edit ing r igh ts âÂÂDe termine w hich grou p members should ha ve rights t o edit group properties. To give a member editing rights , scroll to that member name and press the Scr oll key to mark the name. Whe n you are finishe d, select OK . The Grou p crea tor alw a ys has editing rights and c annot be u nmarked.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 03 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Grou p mem ber s âÂÂDeterm ine whe ther to res trict the group to a lis t of mem ber s or to a ll ow a nyo ne to part i c ipate. Select eith er Selected only (g rou p is restr icted to a list of membe rs) or All (an yone can jo in the group). See â Ad d and remov e group m embersâ on page 1 03 for more in formation. Banned list âÂÂSelect contacts that cannot join th e group or send mess ages to the group . Allow p rivate msgs. âÂÂDeter m ine wheth er participants in the group are al lowe d to sen d private messages during a group. Select either Ye s or No . 3 Select Back . 4 Enter you r screen name and select OK . Y ou are con nected to the new group conv ersation in th e group con versation view . Join or leave an IM group From the IM main me nu, sele ct IM groups , and se lect the group y ou want to join. Enter your s creen name, a nd sele ct OK . Y ou are connec ted to th e group c onve rsat ion in t he group conv ersation view, and the name of the group is displayed at th e top of the screen. To lea ve the group, select Opt ion s > L ea ve IM g rou p . Add and remov e group members Y ou can restric t a grou p to selected mem bers by add ing and r emo ving co ntacts from the group m embers list. 1 In the group conversation view, select Op tion s > I M gr oup > IM gro up setti ngs > Group member s . 2 Scroll to Select ed on ly , a nd sel ec t OK . The Gro up me mbers scr een i s di sp lay ed. 3 T o add a membe r , at the Grou p members screen, select Opti ons > Add memb e r , and one of the following: ⢠IM con tact to se lect from yo ur list of IM c ontact s. ⢠Ent er us er ID to ent er the exa ct IM us er ID. 4 To remove a member , at t he Group me mbers scree n, scroll t o the cont actâ s name, and select Options > Remove . 5 To remove all group membe rs, at the Grou p membe rs sc reen, se lect Options > Re move all . 6 When you are finish ed desi gnating group m embers, select Back and then Done to ret urn to the group conve rsation view .
1 04 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Send an invitation for a group conversation Members must be onlin e before you c an invite the m to a grou p conversation. 1 From the grou p conversation view, select Op ti on s > Send inv ita tion . 2 Scroll to th e co ntacts whom y ou want to in vite to the group, press t he Scro ll key to ins ert an X int o the box be side the con tact n ame, and s elect OK . 3 Enter an i n vit ation message, and se lect Do ne . The inv itation is sent. 4 To invite other m embers to the group, repeat steps 2â 3. When a member accepts an invitation, a message is displayed in the group co nve rsat ion v iew a nn ounc ing t hat t he memb er ha s joi ned. Acce pt or reje ct in vit ation s to a gr oup c onv ers ation When you rec eive an invi tation to a group, sele ct Accep t , e nter your screen name, and select OK to accept the invita tion. T o re ject the invitation , sele ct Reject . Converse with group members All group me ssages are displayed in the group con versation view. The sender name is displayed in front of each m essa ge. Enter a messag e in the text entry a rea a t the bot tom o f the scre en; th en se lect Options > Sen d , or press the Scro ll key . Y our message is displayed in the group con versation view un der the last message received. If you close the group con versation view whi le the group is still active, you can return t o it. In the IM main menu, select IM gro ups ; then s elec t the n ame of the grou p. Send a priva te message While you are in a group conversation , you can send a pri vate message to one or more m embers of the group. The m essage c annot be seen by other grou p mem ber s wh o ar e no t incl uded in the p riv ate m ess age . 1 From the grou p conversation view, select Optio ns > Send pri vate msg. 2 Select the c ontact to w hom you wan t to send the priva te m essage. 3 Enter the mess age; the n selec t Options > Send , or press the Sc roll ke y .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 05 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) ⢠LOG OUT SERVIC E To close the IM application and log out of the IM service at th e sa me time, press Exi t from the IM main menu. Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you ex it IM . To log out of the IM se rvice but leave the IM application open, go to the IM main menu an d select Options > Lo gout . Y ou c an also exit th e IM a pplication but still stay con necte d to the IM service. Press a nd hold the phone Men u key to bring up a list of open applications, and sel ect Tele phon e to retu rn to the standby mode . This ena bles you to rece ive insta nt me ssages from your con tacts, w hen using your phone for other purpo ses, for example, if you want to send a text me ssage. If yo u are connec ted to your IM ser vice, but you have not u sed the IM a p pl ication for some tim e, you m ay be autom atically disconn ected from the IM service. The next time y ou open t he IM a pplication, you mu st log in again. If you m ake a phone c all, you will be disc onnect ed from the I M service . To return to the IM applicati on, you can either s elect Menu > IM , or y ou c an press and hold th e Menu key again, and sele ct IM from th e list of open applic ations.
1 06 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia 13 W eb (mob ile bro wser) Selec t Menu > Web , or pre ss an d hold the 0 key in t he standby mod e. V ari ous se rvice pr ovid er s ma intain page s spe cific all y desig ned fo r mobi le pho nes, offering service s such as new s, weathe r reports, banking, travel in formation, enter t ainme nt, and games. Wi th the mobi l e b ro wser you c a n vi ew these ser vices as WML, X HTML, or HTML page s. If you ha ve not y et used y our ph one to m ake a WAP conne ctio n, you may need to contact your s ervice provide r for assistan ce with t he first con nection . Check the av ailabi lity of se rvi ces, pric ing, and t ari ffs with you r netw ork ope rator and/or service provider . S ervice providers will also give you instruc tions on how to use their se rvices . ⢠BASIC STEPS FOR WEB ACCES S 1 Save the settings th at are needed to access the browser service that you want to use. See "Browse r service set-u p" on page 1 06. 2 Make a connection to the service. See "Make a connect ion" on page 1 0 7. 3 Start browsing t he web pages. See "Browse" on page 1 08. 4 End the connection to the service. See " End a conne ction" on page 1 1 0. ⢠BROWSER SERVIC E SET-UP Receive settings in a smart message Y ou m ay rece ive serv ice setti ngs in a special t ext mes sage cal led a sm art message from the ne twork o perator or servic e provider th at offers the service. See "Smart messa ge s" on page 57. For more information, contact your n etwork operator or service provi der . Enter setting s manually Follow th e instruc tions given to you by your s ervice provide r . 1 Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Co nn ection > A ccess point s and define th e settings for an ac cess point. See "Con nection" on page 68. 2 Select Menu > Web > Opt ions > Bookmark m anag er > Ad d bookmar k . 3 Write a name for the bookmark and t he address of the browser page defined for the current ac cess point.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 10 7 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Web (mobile bro wser ) ⢠MAKE A CONNECTION Once you have s tore d all th e requ ired c onn ection s ettings , you can acce ss browser pages. There are three diffe rent ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the h omepage ( ) of your servic e provider . ⢠Select a bookmark from the Bookm arks vie w . ⢠Pre ss the ke ys 2 âÂÂ9 to start to write the address of a brow ser service. The Go to field at the bo ttom of the display is imme diately activated, and you can continue to write the addres s ther e. After you have sel ected a page or written the address, press the Sc roll ke y to start downloading the page. ⢠BOOKMARKS Y our device m ay have some preinstalle d bookmarks f o r si tes not af fili ated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access the m, yo u sho ul d ta ke the sam e pr eca utio ns f or se cur ity or cont ent as you wou ld with any si te. In the Bookmark s view , you ca n see bo okmark s pointin g to different k inds of browser pages. When you scroll throug h bookmarks, you can see the address of the hig hlighted bo okmark in the Go t o field at th e bo ttom of the display . Bookmarks are indicated by the following icons: Opt ions in B ookma rks (when a book mark or folder is selected) are Ope n , Downlo ad , Back to pa ge , B ookma rk ma nager , Ma rk/Unmar k, N aviga tion optio ns , Advanced options , Send , Find bo okmark , Details , Settings , Help , an d Ex it . The starting page defined for the browser access point. If you use another browser access poin t for browsing, the st arting page is changed accordingly . The last visited page . When the phone is disconnect ed from the service, th e address of the last v isited pag e is kept in m emory u ntil a new page is visited during the ne xt conne ction. A bookmark sho wing the tit le. An automatic bookmark. See "Add bookmarks aut omatically" on page 1 0 8.
1 08 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Add bookmarks manually 1 In Bookmarks , select Option s > Bookmark m anag er > Add bookm ark . 2 Start to fill in the fields. Only the address must be defined. The default access poin t is ass igned to the bookmark if no othe r one is selected. Press the * ke y to ente r speci al characte rs such as / , . , : , an d @ . Press the Clear key to clea r charac ters. 3 Select Options > Save to save the bookmark. Add bookmarks automatically When you visit a we b page, your browser automatic ally saves a bookmark in the autom atic bookmarks folder ( ), which is located in the list of bookmarks when you ope n th e Web applic ation. Automa tic bookmarks can be renamed and deleted, bu t they cannot be moved. To modify automatic bookmarks set tin gs, se lec t Options > Settings > Automatic bookmarks > On , Hide Folder , or Off . â¢B R O W S E On a browser page, new links appear un derlined in blue and previously v isited links i n purp le. Im ages th at act as lin ks hav e a b lue bord er aro und the m. Options when browsing are Ope n , Op en Wal let , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , Navigati on options , Advanc ed options , Send bo okmark , Find , Details , Setti ngs , Help , and Exi t . K eys and commands used in browsing ⢠To open a link, press the Scrol l ke y . ⢠T o scro ll th e vi ew , us e the Scro ll key . ⢠To e nt er letters and numbers in a field, press the 0 âÂÂ9 keys. Pr ess the * key to ente r specia l cha racters su ch as / , . , : , an d @ . Pr ess t he Clear key to clear ch aracters . ⢠To go to the previous p age while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available , select Op tions > Na vigati on o ptions > Hi story t o view a chronological list of th e pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is c leared eac h time a session is closed. ⢠To check boxes and mak e selections, press the Sc roll key . ⢠To re triev e the latest c ontent from the serv er , select Opti ons > Na vigat ion optio ns > Re load . ⢠To open a sublist of commands or ac tions for the cu rrently open browser page, se lect Opt ions > Ser vice optio ns . ⢠To disc onn ect from a brow ser service and to quit browsing, select Opti ons > A dvance d options > Di scon nect .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 09 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Web (mobile bro wser ) Save bookmarks ⢠To sa v e a bookmark while brow sing, select Options > Save as bookmark . ⢠To sa ve a bookmark received in a smart message, select Menu > Mess aging > In bo x , open the m ess age , and select Options > S a ve to bookmarks . See "Sm art messages" on page 57. View saved pages Opt ions in S aved page s are Ope n , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages mngr . , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Details , Sett ings , Help , and Exi t . If you regularly browse pages containing information th at does not c hange very often, you can sa ve a nd the n b rowse them w hen not logged in. To save a page, while browsing select Optio ns > Adv ance d optio ns > S ave pag e . To open saved pages, sc roll right in th e Bo okmark s view . In th e Sa ved pages v iew , p ress the Sc ro ll key to open a saved page . Saved pages are indicated by the icon. In the Sav ed pag es view you can also crea te folders to store your saved browser pages. Folders containing saved browser pages are indicated by the icon. To start a co nnectio n to the brow ser service and to re trieve the page again, sel ect O ption s > Navi gation opt ions > Reload . The phone stays on line after you reload the page. ⢠DOWNLOAD Y ou can downl oad ite ms such as ring ing tones , i mages, o p era tor logo s, sof tware, and video clips through th e mobile browser . These items may be provided free, or you can purchase them . T o clear the c ache after downloads, see âÂÂClear the cacheâ on page 1 1 1 . Once downloaded , items are handled by the respective applications on your phone (for e xample, a dow nloaded photo w ill be sa ved in Gallery ). Impor tant: O nly install applicatio ns from sourc es that offer adequate protection agains t harmful softw are.
1 10 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Purchase an item To download an item: 1 Scroll to th e link and select Options > Open . 2 Choose the appropriate option to purchase the ite m, for example, Buy . Carefully re ad all th e information provided. If the online content is compatib le, yo u can use your walle t informa tion to make th e purch ase: 1 Select Open wal l et . 2 Enter your w allet code. See "Enter the wallet code" on page 92. 3 Select the appropriate card cate gory from y our wallet. 4 Select Fill in . This up loads the selected w allet inform ation. If the wallet doe s not contai n all informa tion nece ssary fo r the purc hase, y ou will be requ ested to enter t he remaining details manually . The infor ma tion or se rvi ces y ou ac cess are sto red in th e cach e. To empty th e cach e, s ee âÂÂCl ear th e cacheâ on p age 1 1 1. Copyright protections may prevent some images, rin ging tones , and o ther content from being cop ied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Check an item before downloading Y ou can see de tails about an item be fore you download it. Details abou t an item may inc lude the price, a brie f description, and si ze. 1 Scroll to th e link and select Option s > Open . Details about the item are displa yed on your ph one. 2 If you w ant to continu e with the downloading, press Acc ept , or if you wa nt to ca ncel th e do wnload , press Cancel . ⢠END A CO NNE CTIO N Select Opti ons > Ad vance d optio ns > D isco nnect , or press and hold the End k ey to quit b rowsing and re turn to th e standby mode.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 1 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Web (mobile bro wser ) ⢠CLE AR THE CACHE A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporaril y . The information or services y ou access are store d in th e cache me mory of the phone . If you have tr ied to ac cess or ha ve ac cessed co nfi d e ntial i nformation requirin g passwords, em pty the cac he after ea ch use . To em pty the ca che, select Opt ions > Navigatio n options > Clear cac he . ⢠BROWSER SETTINGS Fr om th e Book marks screen , select Options > Settings and on e of the foll owin g: Defau l t acc ess poin t â To change the default access point, pre ss the Sc ro ll ke y to open a list of available access points. The current defa ult access point is hi ghl ight ed. See "Connection " on page 68. Show ima ges âÂÂC hoose if y ou want to view pictures when you are browsing. If you cho ose No , you can la t er load images during browsing by se lecting Option s > Show image s . Font size âÂÂY ou can choose 5 tex t sizes in the brow ser: Lar gest , Large , Norm al , Sma ll , and Sm all est . Def aul t enc od ing âÂÂCho ose a language setting to make sure your browser pages di spla y tex t cha ract ers co rre ctl y . Automatic bookmar ks âÂÂS ele ct On , Hide F older , or Off . When you select H ide Folder , book marks are s till automatica lly added to the Aut omatic bo okmar ks folder . See "Add bookmarks autom atically" on page 108. Scr een size âÂÂSe lect N orma l scre en , S ele ct. ke ys onl y , o r Fu ll sc reen to change how th e browser w in dow i s displayed in your ph one screen. Render ing âÂÂSe lect By q uality or By speed to determine how w e b page s are loa ded. Cook ies âÂÂSel ect A llo w or Reject . Y ou c an enable or disable the receiving and sending of c ookies (a means of content prov iders to identify users and their preference s for fre quently used cont ent). Sec urit y warn ings âÂÂC hoose to Hide or Show se curity warnings. Co nfir m touch tone s âÂÂSelect Al way s or Fir st sen ding only . C hoos e wh eth er you want to confirm be fore the phone sends DTMF tones during a voice call. For example, you can make a voice call while you are viewing a browser page, send DTMF ton es wh ile a voic e ca ll is in progre ss, a nd save a na me an d phon e num ber in Cont acts f rom a browse r p age. See " Opt ions duri ng a call " o n pag e 28 . Wal l et â Choose On if you want the wa llet to op en automat ically when a compatible browser page is opened.
1 12 Copy right é 2005 N okia 14 Con nectivity ⢠BLUE TOOTH CONNEC TION Select Menu > Conn ect . > Blu etoo th . There may be res trictions on us in g Bluetooth dev ices in some location s. Check w ith your lo cal auth orities or service provide r . Blu eto oth tec hno logy en abl es w ire less co nne cti ons between e lectronic devices wi thin a max imum range of 30 feet (1 0 meters). A Bluetooth connection can be u sed to send images, videos, texts, business cards, and calenda r note s, or it ca n be used t o connect wirelessly to com patible devices supporting the same Bluetooth protoc ols, such as com puters. Since devi ces using Bluetooth te chnology communicate using radio waves, your phon e and the oth er devices d o not ne ed to be in d irect line-of-sight. Th e two devices only need to be wi thin a maxi m um of 3 0 fe et (1 0 meter s) o f each other , althou gh the connection can be subject to interferenc e from obstru ctions such as w alls or from othe r electronic dev ices. When y ou activa te a Blue tooth conne ction for the first time, you are a sked to give a nam e to your ph one. Bluetooth device compatibility This phone is designed to be com p liant with and to adopt Blue tooth Specification 1.1. Howev er , in teroperability betwee n the phone and othe r products with Blu etooth wirele ss technology depends also on the profiles and protocols used. To ensure inte roperability between other devic es supporting Bluetooth tech nology , use Nokia approved enhance ments for this phone. Check with th e manufactu rers of oth er devices to de termine th eir compatibilit y with this device. The Nokia 66 7 0 phone supports the following profiles: ⢠Dial-up networ king profile as a gateway ⢠Object push profi le as a client and server ⢠File trans fer profile a s a server ⢠Hands-free profile as an audio gateway ⢠Generic o bject exchange profile ⢠Gene ric ac cess p rofile
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 13 Copy right é 2005 N okia Conn ectivity ⢠Serial port profile w ith the PC connectiv ity software For more informatio n on the com patibility between B luetooth devices, c onsult their m anufacturers. Bluetooth connection settings ⢠Bluetooth âÂÂSe lect On if you w ant t o use a Blue tooth conn ection. If you sel ect Off , all active Bluetooth connections are ended, and Bluetooth connection cannot be use d for sending or receiv ing data. ⢠My ph one's vis ibilit y âÂÂIf you s elect Show n to all , your phon e can be found by o th er de vices du ring d evic e sear ch. If you sele ct Hidden , y our phone cannot be found by othe r devices. ⢠My phon eâ s nam e âÂÂD efine a name for your ph one. Afte r you h ave set your Bluet ooth conn ecti on as ac tive and ch ange d My phone's visi bili ty to All , your phone and this name can be seen by othe r devices. Send data by Bl ue tooth connection Y our ph one can only have one ac tive Bluetooth connection at a time. 1 Op en an app licat ion wher e the i tem you wi sh to s end is s tored. For example , to send a photo to another device, open the Galle ry application. 2 Scroll to th e i tem you want to send, a nd sel ect O ption s > Send > Via Blu etoot h . The phone starts to searc h for devices w ith in ra nge . Dev ices us ing Bl uet oot h techn ology tha t are w ithin range start to appear on the display one by one. Y ou can see a d evice i con, th e devi ce name, the device type, or a short nam e. P aire d devi ces a re sho wn with . A p aired device is one where a Bluetooth conn ection already exists between your phon e and th e other device. To interrupt the search , press Stop . Th e devic e list freez es an d you ca n star t to form a connection to one of the de vices alre ady fou nd. When searching for de vices, s ome devices may show only th e unique de vice addresses. To find out the uniqu e address of your phone, ente r the code *#2820# in the standby mode. If you ha ve sear ched for de vices e arli er , a li st of the de vic es tha t wer e found previ ously is shown first. To start a new search , select Mo re devi ces . If you switch off the phone , the list of d evices is cleared and the device search needs to be st arted again before se nding data.
1 14 Copy right é 2005 N okia 3 Scroll to th e d evice wit h whic h yo u want t o con nect an d press Sele ct . Th e it em you a re se nding is co pied to Out box and th e note Conne cting is shown. 4P a i r i n g (if not require d by th e other device, go to step 5 .) ⢠If the oth er device require s pairing before data can be transmitte d, a tone sounds an d you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 ch aracters long, numeric) and agree with the ow ner of the other d ev ice to use the same code. This passcode is used only once and you do not have t o memorize it. D evices that do not have a user interface have a preset passcode. See "P aired devices view" on page 1 14. ⢠After pairing, th e device is sav ed to the Paired de vice s vie w . 5 When the co nnection has been succes sfully establis hed, Sen ding data is show n. Copyright protections may prevent some images, rin ging tones , and o ther content from being cop ied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Data received by Bluetooth connection c an be fou nd in the Inbo x folder in Messag ing . See "InboxâÂÂreceive messages" on page 57. Icons for different de vices are âÂÂC omputer , âÂÂPhone, âÂÂAudio/video, and âÂÂBlueto oth device If sending fails, th e messag e or data w ill be deleted. The Draft s folder in Messag ing does not store messages sent by Blue tooth connection. Check Bluetooth connection statu s When is shown in the standby m ode, Bluetooth connection is active. When is blinki ng, you r phon e is t rying to co nnect to th e othe r device . When is sh own con tinuo usly , th e Blu etooth co nnecti on is act ive. P aired devices view P airin g with a device mak e s device searches easier a n d quicker . P aired devices a r e e a s i e r t o r e c o g n i z e ; t h e y a r e i n d i c a t e d b y i n t h e s e a r c h r e s u l t l i s t . I n t h e Bluetooth connection m ain view , scroll right to ope n a list of paired devices ( ). ⢠To pai r with a de vice , se lec t Opt ion s > New pa ir ed de vic e . T he phon e start s a devi ce searc h. Scr oll to the devi ce with whic h you wa nt to pai r and p r ess Select . After yo u exchange passcod es, the device is added to the paired devi ces list. ⢠To c ancel pairing, scroll to the de vice whose pairing you wan t to cancel and press the Clear key o r sel ect Options > Delete . If y ou want to canc el all pairings, select Opti ons > Delete all .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 15 Copy right é 2005 N okia Conn ectivity Note: If you are currentl y co nnected to a device a nd yo u dele te the pairing with that device, the pairing is removed and th e device connec tion is terminate d, but the Bluetooth conn ection rem ains ac tive o n you r phon e. ⢠To set a device to be authorize d or u nauthorized, scroll t o the device, select Options , and th en select one of the follo wing: Set as author ized â C onnections be tween yo ur phone an d this device can be ma de with out y our kn owled ge. No sep arate accep tance or au tho rizati on is needed. Use this status for your own devices, for example, your PC, or devices that belong to some one you trust. T he icon is added ne x t to authorized devices in the P aired devi ces view . Set as un au thorized âÂÂConnectio n re quests from this dev ice ne ed to be accepted separately every time . ⢠T o assi gn a short na m e to a devic e , se lect Opti ons > As sign short n ame . Enter a nam e for the de vice. Receive data by Bluetooth connec tion When you receive data by Bluetooth connectio n, a tone is played, and y ou are asked if you wan t to accep t the mess age. If yo u a ccept, the i tem is pla ced in the In box folde r in Messa gin g . Messages received by B luetooth conn ection are indicated by . See " InboxâÂÂreceive messages" on page 57 . Close the Bluetooth connection A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automati cally after sending or receiving dat a. ⢠USB CONNECTION Y ou can use the Conn ectivity Cable DKU-2 to con nect yo ur Nokia 66 7 0 phon e to the U SB p ort on your co mpute r . Before usin g the c onnectiv ity cable, you must install th e cable driver prior t o PC Suite installation. Carefully follow the in st all ati on in str uct ion s given in t he PC Suite u ser guide an d the DKU -2 (USB) installation guide on the C D -ROM supplied with the phone. Ma king or an swer ing ph one cal ls duri ng a com put er con nect ion is no t re comme nded because it m ight d isrupt the operation . ⢠CON NEC TION MAN AGER Select Menu > Conn ect. > Con n. mg r . .
1 16 Copy right é 2005 N okia In Co nnect ion mana ger you ca n iden tif y the status of multiple data connect ions, view details on the amoun t of data sent and received, and end un used c onn ections . Y ou c an view details of data conne ctions only . V oice c alls are not lis ted. Whe n y ou o pen Conne ction m anag er , you can see t he fol lowin g: ⢠Open d at a conn ectio ns: Da ta ca ll GP RS ⢠The st atus of each connec tion ⢠Amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each c onnection (GPRS connection s only) ⢠The durati on of each con nection (data c all conne ctions only) Note: The actu al time in voiced by your s ervice prov ider may v ary , depending on netwo rk features, rou nding off for billin g, and so forth . Opt ions in Con nection manag er w hen the re are one or mo re conn ec tions are Details , Disc onnect , Disconn ect all , Help , an d Exit . View connection details To view the de tails of a con nection , scroll to a c onnectio n and selec t Options > Deta ils . The following information is displaye d: Name âÂÂTh e name of the Interne t ac cess p oin t (IAP) in u se Bearer âÂÂThe type of data c onnection: Da ta ca ll or GPRS Sta tus âÂÂThe cu rrent status of the connec tion Recei ved âÂÂThe amou nt of data, i n bytes, received to th e phone Sen t âÂÂThe am ount of data, in by tes, sent from the ph one Dura tio n âÂÂThe le ngth of tim e that the connection has been open Sp eed âÂÂTh e current spee d of both sending and receiving data in kB/s Dia l-up (G SM) o r Nam e (GPRS)âÂÂThe GS M dial-up number used or the n ame of th e GPRS acc ess poin t used Sha red âÂÂTh e number of applic ations using th e same c onnecti on. This option is not display ed if the conne ction is not sha red. End connections Scroll to a connection and select Op tions > Di scon nec t to end that con nection only , or se lect Options > Disconnect all to clo se all cur r e ntly open connec tions.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 17 Copy right é 2005 N okia Conn ectivity ⢠CONNECT YOUR PHONE TO A COMPUTER For furthe r information on how to m ake a connectio n to a compatible c omputer by USB or Bluetoot h connection and how to in stall PC Suite, see the PC Suite user guide on the C D-ROM s upplied with the pho ne. For further information on how to use Nok ia PC Suite, s ee the h elp function on PC Suite or visit the support pages at www .no kia.ca . ⢠USE THE CD-ROM The CD -ROM should l aunch its elf after you ha ve inse rted it in to the CD -ROM drive of your c ompatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: 1 Cli ck the Wind ow s Start bu tton a nd sele ct Prog rams > Windows Expl orer . 2 On the CD- ROM drive, loc ate a file called PC Suit e_us .ex e and double-click it. The CD-R OM interface ope ns. 3 Locate PC Su ite in the Inst all So ftwa re se cti on. 4 Double-c lick the Nokia PC Suite file . The installat ion wizard wil l guide you through the ins tallation process . ⢠SYN C HRO NIZA T ION Select Menu > Conn ect. > Sync . The Sync application enab les you to synchronize your c alendar , contacts, and notes with various calendar , address book, and notes application s on a c ompatible c omputer or on the Inte rnet. Remote synchronization takes place over a We b or Bl uetoot h con nection that you ca n initiate from you r phone. Loc al synch ronization ta kes place by a da ta cable conne ction to your PC. The sync hronizat ion applica tion uses Sy ncM L technolo gy for sy nchroniza tion. For informa tion on SyncML comp atibility , c ontact th e supplier of the calendar , address book, or notes ap plication with which y ou want t o synchroniz e your phone data. Create a new synchronization profile Op tion s in th e Sy nc m ain v iew a re Synchronize , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Del ete , Help , and Exit . 1 Select Opti o n s > N ew sync p rofil e . 2 Choose whether y ou want to use the de fault settin g values or c opy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 3 Define the following: Syn c profile name âÂÂWrite a de scriptive name for the profil e. Data bearer âÂÂS elect Web or Bl uetoot h as your synchronization method.
1 18 Copy right é 2005 N okia Acces s poi nt âÂÂSelec t the ac cess poi nt you want to us e for the dat a connection. This option is only available if you choose Web in the Dat a bearer settin g. Host address âÂÂContac t your s ervice provid er or system adminis trator for th e corre ct va lues. Po r t â Contact you r service provider or system administrator for the c orrect values . This option is only a vailable if y ou choose We b in the Dat a bearer settin g. Use r name âÂÂY our u ser ID for the sy nchronization server . Contac t your service provider or syste m administrator for your corre ct ID. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂW rite your password. Contact your service provider or sy stem administrator for the correct v alue. 4 Scroll right a nd sele ct wh ich applica tions you w ould like to synch ronize: Contacts âÂÂS ele ct Ye s if y ou want to syn chronize your cont acts. Calendar âÂÂSel ect Ye s if you wa nt to s ync hron ize your cale ndar . Notes âÂÂS elect Ye s i f y ou wa nt to syn chro niz e your note s. When y ou sele ct Ye s t o synch ronize each of these a pplications , you must al so spe cif y : ⢠Re mote da ta bas e âÂÂEnter the c orrect path t o the server for t he remote address book (to sync w ith Contacts ), th e rem ot e ca len dar (t o syn c with Calendar ), or the rem ote notes a pplication (to sync with No tes ). ⢠Sync hroni zati o n typ e âÂÂSe lec t Norma l , To s er ver on ly , or To phone only . 5 Press Do ne to sa ve the se ttings. Synchronize data In the Sy nc main view , you can see the different profiles, and what kind of data will be sy nchronized: Cal en dar , Con tacts , Note s , or all thre e. 1 In the main view , scroll to a profile and select Opti ons > S ynchron ize . The status of the synchronization is shown at the bottom of th e screen. To cancel synchroniza tion be fore it is finished, press Cancel . Y ou ar e notified w hen the sync hronization h as bee n completed. 2 Afte r sy nch roniz atio n i s co mp lete, pr ess Vi ew log , or select Options > View log to op en a log file s how ing the sync hr oniza tion statu s ( Com plet e or Incomp lete ) and how many calendar , contact, and no tes e n tries have been adde d, upda ted, de lete d, or discar ded (n ot sy nchron ized) in t he pho ne or o n the server .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 19 Copy right é 2005 N okia T r oubleshooting 15 T ro ublesho oting ⢠SI M C ARD A SIM (subs cribe r ide ntity m odule) c ard is requ ired for your Nok ia GSM pho ne to oper ate. The SIM card is sup plie d by your service pro vider an d has you r mobile phon e numb er a nd all s ubsc ribe r acco un t info rmat ion pro gra mme d on it. Y ou c an save con tact informa tion from your co ntacts list on the SIM card s o th at when y ou us e the SI M card i n anot her GSM phone or terminal, your phone nu mber a nd con tact s wi ll b e av ail able to you on the SIM c ard rat her th an st ore d in phone memory . Note that you c an only save nam es and phone nu mbers on the SIM card. The SIM card in the Nok ia 667 0 phon e is loc ated under th e ba ttery in the top left corner . The SIM card must be inserted under the hood and the gold-colored con tacts on t he ca rd must make direct c ontac t with t he g old-colore d contact s in the card slot. Se e âÂÂInsert the SIM c ardâ on page 16. â¢M E M O R Y L O W When one of th e followi ng no tes is s h ow n, the phone memory is low and you must delete some data: ⢠Not eno ugh me mor y to perfor m oper ation . ⢠Del ete some da ta firs t . ⢠Me mory low . Del ete so me dat a . T o view what kind of data y ou have and how mu ch memory the differen t data groups consume, select Menu > Tools > File mngr . > Options > M emory details . Y ou ma y want to delete th e following ite m s regularly to a v oid memor y getting low: ⢠Message s from the Inbo x , Drafts , and Se nt folders in Mes sagin g . ⢠Retrieve d e-mail messages from the ph one memory . ⢠Saved browser pages. ⢠Images , video clips, and soun d clips in Galle ry . If yo u wa nt to de le te co ntac t in form ati on, c al end ar no tes , ca ll tim ers, cal l cos t timer s, game sc ores, or any other da ta, go to the respe ctive ap plica tion to rem ove the da ta. If you a re deletin g multiple items a nd one of th e low mem ory n otes is shown again, try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item).
120 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠DIFFERENT WAYS TO ST O RE DATA ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to m ake a backup c opy of all data to your computer . See "Conne ct your phone to a com puter" on page 1 17. ⢠Se nd images t o your e- mai l addre ss and the n sa ve the im ages to you r com puter . ⢠Send data by Blue tooth conn ection to a c ompatible devic e. ⢠Store data on a compatible me mory card. ⢠PHONE DISPLAY If missing, discolored, or bright dot s a ppear on the screen when you turn on your phone, this is a charact e ristic of this type of display . Some displays may contain pixel s or dots that rem ain on or off. This is n ormal, not a fault. ⢠BLUE TOOTH CONNEC TION If you ca nnot end a Blue toot h con necti on, che ck to see if an othe r devic e is pairin g with (connec te d to) you r phone but not sendi ng data . If so, you c an dis conne ct it by dea ctivat ing the B lue tooth li nk alto gethe r . Selec t Me nu > Connect. > Bluetooth , and select Blue toot h > Off . If you c annot find a de vice using Blu etooth technology , check the followin g: ⢠Both de vices h ave activ ated the ir Bluetooth connec tions. ⢠The distance betw een the two devices is not over 30 fe et (1 0 meters) or that the re are no walls or other obstruc tions between t he devices. ⢠The other device is not in Hidden mode. ⢠Both de vices a re com patib le. ⢠MULT IME DIA MESSAGING If the phone can not receiv e a multi media me ssage beca use mem ory is full, check the am ount of memory in use (see âÂÂMe m ory low â on page 1 19). If th e no te s Retrieving message or Tryi ng to retrieve message again are sh own briefly , y our phone is trying t o retrieve a multimedia messa ge from the multimedia messagi ng center . T o stop t he notes fr o m d i spl a ying, you need to end the da ta conn ection b ec a use t he phone i s attemp ting to star t the conn ection ag ai n and aga in. Al so, tr y the followi ng so luti ons : Check that th e settings for multim edia messag ing have been defined corre ctly and that th ere are no m istakes in phone n umbers or addresses. Se l ect Men u > Mess aging > Opti ons > S ett ings > Mu ltim edia mess age . To stop th e pho ne from makin g a data conne ction, you ha ve th e follo wing options. Select Me nu > M essa ging > Option s > Se ttings > Mult ime dia message , and th en:
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 12 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia T r oubleshooting ⢠Select On r ece ivin g ms g. > De fer re triev al if yo u want the mu ltimedia messaging ce nter to save the message to be retrieved later , for example , after you have checke d the se ttings. Afte r this c hange, the phone still needs to send information not es to the ne twork. Wh en you w ant to re trie ve th e mes sage, sele ct Retr . imme diate ly . ⢠Se le ct On receiving msg. > Reject message if yo u wa nt to reject a ll inco ming multime dia mess a ges . After thi s change, the phone nee d s to send i nformation notes to th e network and the m ultim edia messagin g center will delet e all multime dia mes sages that are w aiting to be sent to you. ⢠Select Mult imedia recept ion > Off if you w ant to ignore all in coming multime dia mes sages. After th is chan ge the phone will not m ake any netw ork connectio ns relate d to mu ltimedia messagin g. ⢠MESSAGING If you are composing a m essage and you cannot select a con tact from the contacts directory , the contact card does not hav e a phone number or an e- mail address. Add the m issing informatio n to the con tact card in Contacts . ⢠BROWSER SERVIC ES If you r ece ive t he me ssage N o valid acc ess point defined. De fine on e in Web setti ngs , you need to insert the prope r browser settings. Contact your service provider for i nstructions . â¢L O G If the log appear em pty , you may have activate d a filter , and no c ommunic ation events fittin g that filte r have been logged. To see all events in Logs , se le ct Option s > Filte r > All com muni cation . ⢠PC CON N ECTI V ITY If you have problems conn ecting the phone to a PC, m ake sure that Nok ia PC Suite is installed and ru nning on the PC. See the PC Sui te user gu ide on th e CD-ROM pro vided wit h the p h on e. For f urther info rmati on on how to us e PC Su ite, see t he help fun ction of PC Suite , or visit the support page s at w ww .n okia.ca . ⢠APPLICATION N OT RESPONDING If you need to c lose an applicati on that is not responding, ope n the application switching window by pressing and holding the Menu key . Then scroll to the application, and press th e Cl ear key to close the a pplication.
122 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 16 Referen ce information ⢠BATTERY INFORMATION Charging and dischar ging Y our device is powered by a rechargeable batte ry . The full pe rformance of a n ew battery is achieved only after tw o or three comple te charge and discharge cycles. The batte ry can be charged and dis charged hundre ds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the t a lk and standby times are noti c eably s h orter than normal, buy a new battery . U se only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your b attery only with Nok ia approved chargers designated for th is device. Unplug th e charger from the electrical plug an d the device whe n not in use. Do not lea ve the batte ry conne cted to a ch arger , s ince ov ercharging may shorten its lifetime . If left unus ed, a fully cha rged batte ry wil l lose its charge over time. Use the batte ry only for its intended pu rpose. Never use any charger or battery that is da maged. Do not short-circ uit the battery . Acciden tal short-circ uiting can occ ur when a metallic object suc h as a coin, clip, or pen causes dire ct con nection of the positive ( ) and ne gative (-) te rminals of the batte ry . (The se look like m etal strips on the battery . ) This m ight happen, for example, when you carry a s pare battery in your pocket or purse. Sho rt-circuiting the termin als may damage the battery or the con necting object. Leaving the battery in hot or col d places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, wil l reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery and its ability to charge. Alwa ys try to keep the batt ery between 5 9ðF and 7 7ðF (15ðC and 25ðC ). A de vice with a hot or cold batt ery may not w ork tempo rarily , e ven when the bat tery is full y charged. B attery performance is partic ularly limit ed in temper atures well be low freezing. Do not dispose o f batteries in a fire, a s th ey may ex plod e. Batt erie s may al so explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local re gulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Al wa ys us e ori gin al N okia bat terie s for your saf ety . T o chec k that you ar e getting an ori ginal Nokia batt ery , purcha se it from an aut h orize d Nokia de aler , look for the Nok ia Original Enhance men ts logo on th e packaging, and inspect the hol ogram label us ing the following steps.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 123 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rma tio n Successful comple tion of the four steps is not a tota l ass urance of the aut hen ticity of th e bat tery. If you ha ve an y rea son to be lieve that your b attery is not a n authent ic origina l Nokia batte ry, yo u should refrain from using it and ta ke it to the nearest au thorized Nokia service point or dealer for assis tan ce. Your authorized Nokia s ervice poin t or d ealer wi ll inspe ct the ba ttery for authentic ity. If aut henticity c annot be ve rified, return the ba ttery to th e place of purc hase. AUTHENTI CATE HOLOGRAM 1 Wh en looking at the hologram label, you should see the Nokia con necting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia O riginal Enhancem ents logo when looking from anoth er angle. 2 Wh en you angle th e ho logram. to t he left , right, down, and u p sides of th e logo, you should see 1, 2, 3 , and 4 d ots on each side res pective ly . 3 Scratch t he side of the label to reveal a 20 -digit code, for e xample, 12345 6789 1 987654 32 1 0. T urn the ba ttery so that th e numbers are f acing up wa rd s. The 20 -digit code read s starting from the number a t the to p row follow ed by the bottom row . 4 Confirm that the 20 -digit code is valid by ve rifying it at the Nokia we bsite. Go to www .no kia. com /bat teryc hec k . WHAT IF Y OUR BA TTERY IS NO T AUTHENTIC? If you c annot confirm th at you r Nokia b a ttery with t he hologram label is an authent ic Nok ia batte ry , ple ase do not use th e battery . T a ke it t o the n earest authorize d Nokia s e rvice poi nt or deale r for assist anc e. T he use of a batt ery that is not approved by the manufac turer may be dangerou s and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its e nhancements. It may also invalid ate an y app roval or wa rranty applying to th e d evice. To find out more about original Nokia batteries v isit www .nokia.com/battery .
124 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia â¢E N H A N C E M E N T S A fe w p racti cal rule s abo ut a cces sor ies an d en hanc em ents: ⢠K eep all acce ssories and enhance ments out of the reach of small ch ildren. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhan cement, grasp and pul l the plug, not t he cord. ⢠Chec k re gular ly th at enha ncem en ts i nsta lled in a veh icle are m ount ed and are operating prope rly . ⢠Installation of any c omplex car enh ancements must be made by qualifie d personnel only . ⢠ENHANCE MENT S , BATT ERIES , AND CHARGERS For ava ilability of a pproved enha ncemen ts, check with your dea ler . Battery The 90 0 mAh, Li-Ion based BL-5 C battery provides po wer in a thin and lig ht package. V a riation in operation times wi ll occ ur depending on the charger used , the S IM card , network and usage sett i ngs, usag e style, and en vi ro nm ents. See "Technical in formation" on page 13 1. Th is de vice is in ten ded for use wh en supplied w ith power from ACP-12U. See also âÂÂInse rt the batteryâ on page 18 and âÂÂCharge th e batteryâ on page 18 .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 125 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rma tio n Other compatible Nokia enhancements Phone adapter HDA-1 0 accessibility enhancement The HDA-10 phone adapter i s a Nok ia enha ncement that all ows you to conne ct your mobile phon e to a T elecommu nicati ons Device for the Deaf (TT Y/ TDD) to make a cal l in digital mode. If you are using a phone adapter , you must activate it on y our mobile phone by selecting Me nu > S ettin gs > En han cement > Enh ancemen t in us e > TTY . Headset audio ⢠Wireless headsets ( H DW-3 with Blu etooth, HS-21W Wireles s Clip-on Headse t and HS-1 1W Ba se W ir ele ss Hea dse t) ⢠Wireless boom headse t (wit h Bluetooth ) (HS-4W ) ⢠Boom headset (HDB-4) ⢠Stan dard hea d set (HS-5) ⢠Phone adapter (HDA-1 0) (See âÂÂPhone adapte r HDA-1 0 a ccessibility enhanc em entâ on page 125. ) Po w e r ⢠Charge r (ACP-12U ) ⢠Compact Travel C harger ( AC-1U) Data ⢠Co nnec tivity cable (DK U-2) ⢠RS-MMC (64 MB and 128 MB) Car ⢠Adva nced in stallation car kit (CK- 7W) ⢠Mobile c harger (LCH-12) Ima ging ⢠Came ra flash (PD-2) Messagin g ⢠Di gital pen (SU-1 B) Cover/carryin g ⢠Xpress -on⢠cove rs and sty le packs ⢠Wri s t stra p
126 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia In ad dition to the Nokia 66 7 0 phone, y ou will n eed the foll owing for TTY/TDD commun ication : ⢠A TTY/TD D device that is cellu lar ready or cellula r compatible ⢠A cable for conne cting the TTY/TD D to your phon e, usually supplie d by the manu facturer of t he TTY/TDD device ⢠The phon e adapter (HDA-10), which can be purchased separate ly as an enha ncem ent. For more information, see âÂÂAccessibility s olutionsâ on page 15. ⢠CARE A ND MAINTENANCE Y our de vice is a prod uct of sup erior de sign and cr aftsma nship and should be tre ate d with ca r e . The suggestions belo w will help you prote ct your warrant y covera ge and enjoy your d evic e for many yea rs. ⢠K eep the device dry . Precipitation, humidity , and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the batte r y and allow the device to dry comple tely before replac ing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do n o t stor e the dev i ce in hot a reas. Hi gh tempe ratur es can shor ten the li fe of elect ronic device s, damage batteri es, and warp or me lt certa in plast ics. ⢠Do not s tore th e dev ice in cold are as. Whe n the device return s to its n ormal temperat ure, moisture can form inside th e device and dam age electron ic circuit bo ards. ⢠Do not a ttempt to open the device other than as in structed in thi s guide. ⢠Do not drop, knoc k, or shake the device. Rough h andling can bre ak internal circuit bo ards and fine me chanics . ⢠Do not us e hars h che micals, cle aning solven ts, or st rong dete rgents to clea n the device . ⢠Do not paint the devic e. P a int can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, cl ean, dry cloth to cle an any lenses (such as camera , proxim ity sensor , and light sensor lens es). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attac h ments co uld damage the device and may violate re gulations governing radio devices. All of the above sugge stions apply equally to your device, b attery , ch arger , or any enhanc ement. I f any device i s not wo r kin g p roper l y , tak e it to the ne arest aut horiz ed serv ice facility for service .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 127 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rmati on ⢠ADDIT IONAL SAFETY INFORMATION Operating environment Rememb er to follow any speci al regula tions in force in an y area a nd always switch off your dev ice w hen its use is prohibi ted or when it ma y caus e interference or danger . Use the device only in its normal ope rating positions. This de vice mee ts RF ex posu re guid eline s when us ed eith er in the no rmal use position aga inst the ear or w hen position ed at least 7 /8 inch ( 2.2 cm) a way from the body . When a carry case, belt clip, or holde r is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain m etal and should position the device at le ast 7/8 inch (2 .2 cm) aw ay from your body . P arts of the de vic e are magn etic. Metallic materia ls may be attracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not ho ld the device to t he ear with th e hearin g aid. Alw ays secu re the dev ice in its holder , because metallic materials may be attracte d by the earpiece. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storag e media near the device , because information store d on them may b e eras ed. Y our dev ice a n d i ts enha ncem ents ma y contai n small p a rts. K eep t hem out o f reach of sma ll chil dren. Medical dev ices Operation of any radio transmitting e q uipment, including wireless phon es, may interfere w ith the func tionality of in adequately prote cted medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the me dical device t o determ ine if the y are adequatel y shielded fro m external RF ener gy or if you hav e a ny q uestions. S witch off your phon e in h ealth care faciliti es when any regulations posted in these areas i nstruct you to do so. Hospital s or heal t h ca re faciliti es may be usin g equipme nt tha t could b e sens itive to externa l RF ene rgy . P ACEMAKERS P ace ma ker man ufa ctur ers r ecom m e nd th at a mini mum sepa rat ion of 6 i nche s (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avo id potential in terfere nce w ith the pacema ker . Th ese recomme ndati ons are consistent with the inde pendent research by and re commendations of Wireless Te c hnology Res earch. T o minimize th e potential for interferenc e, p ersons with pace make rs should : ⢠Always keep the device more t han 6 inc hes (15.3 cm ) from their pace maker w hen th e device is sw itche d on ⢠Not c arry th e devi ce in a br east po cke t ⢠Hold the de vice to th e ear opposite th e pacemaker If you h ave any re ason to su spect that interferenc e is taking p lace, s witch off you r device im mediat ely .
128 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia HE ARI N G AID Some digital wire less devices may inte rfere with som e hearing aids. If interference occurs , c onsult your servic e provider . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affec t improperly ins talled or in adequately shielded ele ctronic s yste ms in m otor vehic les such a s elec tronic fuel inj ection s ystems, electr onic anti skid (antiloc k) braking syst ems, el ectronic speed control system s, air bag sy stems. Fo r more in forma tion , check wit h the manuf act ure r or its repr esent ative of your vehic le or any equ ipment that h as been adde d. Only qu alified personn el should s ervice th e device, or install th e device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or servi ce may be dangerous and may invalidate any warrant y that may a pply to the d evic e. Chec k re gularly that all wirele ss device equipment in your v ehicle is mounte d and operating properly . Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or e x plosive materials in the sa me compartme nt as the device, its part s, or enhancements. For vehic les equipped w ith an air bag, remember that an air bags inflate with great force. Do n ot place objects, including in st all ed or po rtabl e wireless equipme nt in th e area over the ai r bag or in the air ba g d eplo y ment ar ea. If in -ve hicle wirele ss e quipm en t is impr oper ly ins talle d and the a i r bag inflate s, se rious injury c ould result. P otentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all si gns and instructions. P ote ntially explosive atm ospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off you r vehicle engine. Sparks in such a reas could caus e an explosion or fire re sulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuellin g poin ts such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of ra d io equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution are as, chemical pla nts or where blasting ope rations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. The y include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage fac ilities, vehicle s using liqu efied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas wh ere the ai r contains c hemicals or particles such as grai n, dust or met al powders. FCC regulations prohibit using your wireless device w hile in t he air . The use of wireless te lephones in an aircraft ma y be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, dis rupt the wireless t elephone n etwork, a nd may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may le ad to susp ension or d enial of telephone services to the offender , leg al action, or both.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 129 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rmati on ⢠EMERGE NCY CAL LS Impor tant : Wireless phones, including this phon e, operate using radio signals, wireless netw orks, landline ne tworks, and user-programm ed functions . Beca use of this, conn ections in all c onditions cannot be guarante ed. Y ou should ne ver rely so lely on a ny wireless phone for essentia l commu nications like medica l em ergencies . To mak e an emer genc y c all: 1 If the phone is not on, sw itch it on . Ch eck for adequate signal strength . Some netw orks may re quire that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the pho ne. 2 Press t h e End ke y as m any t imes a s neede d t o cle ar th e disp lay a n d r eady the pho ne for calls. 3 K ey in the off icial emerge ncy numb er for you r pr esent l ocat ion. Emergen cy numbers v ary by locatio n. 4 Press t he Call key . If cert a in f eatures are in use, you may first need to turn those featu res off before you ca n make an eme rgency call. Cons ult this guide or your serv ice provider . When making an emergen cy call, give all the n ecessary infor mation as accurately as possible. Y ou r wireless phone may be the only m eans of communic ation at the scene of an accident. D o not end the call unt il given perm ission to do so.
130 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Certificati on inform ation (S AR) THE NOKIA 667 0 DEVICE MEETS GUID ELINES FOR EXPO SURE TO RADIO W AVES. Y our m obile de vice i s a radio transmit ter and re ceiv er . It is desig ned and ma nuf ac tur e d no t to exceed the limits for exposure to r adio freque ncy (RF) energ y recommended by inte rnational guide lines (ICNIRP). The s e limits e s tablis h permitted level s of RF energy for t he gener al populat ion. The guidelines ar e based on standa rds th at w ere deve loped by indep end ent sc ienti fic organ ization s thr ough period ic and thorough eval uation of scient ific studies. The standards and guide lines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure t he safety of the publi c, reg ar dle s s o f a ge an d he a lth an d t o ac cou nt fo r any va ri at ion s i n me asur e me nt s. The expo sure guidel i nes f o r mobil e devices employ a u n it o f measurement kn o wn as the Specific Ab s o rption Rate or SAR. The SAR li m it stated in the internati o nal guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams o f tissue. Tests for SAR are condu cted using standar d operati ng posi tion s with the dev ice tra nsmit ting at its high est cer tifie d power le vel i n all test ed fr equenc y bands. The actu al SAR lev el of an operat ing de vice can be well be low th e maximu m valu e because the device is desig n ed to use only the power r equired to reach the netw ork. Th at amoun t changes dep end ing on a n umber of facto rs such as how close you are to a network base station. The high est SAR value when tested acco rdin g to int erna tion al test ing pro ced ure s for us e at the ea r for dev ice t ype RH-67 is 0.22 W/ kg and for device ty pe RH-68 is 0.5 2 W/kg . Y our phoneâ s device type is l i sted on the lab el located under the ba ttery . SAR val ues ma y vary depen ding on natio na l report ing and testi ng requ irem ents and t he net w ork b and. Use of devic e accessories and enhanc em ents may r esult in di ffer ent SAR value s. Addi tion al SAR inf ormat ion ma y be pr ovide d unde r pr oduct i nforma tion at www .nokia.com . USA and Canada: The SAR limit of U SA (FCC) and Canada (IC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue. Device types RH-67 and RH-68 have also been tested against th is SAR limit. The highest SAR v alue reported unde r this standard during product ce rtification for us e at the ear for device type RH -67 is 0.42 W/kg and when properly w orn on the body is 0 .58 W/kg. The h ighest SAR value reporte d under this standard du ring product certification for use at the ear for device t ype RH-68 is 0.73 W/kg and when prope rly worn on the bod y is 0.60 W /kg. Information about this device c an be found on the FCC's website a t <http://www .f cc.gov /oet/fccid> by searching the equipme nt autho rization syst em using FCC ID: QV VRH -67 a nd QV VRH -68.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 13 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Re fe rence info rmati on ⢠T ECHNICAL INFORMATION We igh t 4.16 oz (1 1 8 g) with 900 âÂÂmAh Li-Io n battery Siz e V olum e: 5. 7 cubic inches (93.5 cc) Leng th: 4.27 in (108.6 mm) Wi dth: 2.1 i n (5 3.0 mm) Thickne ss: 0. 7 in (1 8.7 mm) Fr equen cy range Noki a 667 0 GSM9 00 880âÂÂ915 MH z (TX) 925âÂÂ96 0 MH z (RX) GSM1 800 17 1 0 âÂÂ1785 M Hz (TX) 1805âÂÂ1 880 M Hz ( RX) GSM1 900 1850âÂÂ1 9 1 0 MHz ( TX) 1930âÂÂ1 990 M Hz ( RX) Nokia 667 0 b GSM8 50 824âÂÂ84 9 MH z (TX) 869âÂÂ89 4 MH z (RX) GSM1 800 17 1 0 âÂÂ1785 M Hz (TX) 1805âÂÂ1 880 M Hz ( RX) GSM1 900 1850âÂÂ1 9 1 0 MHz ( TX) 1930âÂÂ1 990 M Hz ( RX) Tr a n s m i t t e r outp ut pow er Up to 2 W Batter y voltage 3.7 V Operating tem pe ra tu re 14 ðF t o 13 1ðF (-1 0 ðC to 55ðC ) a Tal k t im e, sta ndb y ti me a. Battery ta lk and stan dby times are es timates only an d depend on signal strength, network condi tions, features us ed, battery age and condition ( including the effect of charging ha bits), temperatures t o which bat tery is exposed, us e in digital mode, and ma ny other factors. Please n ote that the amou nt of time a phone is used for cal ls will affect it s standby time. Likewise, the amount of time t hat the phone is turned on an d in the standby m ode will affect its talk t ime. Ta l k time: up to 3 hours Stand-by tim e: up to 10 day s Charging t ime w ith 900â mAh Li-Ion battery a nd the ACP-12U charger: approxima tely 1 .5 hours
132 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 133 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia In dex Numerics 1-t ouch di ali ng Assign numbers 34 Make calls 27 A Access points 68 Accessibility solutions 15 Accessories , See E nhancemen ts Ala rm Clo ck 88 Tone 89 Turn off or snooz e 88 Ans wer a c all 28 Ant en na 19 Application manager 76 Applications Add voice com mands to 79 Install applic ations 77 Java app lication settin gs 77 Rem ove files 78 Audio files, See Media fi les B Background im age, See T hem es Battery Charge 18 Insert 18 Talk time and standby time 124 Bluetooth connection 11 2 Close c onnection 115 Conne ction re quests 114 Icon s 114 Pairing 114 Rece ive data 115 Send data 113 Settings 113 Browser Ac cess poi nt s 68 Bookmarks 107 Brows e 108 Connect 107 End connections 11 0 Ico ns 10 7 Servi ce message settin g s 64 Service m essage s 58 WAP and XHTML pages 106 C Cache, clear 111 Calculator 86 Calen dar 39 Alarm tone 40 Delete ma ny entries simulta neously 41 Settin gs 40 Vie ws 40 Call lists, See Log Call regi ster, See Log Call restriction 74 Call timers 30 Calls 1-touc h dialing 27 Answer 28 Confe ren ce calls 27 Dialed 30 Duration t imers 30 For ward ing 28 Inte rnational 26 Make a ca ll 26 Missed 30 Options du ring a call 28 Re cent 30 Reje ct 28 Settin gs 67 Settin gs for forwarding 29 Transfer 28 Use th e Contacts directo ry 26
134 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Camer a 42 Memo ry consum ption 43 Record videos 43 Self-timer 43 Settings 44 Take p icture s 42 CD-ROM 117 Cell broadcas t messages 61 Cell info display 75 Certificates (Certif.) Mana gemen t 73 Trust se ttings 74 Char gers 124 Clear me mory Calendar ent ries 41 Clock 88 Code PIN, See PIN code Security, See Security Computer con nections 117 Conferen ce calls 27 Connection Bluetooth 112 End 11 6 Indicators, See Ic ons Manager 115 Settings 68 USB 115 View de tails 116 Contact car ds Assign 1-touch dialing 34 Assign default numbe rs and addresses 32 Crea te 32 Data im port 41 Insert ima ges 32 Remo te s ynch ronization 118 Ringing tones 33 Voic e tags 33 , 34 Contact groups 35 Conver ter 86 Add exchange ra t es 87 Conv ert currenc ies 87 Conv ert units 86 Copy SIM card t o phone mem ory 33 Text 55 Cus tomer care 15 D Data im port 41 Date, settings 71 Delivery reports 52 Dialed nu mbers 30 Display settings 67 See also Themes Download files to Gallery 49 E Edit Conta c t ca rds 32 Text 52 Th em es 84 E-mail Dele te 60 Remote mailbox 59 Retr ie ve 59 Settin gs 63 Und elet e 60 Enha nceme nt s Activate 75 Description s 124 Rules for use 12 4 Settin gs 75 F File formats Re alP l ayer 46 File manager 78
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 135 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Files, open 49 Fixed dialing 73 Folders Create and organize 24 Ope n 49 Forward calls 28 Frequencies 12 G Gallery 48 Download files from the Internet 49 Folde rs 49 Pictu re m ess ages 49 Upload image s 50 Wallpape r images 49 Game s 95 GIF an im ations 45 Go- to m enu ( shor tcut s) 84 GPRS Conne ction tim er 31 Data c ounter 30 , 31 Settings 70 GSM data connections 11 6 H Handsfr ee us e, See Loud sp eake r I Icons 20 Activity 21 Blue tooth connec tion 11 4 Browse r 107 Data c onnectio n 21 Enhanc em ent 22 GPRS c onnect ion 116 In s tan dby m ode 20 Text input 52 , 53 Voice volum e 22 Idle state, See Standby mode IM, Se e Instant m essaging 96 Ima ge se rver 50 Imag es 49 Add to a contact card 32 Full scre en 45 Keyboard shortc uts when viewing imag es 45 Mem ory c ons umpt ion 43 Move the focus 45 Wallpa pers folder 49 Zoom 45 Import data from othe r Nokia phones 41 Indicators, See Icons Inse rt Batte ry 18 Memory card 17 SIM card 16 Inst al l Applications 77 Java file s 77 Instant mess aging (IM) Cont acts 100 Conversat ions 98 Group c hat 10 2 Log in 97 Log off 105 Servic e provider icon s 96 Settin gs 97 Intern et access points (I AP), See Access points Internet service provider (ISP), See Access points J Ja va Inst all application s 77 Settin gs 77 K Keyguard 25 Keypad lock, See Keyguard Keys, phone key definitions 5
136 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia L Lang ua ge For writin g 66 Set phone lan guage 66 Left selection key 67 Liste n to messages, See Voice mail Lock code 19 , 72 Lock keypad, See Keyguard Lock/unlock memor y card, See Me mor y c ard Log Data c ounter 30 Erase c ontents 30 , 31 Filter 31 Ge nera l (all ca lls an d con nect ions) 31 Recent calls, missed, a nd received calls 29 Settings 31 Lou dspe ak er 25 M Mai l E-mail 59 Voice mail 26 Make calls 26 Media files File form ats 46 Mute 46 Play 46 Search for 46 Sound and v ideo 48 Media gallery, See Gallery Me mory ca rd 89 Adapter 90 Back up and restore phone m emory 91 Form at 90 Insert 17 Lock with password 91 Memo ry consum ption 91 Remove pas sword 91 Unl ock 91 Video clips 89 Memor y l ow Ch eck m emor y cons umpt ion 91 Troubleshoot ing 11 9 Memory, view details 78 Menu 22 Me nu key 5 , 22 Rea rra nge th e main Me nu 23 Messaging Deliv ery reports 52 Inbox 57 Main v iew 51 Messages on the SIM card 61 My folders 58 Outbox 60 Se nt f old er se ttin gs 65 Settin gs 61 Text me ssages 55 Wri te tex t 52 Missed calls 30 MMC, se e Mem ory card Mobile browser, See Browser Model number 12 Movie director 47 Music files, See M edi a files Mute Active call 28 Media file s 46 Ringin g tone o n incomin g call 28 My folders 58 N Network Services 13 Notes 86 O Options lists 23 Organize the main M e nu 23 Outbox 60
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 137 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P Packet data , See GPRS Paste text 55 PC Suite 117 Personal notes 93 Personalize Al arm cloc k ton e 89 Calendar alarm tone 40 Phone Adapter 125 Display, Se e Th emes Illustration 5 Model num ber 12 Network frequencies 12 Phonebook, See Contact cards Picture messages 49 Pictures, See Came ra and Gallery PIN code Unblock 72 Use when powering on 19 Play m e dia files 46 Power on and off 19 Predictive text input Ho w to use 53 Tips 54 Turn off 54 Pr esen ce 35 Availability information 36 Blo cked 37 Private 37 Public 36 Settings 38 Vie wers 36 Profiles 82 Renam e 83 Settings 82 Purchase downloads 110 Q Quick guide 6 R RealPlayer 46 File formats 46 Play media file s 46 Settin gs 47 Strea m l ive con ten t 46 Receive Calls 28 Data by Blue tooth conne ction 11 5 Messages 57 Ringing ton es, Operator logos, and sett ings , s ee Smart messages Recent calls log, See Log Record Sounds 87 Vide os 43 Voice comma nds 79 Reject calls 28 Remote Mailbox 59 Synch ronization 11 7 Remote synchronizatio n 11 7 Remove an application 78 Reports 52 Restricting calls 74 Right sele ction key 67 Ringing tones Add a pe rsonal ringing tone 33 Change 82 Mute 28 Re ceive in a sm art messa ge 58 RS-M MC, see Memo ry card S Screen s aver Display 84 Settin gs 67 Scroll key 22 Search For an ite m 24 For me dia files 46
138 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Security Codes 72 PIN, lock, and PUK codes 72 Security ce rtificates 73 Settings 72 Selection keys, changing 67 Self-timer (for came ra) 43 Send Data by Blue tooth conn ection 113 Message s 55 Service command editor 61 Set time and date 19 Settings 66â 75 Applicat i ons (Java) 77 Blue tooth connec tion 11 3 Calendar 40 Call forwarding 29 Call restric tion 74 Came ra 44 Cell broadcast (info service) 65 Certificates 73 Clo ck 88 Conne ction 68 Data call (GPRS) 71 Date and t ime 71 Display 67 E-mail 63 Enhanc em ents 75 Fixed dialing 73 Gene ral 66 Lock co de 19 , 72 Log 31 Messagin g 61 Messaging, Sent folder 65 Phone 66 PIN code 72 RealPl ayer 47 Security 72 Sounds (cu stomize Profile s) 82 Te xt me ssages 62 Video recorder 44 Wa llet 95 Shared memory 13 Shortcuts Add menu shortcuts 84 Go t o me nu 84 Whe n viewing images 45 SIM card Copy names and n umbers 33 Definit ion 11 9 Inse rt 16 Messages 61 Smart messages 57 Snooze alarm 88 Software Inst all application s 77 Remove applica tions 78 Sound files, See Media files Speed dialing , See 1 -touch dialing Standby mode Screen description 20 Settin gs 67 standby times and talk times 13 1 Stop alarm clock 88 Store data 12 0 Subscribed contacts ( Pr esence) 35 Switch between applications 23 Synchronization 11 7 SyncML 117 T Ta lk t ime 131 Templates folder 58 Text Copy and paste 55 Inp ut 52 Messag es, writ e and sen d 55 Templates 58
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 139 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Theme s Edit 84 Rest ore 84 Wallpape rs folde r 49 Thumbnails, in contact card 32 Tickets 94 Time and date settings 71 To- do 41 Tools 1-touch dialing 27 , 34 Ap pli cat ion ma nage r 76 Device mana ger 80 File man ager 78 Voice mail 26 Trac k list 50 Traditional text input 52 Transf e r c alls 28 Troubleshooting 119 TTY/TDD communication 15 , 125 U Uni t conv ert er 86 Upload images 50 USB connection 115 USSD commands 61 V Video clips Creat e and sav e 43 Ope n 49 Video player, See RealPlayer Video recorder Create and save video clips 43 View Conne ction de tails 116 GIF ani m ation s 45 Voice commands 79 Add 79 Change or dele te 80 Start application s 80 Voice dialing, See Voice tags Voice mail 26 Chang e t he num ber 27 Forwa rd calls to voice ma il 29 List en to mes sages 26 Voice messages, Se e Voice mail Voice recorder 87 Voice tags 33 Add, change, and de lete 34 Make calls 34 Volume control 25 W Wallet Cre ate a walle t profile 93 Create personal notes 93 En ter th e wa llet code 92 Reset code 95 Retriev e data into browser 94 Settin gs 95 Store personal c ard details 92 View ticke t details 94 Wallpaper, See Themes WAP pages, See Browser Web, See Br ows er Write text Predicti ve te xt input 53 Traditi onal text input 52 X XHTML pages, See Browser Z Zoom On sav ed imag es 45 When re cording video 43 When takin g a pi cture 42
140 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 14 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia NOTES
142 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 143 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
144 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Nokia 66 7 0 User Guide Phone info rmation Numbers Where is the number ? My nu mber Wire less service provide r V oic e mail numb er Wire less service provide r W ireless p rovide râÂÂs numb er Wire less service provide r Prov ider â s cu sto mer ca re Wire less service provide r Mode l num ber 667 0b Label on back of phone (u nd er bat tery ) Typ e num be r RH-68 Label on back of ph one (u nd er bat tery ) IME I numb er Label on back of phone (u nd er bat tery )
2 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 3 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia LEGAL INFORMATION DECLA RATION O F CONF ORMITY W e, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole responsibil ity tha t the products RH-67 and RH-68 are in con formi ty wit h the p rovis ions of the fol lowin g Counc il Di rectiv e: 1 999/5/E C. A co py of t he Declaration of C onform ity can be found at http://www .nokia.com/phones /declaration_of_co nformity P ART NO . 9235 449, ISSUE NO. 1 Copyright é 2005 Noki a. Al l righ ts r eserv e d. Nokia, Nokia 667 0, Nok ia Connecting P eople, P op-Port , and the Nokia Original Enhanc ements logos are t rademar ks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Ot her company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respecti ve owners. This product includes software licens ed from Symbian Soft ware Ltd. é 199 8-2005. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian L td. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Java and all Java -based marks are trademarks of Sun Micros ystems, Inc. US P atent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright (C) 1997-2005. T egic Com munications, Inc . All righ ts reserved. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, I nc . This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Vis ual P atent P ortfolio License (i) f or personal and non-commercial use in connection with infor m ation which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and (ii) for use in connection wit h MPEG -4 video pr ovided by a licens ed video provider . No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See ht t p://www .mpegla.com . The inform ation contained in this user guide was written for the Nokia 667 0 product . N okia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia re serve s the right to ma ke chang es to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. 168
4 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia UNDER NO CIRCUM STA NCES SHALL NOKIA BE R ESPONSIBLE FO R ANY LO SS OF DATA OR INCOME OR A NY SPEC IAL , I NCID ENTA L, AN D CO NSE QUEN TIA L OR IN DIRE CT DAMA GE S H OWSO EVER CA U SED. THE CO NTE NTS O F TH IS DO CUMEN T AR E PR OV IDED " AS IS ." EX CEPT A S RE QUIR ED B Y APPLI CABLE L A W, NO WARRA NTIES OF AN Y KIN D, EITHER EXPR ESS OR I MPLIED, IN CLUD ING, BUT NOT LIMITED T O, THE IMPLIED WA RRANTIES OF MERCHANT A BILITY AND F ITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, A RE MAD E IN REL A T ION TO THE ACC URACY A ND RELI ABILITY O R CONTEN TS OF T HIS DOCU MENT . N OKIA RESE RVES T HE RIG HT TO R EVISE THIS DO CUM ENT OR W ITHDRAW I T AT ANY TIME WITHOU T PRIOR NOTIC E. EXPORT CONTROLS This device may contain commodities, tech nology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our device may cause TV or radio interfer ence (f or example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or In dustry Canada can r equire you to stop using your telephone if such int erfer ence cannot be eliminat ed. If you require as s istance, contac t your local service facility . This device complies with part 15 of t he FCC rules . Operation is subject to the condition that this devic e does not cause harm ful interferenc e.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 5 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Noki a 667 0 phon e at a g lance Call key End key P owe r key ( on top ) P op-Port⢠connector , and microphone (on bottom) Five-w ay scrol l key Left sele ction key Me nu ke y Edit key Clear k e y Right sele ction key Display Earpiec e Camera len s Note: The int ernet symbol appear o n all phones. on the 0 key doe s not Speaker (on side) Charger port
6 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Quick guide Make a call Enter a phone number , and press the Ca ll ke y . Answer a call Press the Call key . Answer call during call Select Options > Answ er , or press the Call ke y . End a call Press the End ke y . Decline a call Press the End ke y . Mute a call Select Options > Mute dur ing a call. Red ia l Press the Call key twi ce. Adjust c all v olume Scroll left or r igh t w ith the Scro ll ke y du rin g a cal l. Use the in-call menu Select Options during a call. Save a na me and n umb er Enter a number , select Option s > Add to c o ntacts > Cr eate n ew , choose a category , enter a name, and select Done . See "Writ e text ," p. 52 . Look up a name Select Menu > Con tact s , and in the search field at the botto m of the scree n , key i n the fir s t l etter s of th e nam e y ou wa nt to fi nd. Us e 1-to uc h dia ling Press and hold a key ( 2 âÂÂ9 ). Y ou must assign a k ey to a number in Co nt ac ts . See "Assign 1-touch d ialing keys," p. 34. Check voice mail Press and hold the 1 key (contac t your serv ice provi der for details). Write and send text messages Select Menu > Messaging > New messag e > T ext message . Enter th e recipient in th e To field. Enter the t ext message, and select Op tions > Send . Send a pic ture Capture a pi cture, allow th e pictu re time to save, and then selec t O ptions > Send > Via multim edia . Enter the recipien t in the To field. Enter th e text message, and select Op tions > Send . Read a new message If a new me ssage arrives, select Show to display the message. Press Pres s a key brie fly and re lease it. Press and hold Press and hold a k ey for 2 t o 3 se conds and release it.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 7 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Contents 1 For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 About you r phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Network se rvices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Shared memo ry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Fol low graphic clues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Find t he phone label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 Contac t Noki a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Accessi bility solu tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Remov e the bac k cove r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 Insert the SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 Insert the memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 Insert the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 Charge the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 Switch the phone on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Tips on effi c ie nt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 If t he phone reques t s a PIN code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 If t he phone reques t s a lock code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9 Set th e time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Make a cal l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Ic ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Option s lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Common act io ns for all appli cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Search for ite m s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vol u me co ntrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Loud speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Key guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 4 Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Make a cal l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Answ er a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cal l log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
8 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia 5 Personal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Contac t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Presen ce (net work service). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Positi oning ( n et work serv ice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Cal endar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 To-d o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Copy cont ent from compati ble Nokia phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 6 Multimedia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Came ra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Vi ew images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Movie di rector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Gall ery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 7 Messagin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Wri te text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Write an d sen d messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Vi ew a multi media pres entation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 InboxâÂÂre ceive message s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 My folder s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Remote mailbox ( network servi c e) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 View m essages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cell broadcas t (net work s ervice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Servic e co mma nd editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Messagi ng set tin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Cal l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Connec tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Date an d time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Securi ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Cal l rest riction (network serv ice). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 5 Enhan c e ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 9 Tools and applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Applic ati on ma n ager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 9 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Fil e manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Voi c e comman ds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Devi ce manage r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 10 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Them es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Go to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 11 Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Cal c ul ator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Convert er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Voi c e recorde r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Wall et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 12 Instant mes s aging (IM) (network servi ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 IM serv ice provide r ic ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Regi ster wit h an IM servic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Before u sing IM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Log in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 IM set tin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 IM conv ersations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 IM cont acts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 IM Group ses sions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Log out servic e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 13 Web (mobile browser). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Basi c ste ps for web acce ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Browse r servi ce set-u p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 Make a co n nec tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Downl oad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 End a conn e ctio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Cle ar the cac he . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Browse r sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1 0 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 14 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Bluetoot h con n ecti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 USB con nection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Connec tion manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15 Connec t you r phone t o a comput er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Use t he CD- ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Synch ron izat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Memory low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 19 Differe n t wa y s to st ore data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Phone di splay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Bluetoot h con n ecti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Mult imedia messagin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Messagi ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Browse r servi ces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 PC connec tivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Applic ati on n o t res ponding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21 16 Reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Batte ry information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Enhan c e ments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Enhan c eme nts, bat teries, an d cha rgers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Care an d maint enance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Additi onal safet y informat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Emerge ncy call s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Cert ificati on inform ation (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30 Tech nical i nformatio n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 1 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia F or you r s afet y 1 For your safety Read these simp le guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete us er guide for further in formation. SWITCH ON SAFEL Y Do not switch the phone on whe n wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inte rferenc e o r danger . ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Ob ey all l oca l laws. Alw ays keep yo ur ha nds fr ee to ope rat e the vehic le while driving. Y our first conside ration whi le driving should be road s afety . INTE RFERENC E All wire less phones m ay be susceptib le to in terference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF I N HOSPITALS Fol l ow a ny rest rictio ns. Swit ch the p hone off near m edical eq uipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restriction s. Wireless devices c an cau se interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUEL ING Don't u se the phone at a refue ling point. Don' t use ne ar fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BL ASTIN G Follow any restriction s. Don't us e the phon e where blasting is in prog ress. USE SENSI BL Y Use only in the norm al position as explain ed in the product docume ntation. Don't touch t he a ntenna u nnece ssarily . QUA LIFI ED SE RVIC E Only qualified personnel may install or re pair this product.
12 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ENHANC EMENTS AND BA T TERIES Use only approve d enhancements and batt eries. D o not conn ect incompatible products. W A T ER-RESISTANCE Y our ph one is not wate r-resistant. Keep it dry . BACK- UP COP IES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a writte n record of all important info rmation stored in your phon e. CONNEC TING TO O THER DEVICE S When connecting to any oth er device, read its us er guide for detailed safety instructi ons. Do not conne ct incomp atible products. EMERGE NCY CALLS Ens ure th e phon e is swit ched on and in se rvic e. Pr ess th e En d ke y as many times as neede d to cle ar the dis play and return to the main scr een. En ter the e merg ency nu mber , th en press t he Call ke y . Gi ve your location . Do not e nd the call un til given permission to do so. ⢠ABOUT YO UR PH ONE The No kia 667 0 phone comes in two model typ e sâÂÂthe N okia 667 0 phone, whic h is appro v ed for use in 900, 1800, and 1900 M Hz GSM netw or ks, and the N okia 667 0 b phone, which is approved for use in 850, 180 0, a nd 1900 MHz GSM netw orks. To view your mode l type, refer to th e information label un der the battery . For more inform ation abou t where this label is loc ated, see âÂÂFind t he phone labelâ on page 14. When using the features in this de vice, obey all laws and resp ect privacy and legitimate right s of others. Warnin g: To use any fea tures in this d evice, other th an th e alarm clock, the ph one must be switched on. Do n ot switch the device on when wirele ss ph one use may cause interfere nce or danger .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 13 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia F or you r s afet y ⢠N ETWORK SERVICES T o use the phone you m ust have servic e from a wire less service prov ider . Man y of the feature s in this device de pend on featu res in the w ireless network to function. T hese Netwo rk Services m ay not b e available on all netw orks, or you ma y ha v e t o make s pecific arra ngement s with you r servi ce provider be fore you can ut ilize Network Service s. Y our serv ice provider may ne ed to give yo u additional ins tru ctio ns for their use and explain w hat charge s will apply . Some net works may have li mitatio ns that affect how you c an use N e twork Se rvices. For ins tance , so me networ ks may not supp ort all lang uage-d epend ent char acters and ser vices . Y our service prov ider may have requeste d that certain features be disabled or not activated in you r de vice. If s o, the y will not ap pear on you r dev ice m enu. Contact your servic e provider for m ore informati on. When using the features in this de vice, obey all laws and resp ect privacy and legitimate right s of others. ⢠SHARED MEMOR Y The follow ing fea ture s in th is de vice ma y sha re mem or y: c ontac ts, t ext mess age s, e-mail messages, multimedia messages, instant messages, images and ringing t on es , vi deo recorder , RealPlayer , c alendar and to-do notes, themes, and downloaded applications. The use of one or more of these features may reduce the memory available for the remain ing features sharing me mory . For example, sav ing ma ny images may use all of the availabl e memory . Y our phone may displ a y a message that t he memory i s full when you try to use a shared m emory feature. In thi s cas e, delet e some of the informa tion or entrie s stored i n the shar ed memory features before cont inuing. Some of the features may have a certain amount of m emory specially allotte d to the m in addition to th e amoun t of memory shared with oth er features.
14 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 2 Gen eral inform ation Congr atula tio ns on yo ur pur chase of a Nok ia mobi le phon e. Y o ur pho ne prov ides many func tions that are practical for dail y use, such as a digital camera, a video recorder , m essaging, e-m ail, a clock, an ala rm clock, a c alculator , an d a calendar . Y our ph one can conn ect to a PC, laptop, or other devic e using a da ta c ab le or B lue to ot h t ech no lo gy . For m ore inform ation on con nectivity , refer to the PC Suite u ser guide on the CD-ROM supplied w ith your phone. The PC Suite user guide, Nokia PC Su ite, and all related soft ware can be down loaded from the Support section of w w w .nokia.ca . ⢠FOLLOW GRAPH IC CL UES This gu ide uses ce rtain icons to a lert you to important informatio n. Note: Explai ns a feature or points out an important concept. Impor tant: Indica tes critical i nformation on using a fe ature. Warnin g: Helps you avoid pe rsonal injury , damage to the phone, or property damage. ⢠F IN D TH E PHONE LABE L If you ev er need t o call the Noki a Custom er Care Cent er or your service provider , you will nee d to provide speci fic information a bout your phon e. This in formation is located on the phon e labels, which are found on t he back of th e phone be neat h the b atte ry . The inside c over of this gu ide has a chart in whic h you c an e nter the information from your phon e label so that you can refer to it e a sily . Inf ormat ion la bel unde r batt ery
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 15 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia General informat ion ⢠C ONTACT NOK IA To help Nokia promptly answ er your questions, ple ase have the following information av ailable before con tacting the Nokia Custome r Care Cente r (see âÂÂFind the phone labelâ on page 14 t o locate t his information) : ⢠Y our ph one model n umber ( such as No kia 66 7 0 or Nokia 667 0 b ) ⢠Type number (such as RH-67) ⢠IMEI n umber ⢠Y our loc al postal code ⢠The phon e or enhanc ement in questio n ⢠AC C ESSIBILITY SOLUTION S Nokia is comm itted to makin g mobile phone s easy to use for all users including those with disa bilitie s. For m ore infor mati on, visit www .nok iaa ccessibi lity .com . or cont act Noki a at 1-888 -226-65 42. For more information on accessibility e nhance ments, see also âÂÂPhone adapter HDA-1 0 a cce ssibility enha ncem entâ o n page 12 5. Nokia Customer Care Center , USA Nokia Inc. 4630 Woodland Corporate Blvd. Suite #1 60 T ampa, F lorida 336 14 Te l: 1-888-N OKI A-2U (1-888 -665-42 28) Fax: 1-8 1 3-24 9-96 19 We b s i t e: www .n okia.com/us In Ca nada c all: Te l: 1-888-2 2-NOKIA (1-888 -226-65 42) We b s i t e: www .n okia.ca For TTY users: 1-800-24-N OKIA (1-8 00-246-6 542)
16 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 3 Getting start e d To begin using your phon e, a SIM card m ust be inserted into the phon e. Y ou ma y als o u se a me mory card with the ph on e. Before you atte mpt to in sert or remove a SI M card or me mory card, revie w the follow ing proce dures to become familiar w ith the ins ide of y our phone. âÂÂNokia 667 0 phone at a glanceâ on page 5 identifies other features on your phone. ⢠REMOV E THE BAC K COV ER Note: Bef ore re movin g the phone cover , alw ays s witch off the powe r and disconnect the pho ne from the charger or any other de vice. Always store and use the phone with the c over a ttached. 1 To open the cover , with the back of the ph one facing you, press the locking catch in the direction of the arrow ( 1 ). 2 While pressing the locking catch, slid e the back cover off of t he phone ( 2 ). 3 Remove the battery from the phone if neces sary . ⢠IN SERT THE SIM CARD K eep all SIM cards out of th e reach of small children. For availabi lity and in forma tio n on using SIM card se rvices, contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service provider , n etwork operator , or oth er vendor . For a bett er u nderstanding of y our SIM card, see â SIM cardâ on page 1 19. 1 Locate th e SIM card slot . 2 To open the SIM card holder , slide the holder in the open dire ction ( 1 ), a nd lift the holder up ( 2 ). 3 P os ition the bottom of the SIM card in the top of th e ho lder , a nd c aref ully slid e th e SIM ca rd d own i nto th e hol der , until th e bottom of t he card fits in the base of the slot. SIM ca rd hold er SIM c ard slot
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 17 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started Make sure that the be v elled corner on the SI M card is at the top of the ho lder and that the gold-co lored contact area on the card is facing th e ins ide of the ph one. 4 To secure the SIM card, fold the SIM card holder bac k down into the phone ( 1 ), an d sl ide the holde r into the closed pos ition ( 2 ) un til it firmly s naps in to place. ⢠IN SERT THE MEMORY CARD This phon e uses a reduce d size multimed ia card (RS- MMC). Only us e RS-MMCs with this device. F or more inform ation on the m emory card adapter , s ee âÂÂAttach and remov e the memory card adapterâ on page 90. Other memory cards, such as secure digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the memory card slot a nd are not compatible with this device. Attempts to use a noncompatible memory card ma y damage the memory ca rd as well as the phone, and data store d on the noncompatible card may be corrupted. See âÂÂMemory cardâ on page 89 for further in formation. K e ep all me mory cards out of the reach of small childre n. See â Rem ove t he bac k c overâ on p age 16 for deta ils on rem oving the pho ne co ver . 1 Locate the me mory card slot. 2 Insert th e top of th e memory card under th e hood at the right side o f the slot a nd ca refully slide the memory card to the right until it fit s in the slot. Mak e sure th at the b eve lled co rner on the memory card is facing tow ard the bott om right side of th e phone and that th e gold-colored contact area on the c ard is facing downward. 3 Pr ess t he me mory card int o pla ce . bev elled corn er Me mory card sl ot b evell ed corne r
18 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠INSERT THE BATTER Y Warnin g: Use only batteries approved by Nokia for use with this particular m odel. The use of any other types ma y inva lidate any approval or warranty , and may be da n gerous. 1 Always us e original Nok ia batteries. See "Nokia batt ery authentication guidelines" on page 122. 2 Align the gold-colored con tacts of the battery with the c orresponding connectors on the ph one, a nd push th e oppo site en d of the bat tery un til it snaps into place. 3 Slide the cover ba ck onto the phon e. Y ou will he ar it click into place. ⢠C HARGE THE BATTERY Warnin g: Use only chargers approved by Nokia for use with this particular mod el. Th e use of any oth er ty pes may in vali date any appr oval or warr ant y , and may be dange r o us. Check the mode l number of any c harger before use with this device. This device is intended for u se when suppl ied with pow er from ACP-12. 1 Connect t he charger t o an ac wall outl et. 2 Connect the pow er cord from the charger to the base of the pho ne. (Y ou wil l hea r it click into pla ce.) The batte r y indic ator bar starts scrolling. Note that you can u se the phone w hile ch arging. When the battery is fully charge d, the ba r stops scrolling. 3 Disconnect the charger from the phone, then from the ac outle t. See "Battery information" on page 1 22. See also âÂÂOther compatible Nokia enha ncem entsâ on page 1 25 for a lis t of othe r compa tible charge rs.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 19 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started ⢠SW ITCH THE PHONE ON OR OFF Press and hold the Po w e r key . After it is switch ed on, the phon e goes through va rious s tart -up sta ges w hil e it is loa ding soft ware . It may be more than 30 seconds before the phone is ready for use . ⢠TIPS O N EFFICIENT O PERATION Y our ph one has an intern al antenna on the back of the phone above the camera lens. Not e: As w ith any ot her radio t ransm itti ng devi ce, do not touch the ant enna unn ecessaril y when t he device i s switche d on. Cont a ct wi th the antenna af fects call quality and ma y cause the phon e to ope rate at a hig her pow er leve l than otherwi se needed. Avoid ing contact with the antenna area when operating th e phone optimi zes the a nte nna perf orm ance and the bat tery li fe. ⢠IF THE PHONE REQUESTS A PIN CODE The PIN code is usually supplied w ith the SIM card. K e y in the c ode (dis played as ****), and pre ss OK . Fo r more in for matio n on PI N c odes , see âÂÂSecurity â on page 72. ⢠IF THE PHON E REQUESTS A LOCK CODE K e y in t he loc k code (disp layed a s *****) , and pr ess OK . The f actory set t ing for the lo ck co de is 12345 . For mo re infor matio n on secu rity co des, see âÂÂSecuri tyâ o n pa ge 72. ⢠SET T HE TIME AND D ATE If you are prompted to ente r t he time and date when you turn you r phone on, use the number ke ys 0 âÂÂ9 to ke y in the curre nt time, then the date. Press OK to accept the settin gs. See also âÂÂDate and timeâ on page 7 1. ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 In the standby mode, key in the ph one number , including t he area code. 2 If you m ake a mist ake, pre ss the Clear key t o cle ar nu mber s. 3 Press t he Send key , an d wait for th e answer . 4 Press t he End key to finish the call or can cel the c all atte mpt.
20 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠STANDBY MODE Indic ators are sho wn when the phone is re ady for use, w ith no characte rs k eye d in. In this state , the phone is in th e standby m ode. The graduated bar ( A ) shows the signal s trength of the cellu lar netw ork at your c urrent location. Th e hi ghe r the b ar , th e strong er the signal. The antenna symbol is replac ed with th e GPR S symbo l wh en t he GPRS c onne ction has been s et to When available and a connec tion is a v ailable in the netw ork or in the c urrent cel l. See "GPRS" on page 7 0. The area to th e right of the s ignal bar ( B ) shows an analog or a digital cl ock . See "Date and ti me" on page 7 1. The ar ea above t he date ( C ) in dicates in w hich c ellular ne twork t he phone is current ly being used. The graduated bar ( D ) shows the batte ry charge leve l. The high er the bar , the more ch arge left in th e battery . The navigation bar ( E ) shows th e currently active profile. If the selec ted profile is Norm al , the current date is displayed instead of th e profile name . Curre n t sh ortcuts ( F ) are assig ned to the L eft and Right sel ecti o n ke ys. The background image ( G ) may be a ny imag e you sele ct in th e st andb y mo de. See "Theme s" on page 83. Y our phone has a screen saver . I f th er e ar e no actions for 5 minutes, the d i splay is cleared and a screen saver becomes visibl e. To d eactivate the screen saver , press any key . Y ou can also modify the sc r een saver di sp lay an d the time th at elapses befo re th e scree n save r starts . See âÂÂTheme sâ on pa ge 83 an d âÂÂSt andby mod eâ on pa ge 67. ⢠ICO NS Several icons may be displayed while th e ph one is in t he standby mode. T he icons are re lated to a ctivit y , data conne ctions, e nhancem ents, or voic e volu me. A BC D E F G
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 2 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Getting started Activity indicator s One or more of the followi ng icons may be shown when th e phone is in the standby mode: Data connection indi c ators When an applicat ion is esta blishing a data connec tion, an indicator blink s in th e standby mode . When an indicator is show n con tinuously , t he conne ction is active. Y ou h ave rec eived ne w me ssa ges to the inbo x in Mes sagin g . If t he indicator is blinking, the phone memory is low , and you must delet e some data. See "M emory low" on page 1 19 . Y ou have re ceived on e or more voice m essages . See "C all voice mail" on page 26. Ther e are message s waiting to be se n t i n Outbox . See "Outbox" on page 60. The rin ging type has been set t o Sile nt , message ale rt tone to Of f , and IM ale rt tone to Of f in the currently activ e profile. See "Profiles" on page 82. Th e pho ne keypad is lock ed. T o unlo ck, pr ess th e Left sele ction ke y , then the * ke y . Y ou have an active alarm. See "Clock" on page 88. See "Calendar" on page 39. A Bluetoot h co nnection is active. All call forw arding is tu rned on. Indica tes that all calls to th e phone are forwarded to voic e mail. Se e "Call forw arding (network servic e)" on page 2 9. If y ou have two ph one lines, the forward indicator for the first li ne is and for the second line . See â Lin e in use (netw o rk servic e) â on page 68. Y ou c an m ake calls using phone line 2 only ( network service ). See " Line in use ( network ser vice) " on page 68. Data call GPRS conn ection. The G PRS symbol is shown in stead of the antenna sym bol when ther e is an ac tive GPRS connec t io n, when ther e ar e mu ltip le G PR S con n ect ions , an d for wh en t he GPR S co nn ec tion is put on hold du ring voice calls. Bluetooth connection USB con necti on
22 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Enhancement i ndicators V oice volume indicators â¢M E N U Press the Men u key to d ispl ay the mai n menu. In the me nu, yo u c an acces s all the applicat ions in your phone. Menu options are Open , List v iew or Grid view , Mov e , Move t o folder , New folder , Rename , App. downloads , Memory details , He lp , and Exit . Move in the menu Use t he Scro ll key a s follow s to n aviga te the me nu: ⢠Scroll up by pressing the Sc roll key up ( 1 ). ⢠Scroll down by pressing th e Scroll ke y down ( 2 ). ⢠Scroll le ft by p ressing the Scroll key left ( 3 ). ⢠Scr oll righ t by pressin g th e Scroll key ri g h t ( 4 ). ⢠Press the center of the Sc roll k ey (h ereaf t e r , press the Scro ll ke y) to ope n a selecte d applica tion or folder ( 5 ). Close applications Back step by pressin g Back or Ex it as ma ny ti mes as needed to return to th e standby mode, or sele ct Opti on s > E xit . If you pr ess the End key , the phone returns to the standby mode a nd the application is left ope n in th e background. Pre ssing the En d key will a lways end a call, e ven if another application is activ e and displa yed. When you sw itch the phon e off co rrectly , using th e Po w e r key , the phon e will attempt to s ave any unsa ved data and c lose any applic ations that a re still open. This process may take a short time. Head set conn ect ed Loopset connected Earpiece mode Loudspea ker mode 3 4 1 5 2
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 23 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started Rearrange the menu Y ou can rearrange the menu icons as required. Y ou c an place more rarely used application s in folders and move applicati ons that you us e more ofte n from a folder to th e ma in men u. Y ou can a lso crea te new folders. 1 Scroll to th e i tem you want to move, and selec t Op tions > Move . A chec k mark is placed b eside the application. 2 Scroll to w here you want the applic ation, and s elect OK . T o move an item to a fold er or f rom a fol der to th e menu, se e âÂÂCommon act ions for all applic ationsâ on page 23 . Switch between open application s If you h ave seve ral applic ations open a nd want to switch from one applicat ion to another , press and hold the Menu key . Th e a pplic at ion s wit chi ng window opens showing a list of application s that are currently open . Scroll to an appl ication and press the Sc ro ll ke y to go t o it. If memory is gettin g low , the phone may close some applications. T he phone sav es any unsaved data be fore an applicatio n is clo sed. ⢠OPTIONS LISTS Opt ions lis ts tell y ou which c omman ds are av ailable in diffe rent view s and situations. The available comman ds change depe nding on th e view . In s ome si tuatio ns, when you p ress the Sc roll ke y , a shorter options list appears , lis t ing the main comma nds av ailable in the view . ⢠COMMON A CTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS Open items for viewi ng âÂÂW hen y ou are vi ewing a list of files or folders an d wan t to ope n an ite m, scroll to the item a nd pre ss the cent er of th e Scr oll key , or select Options > Open . Edit ite ms âÂÂTo change the conte nts of an item, open it for viewin g and select Options > Edit . Us e t he Scro ll key to view all fie lds o f th e item. Rename items âÂÂT o giv e an item a new name , scroll to the file or folde r and sel ect Opti ons > Re name . Remo ve, de lete i tem s âÂÂScroll to the item, and sele ct Options > Delete ; or press t he Clear k e y . T o d e l e t e m a n y i t e m s a t a t i m e , m a r k e a c h i t e m a n d d e l e t e all of them at once.
24 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Mark an item âÂÂThere are several w ays to s elect ite ms in a list. ⢠To select one item at a time, sc roll to it, a nd select Options > Mark/ Unmark > Ma r k ; or press th e Edit key and th e Scroll key a t the s ame ti me. A c h e ck mark is p laced ne xt to t he it em. ⢠To s elect a ll items in the lis t, sele ct Opt ion s > Mark/ Unmar k > Mark a ll . Mark mul tiple i tems âÂÂPress and hold the Edi t key; the n scro ll up or down. As the sel ection mo ves , a c hec k m ark i s plac ed ne xt to t he it ems . To en d th e se lec tion, stop scrolling, an d release the Ed it key . ⢠After you have s elected all the items y ou wa nt, m ove or delet e them by selectin g Op tions > Mo ve to folder or Dele te . ⢠To unmark an item, s croll to it, and selec t Opti ons > Mark /U nma rk > Unm ark ; or press the Edi t key a nd the Sc rol l key at the s ame time. Create fo lders âÂÂT o crea te a ne w folder , se lec t Opti on s > New fol der . Y o u are asked to giv e a na me to the folder (up to 35 le tters). Mov e items to a folder âÂÂTo move item s to a folder or be tween folder s, select Options > M o v e to fo lde r ( not shown i f th ere are no f old ers availa ble). W h e n you sele ct Mov e t o fo lder , a list of available folde rs ope n s, and you can also see the root level of the application (for moving an item out of a fo lder). Select the loc ation to which you wa nt to move th e item, and select OK . Sen d ite ms âÂÂTo send i tems to co mpatible devices , scroll to the ite m that y ou wan t to se nd, and se lect Op tio ns > S end > Via mult imed ia or Via Blu eto oth . ⢠If you s elect to s end the item in a multime dia me ssage, an editor ope ns. Pres s the c ente r of t he Scr o ll k ey to sel ect th e recipi ents f rom the co ntacts dir ect ory , or write the phone number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To field. Add text or s ou nd, and select Opt ions > Se nd . Se e "Write and send messages" on page 55. ⢠If you select Via Bluetooth , see âÂÂSend data by Blueto oth connectionâ on page 1 13. ⢠SEARCH FOR ITEMS Y ou can sea rch for a name, fil e, fol der , or sho rtcut by using the sea rch field. In some situations the sear ch field is not visible automatically , b ut you ca n acti vate it by sele cting Opt ions > Fi nd or by starti ng to key in lett ers. 1 To search for a n item, start to k ey in text in th e search fie ld. The phone immediatel y starts to search for matches and moves the selection to the best match . 2 T o make the sea rc h more a ccur at e, key i n more let ters and th e sele ction moves to the ite m that be st matc hes the letters . 3 Whe n th e corre ct item is foun d, pres s the Scr oll key t o o pen it .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 25 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Getting started ⢠V OLUME CON TROL When you ha ve an active call or are lis tening to a sou nd, scroll right or le ft to increase or decrease the v olume level, res pectively . See a lso âÂÂV oice volum e indicat orsâ on page 22. â¢L O U D S P E A K E R The loudspeaker al lo ws you to speak and liste n to the phone from a sh o rt di stance with out havi ng t o hol d the phone to you r ear . The lo udspeak er can be used du ring a call, with sound and vide o applications, an d when vie wing multi media messages. Sound and vi deo applicati ons use the louds peaker by defa ult. Using the loudsp e aker makes it easi er to us e other a pplications while in a call. T o activa te the louds peaker du ring an a ctive call, sele ct Loudsp. or Opti ons > Acti vate loud sp . A tone is playe d, is shown in the nav igation bar , and th e volume indic ator changes. The loudsp eaker ca nnot be act ivate d when a h eadset is connecte d to the ph one. To turn off the loudspeaker during an active c all, select Handset or Optio ns > Acti vate hand set . Impor tant: Do not hold th e phone near your e ar wh en the loudspeaker is in use bec ause th e volum e may be ex trem ely lou d. ⢠K EYGUARD Use the k eyguard (keypad loc k) feature to he lp prevent accidental key pre sses. In the st andby mode, pre ss the Left selection key; t he n q uic kl y pr ess the * key . When the keys are locked, appears on th e display . Press the Left sel ect ion key; the n q uickly p res s the * key t o un loc k the ke ys. When ke yguar d is on, pres s the Sen d key to answer a call. During a call, the phone ca n be operated in th e normal way . When the keygu ard is on, ca lls stil l may be possi b le t o the of f ici al emergency nu mber programmed into y our phone. Ent er the em ergency n umber (for example, 9 1 1 ), and press the Cal l key .
26 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 4 Y our ph one ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 In the standby mode, key in the ph one number , including t he area code. Scroll right o r left to m ove th e cursor . Press t he Clear key t o r emo ve a nu mbe r . For intern ational calls, pres s the * key twice for the interna tional prefix (the chara cter replace s the in ternational ac cess code), and key in the c ount ry co de, th e area cod e without 0, and t he phone numbe r . Calls describe d here as inte rnational m ay be made betwee n regions of the sam e nation. 2 Press t he Send key to call the numb er . 3 Press t he End key to end the call (or to can cel the call a ttempt). Pressi ng the End ke y always ends a call, even if another application i s active and displayed. Y ou c an ma ke a call u sing yo ur voic e so tha t you d o no t nee d to key i n the number . See "V oice dialing" on page 33. Use Contacts to make a call 1 To open the contac ts direc tory , sel ect Menu > Contacts , or pr ess the Scroll key in the standby mode. 2 To find a cont act, scroll t o the de sired n ame, or ke y in the first l etters of th e name. The search fiel d opens automatic ally and matching contac ts are listed. 3 Press t he Send key to sta rt the c all. If the contact has more than one phon e number , scroll to the number and press t he Send key to sta rt the c all. Call voice mail V oice m ail (n etwork service) is an an swering se rvice w here ca llers can le ave voice m essage s. ⢠To c all voice mail, press the 1 key a nd the Se nd k ey in the standby mode, or press and hold t he 1 key . ⢠If the phone as ks for the voice m ail numbe r , key it in an d press OK . Obtain th is numb er from you r service provider .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 27 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Y ou r phone To forwa rd calls to y our voice ma il, se e âÂÂCall fo rwar ding (netw ork s ervi ce)â on page 29. Each p hone line may ha ve its o wn voice mail nu mber . Se e " Line in use (net work ser vi ce) " on page 68. CHANGE THE VOI C E MAIL NUMBER To chang e the phon e numb er of you r voice mail , select Me nu > Too ls > Vo i c e m a i l > O p t i o n s > Change n umbe r . Key i n the numb er (obta ined fro m your ser vic e provid er) , and press OK . 1-touch dialing To view the 1 -touch dia ling grid, s elect Menu > T ools > 1-touc h . T o as sign a pho ne number to one o f th e 1 -touc h di alin g k eys ( 2 âÂÂ9 ), select Options > Assign . See also âÂÂAssign 1- touc h dia ling k eysâ on pa ge 34. To call the nu mber in the standby mode, pres s the co rresponding 1-tou ch dialing key and the Send key . To turn the 1 -touch dia ling fun ction on, s elect Me nu > S ettin gs > Cal l > 1-to uc h dia ling > On . If th e 1-tou ch dial ing functio n is set to On , press and hold the corresponding 1-touch dialing k ey until th e call is s tarted. Make a conference call (network service) Confere nce calling allows you to make a confere nce c all wi th up to six pa rticipan ts, depending on network lim itations. 1 Make a call to the fi r st participant . 2 To make a c all to a new part icipant, sel ect Opti ons > New cal l . 3 K ey in o r search th e memory for th e phone number of the participant, and press Call . The first c all is a utomat ically put o n hol d. 4 Whe n the new c all h as been answe red, sel ect O ptio n s > Conferenc e t o join the first particip ant in the confere nce ca ll. 5 To end th e ac tive c onfe renc e call , pres s th e End key . To add a new person to the call, re peat step 2.
28 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia To hav e a pri vate conversation w ith one of the participants, sele ct O ptions > Conf erence > Pri vate . Scroll to the desired participant, and press Priv ate . Th e confere nce call i s put on ho ld in your ph one, and the other particip ants ca n still continue talkin g with each other wh ile you ha ve a pr ivate discus sion with one participan t only . On ce you hav e finished the privat e convers ation, sele ct Options > Conference to return to t he conference call . T o drop one partici pant from the co nference ca l l, sele ct Opti ons > Conference > Drop par tici pant ; then s croll to t he participan t, and press Dr op . The quicke st way to make a new call is to dial th e number , and press the Sen d key to start the ca ll. The e xisting c all is a utomatica lly put o n hold . ⢠AN SWER A CAL L To a nswer an incoming ca ll, press the Sen d ke y . To end the call, press the End key . If you do not wa nt to ans wer a call, press th e End key . When a call c omes in, select Sile nce to quick ly mute t he ringing tone . Options during a call Selec t Options du ring a cal l for so me of t he fo llowi ng options: Answer , Dec line , Swap , Activate loudsp. or Activate handset , End active call , End all calls , Hol d or Unhold , Mute or Unmute , Conf erence , Tra n sf e r , Send t ouch t ones , and Help . Y ou m ight not have all of these option s. Contact your service provid er for more deta ils. Louds p eaker and Handset may be displayed as options for the Right selec tion key an d can be used as shortc uts for Activate handsfree and De activate handsfree , respectiv ely . Swa p is used to switch b etwe en the activ e ca ll and the call on h old. T ransfer is u sed to conn ec t an incom ing c a ll or a c all on hold with an active call an d to disco nnect yours elf from both calls. Send touc h tones is u sed to send DTMF tone sequen ces, for example, passwords or bank a ccount numbers : 1 K ey in the digi ts wit h the 0 âÂÂ9 ke ys. Each k eystroke gen erates a DTMF tone, whic h is trans mitte d while the call is activ e. Press th e * key repeatedly to produce * , p (inserts a pause of approximately 2 seconds before or between DTMF characters), and w (if you us e this ch aracte r , the rema ining seque nce is n ot sent un til yo u press the Send key a gain during the call) . Pres s th e # k ey to produ ce # . 2 To send the tone, press OK .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 29 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Y ou r phone Call wa iting (network service) If you ha ve activ ated the call wa iting service , the ne twork wil l notify you of a new incoming c all while you ha ve a ca ll in progress . 1 Du ring a call , press the Send key to answer the waiting call. The first c all is put on ho ld. 2 To switch betw een the tw o calls, pre ss Swa p . 3 T o end th e act ive ca ll, p ress th e En d key; or to end both calls at the same time, se lect Opti ons > End all cal ls . Call forwarding (network service) When ca ll fo rward ing is a ctivate d , y o u can direc t your i ncoming call s to ano ther number , for example , to your v oice ma il num ber . F or details, c ontact you r service provider . Select M enu > Se tti ng s > Call f or wardi ng . ⢠Selec t on e of th e fo rwar ding optio ns, for ex amp le, sele ct If bu sy to for ward vo ice ca lls whe n yo ur nu mb er is b us y or w he n you rej ect inco mi ng ca lls . ⢠Select Opti ons > Ac tivate to turn the forwarding settin g on, Cancel to turn the forwarding se tting off, or Ch eck s tatus to ch eck whet her th e forwarding is activ ated or not . ⢠To cancel all active forwarding, select Opti on s > Ca nce l al l forw ard s . See also â Ac tivity indicatorsâ on page 2 1. Call restrict ion and call forwarding c annot b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . S e e " C a l l restriction (ne twork se rvice)" on page 74. ⢠CAL L LOG Select Menu > Log . Y ou can use the log to monito r phone calls, text messages, data c a lls , and packet data connections registered by the phone . Filter the log to view just one type of event and creat e new contact cards based on the log inform ation. Conne ctions to your remote mai lbox, m ultimedia m essagi ng center , or brows er pages are shown as data calls or pa cket data connec tions in the ge neral commun ications lo g. Recent calls log Select Menu > Log > Rece nt cal ls . The phone registers the phone numbers of misse d, received, a nd dialed c alls, and the da te and time of you r calls. The phone registe rs missed and received calls only if the n etwork supports these funct ions and if the phone is switched on with in the net work serv ice ar ea.
30 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Op tion s in th e Missed , Received , an d Diale d v iews are Cal l , Create me ssage , Use n umber , Delet e, C lear list , A dd to Conta cts , He lp , and Exit . Miss ed c alls and re ceiv ed cal ls T o view a l ist of th e last 2 0 pho n e numb ers rece ived bu t not answere d (networ k ser vic e), sel ect Menu > Lo g > Rece nt cal ls > Mi ssed calls . If you receive indication of mi ssed calls while in the standby mode, press Show to ac cess th e li st of numbe rs. To call back, scroll to the num ber or na me y ou want to call, and pre ss the Sen d key . To view a lis t of the 20 num bers for calls most recently accepte d (network service), sele ct Me nu > L og > Re ce nt ca ll s > Rece ived ca lls . Dialed n u mbers To view the 2 0 pho ne num bers for the mos t recently called or attempted, select Log > Rece nt c alls > Di ale d num bers . ERASE RE CENT CALL LIST S To clear all re cent call lists, select O ption s > Clea r re cen t calls in th e Recent calls main vie w . To c lear one of the call logs, open the log you wan t to eras e an d sele ct Options > Clear lis t . To c le ar an individual event, ope n a log, scroll to the event, and press the Clear key . C onfirm by press ing Yes . Call timers Select Menu > Log > Call timers to view the duration of y our incomi ng and outgoing calls. Note: The actual time in voiced for calls by you r service pro vider may vary , depending upon network fe atures, rounding- off for billing, and so forth. To e rase call du ration timers, selec t Op tions > Clear ti mers . For this you ne ed the lock c ode. See "Security" on page 72. Note: Some timers may be reset during servic e or software u pgrades. GPRS data counter Select Menu > Log > GPR S co unter . The GPRS d ata counter allows you to check the amo unt of data sent a nd rec eive d during packet data (GPRS) c onnections. This ma y be he lpful if your service provider charges for GPRS connections based on th e amount of data sent and received. The actual am ount invoic ed by your service provider may vary depending on rounding , taxes, or other factors.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 3 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Y ou r phone View the gener al log Select Menu > Log an d scroll right. In t h e g ene ral l og, the send er or r ecipient na me, phon e numb er , na me of the servic e prov ider , or a cces s po int is dis play ed fo r each communi cation event. E v e n t s s u c h a s a t e x t m e s s a g e s e n t i n m o r e t h a n one part and packet data conn ections, are logged as one communication event. FILTE R THE GENERAL LOG 1 Select Opt ions > Filter . A list of filters opens. 2 Scroll to a filter , and press Sel ect . ERASE THE CO NTENTS OF THE GENERAL LOG To erase all the lo g con ten ts, rece nt ca lls log, and messaging delivery report s permanently , select Op tions > Clear log . Se le ct Ye s to confirm. P ACKET DAT A COUNTER AND CONNECT ION TIMER To v ie w how mu ch data, measured in kilobyt es, has been transferre d and how long a certain G PRS con nection has last ed , scroll to an incom ing or outgoin g even t la bel ed GP RS an d sele ct Options > View de tails . Log settings Select Menu > Log > Opt ions > Setti ngs to open th e lis t of settings. Log durat ion â The log ev ents remain in the phone memory for a set nu mber of day s after w h ic h they are au tomati cal ly erased to free m emory . If you sele ct No l og , all t he log conte nts, recen t calls log, a nd messa ging delivery reports are perm anently deleted. Show call dur ation âÂÂSet to Ye s or No . See "Call time rs" on page 30.
32 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 5 P ersona l info rmation â¢C O N T A C T S To open Contacts , pres s the c enter of t he Scro ll key in the st and by mode, or select Menu > C ont ac ts . In Contacts , yo u can store and manage contac t information , such as names, phone numbers, and addresses. Y ou can also add a perso nal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnai l image to a cont act card. Y ou can create co ntact grou ps, which a llow you to send text mess a ges or e -ma il to man y rec ipie nts w ith co mpa tibl e de vic es at th e s ame time . Opt ions in Con tac ts are Op en , Call , Cre at e message , N ew contac t , Open con versation , Ed it , Delete , Duplic ate , Add to group , Belongs to group s , Mark/ Unma rk , Copy to SIM direct. , Go to web ad dress , Send, Con tacts info , SIM directory , Ser vic e number s , Settin gs, Hel p , an d Exit . Create and edit contact c ards 1 Ope n Co nt ac ts and selec t O ption s > N ew contac t . An empty contac t card opens. 2 Fill in th e fields y ou want, and press Do ne . The contact card is saved in the phone memory and closed, after which you can see it in the co ntacts di rectory . To edit co ntact cards , see âÂÂComm on ac t ions for all applicationsâ on page 23. Options when editin g a cont act card ar e A d d th umbnail or Remo ve thumbn ail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , He lp , an d Exit . To de lete con tact cards, in the cont acts direct ory , s croll to the cont act card and sel ect O pti ons > Delete . T o attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open a contact card, and sele ct Options > Ed it > Options > Add thumbn ail . The thumbnail image is also shown when the c ontact is calling you. After you attach a thu mbnail image to a co ntac t card , sel ect Add thum bnail t o replace the image w ith a different thumbnail or R emove thum bnail to remove the thumbnail from the contact card. To as sign default numbers and addre sses to a contact card, open the contac t card, and se lect Opti ons > De faults . A pop -up window ope ns, listing the different options .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 33 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information Copy between SIM c ard and phone memory To c opy names and numbers from a SIM ca rd to your phone , open Contacts , sel ect O pti ons > SIM directo ry , scroll to the name s you wa nt to c opy , an d sel ect O ptio n s > Copy to Contacts . If you want to cop y a phon e, fax, or pager n umber fro m Contacts t o y o ur S I M card, s elect Contacts , ope n a conta ct card, scroll to th e numbe r , and sele ct Option s > Copy to S IM dir ect . Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group Y ou c an set a ringing to ne for each contact c ard and grou p. Wh en that contact or group me mber calls you, the phone plays th e chosen ringing ton e (if the callerâÂÂs telephone numbe r is sent with th e call and your phone recogn izes it). 1 Press t he Scro ll k ey to open a contact card; or scroll right to go to groups, and select a contact group. 2 Select Option s > Ringi ng ton e . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Scroll to th e ringing tone you wish to u se for the con tact or group, and press Select . 4 To re move the ringing tone , select D efault tone from the lis t of ringing tones. For an indivi dual contact, the phone will alw ays use th e ring ing t one tha t wa s assigned last. If you change a grou p ri nging tone, th en the ringing ton e of a single contact that belon gs to that group, the ringing tone of the single contact is used. V oice dialing Y ou can mak e a phone c all by saying a v oice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken words can be a voice tag. When reco rding, hold the ph one at a short distance away from your mout h. After the sta rting tone, say cle arly the wo rd, or words, you want to record as a voic e tag . REQUI REMENTS FOR VOICE TAGS Before using voic e dialing, note th e following: ⢠V oice t ags are no t la ngu age-dep enden t. They ar e depen dent on the sp eaker' s voic e. ⢠Y ou m ust say th e na me e xactl y as you sai d it wh en y ou reco rded it. ⢠V oice tags are sensitive to background nois e. Rec ord voi ce tag s, and use them i n a qu iet en vironm ent. ⢠V ery short name s are not accepted. U se long names, and avoid similar names for diffe rent numbe rs.
34 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Note: Using voic e tags may b e difficult in a nois y envi ronment or during an em ergency , so you shoul d not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumsta nces. ADD A VOI CE TAG TO A PHONE NUM BER V oice tags can only be added to ph one numbe rs stored in phon e memory . Se e "Copy between SIM c a rd and phone memory" on page 33 . 1 In Contacts , scroll to the conta ct to whic h you w ant to add a vo ice tag, and press the Sc ro ll key t o ope n the co ntac t car d. 2 Scroll to th e numb er t o wh ich you want to add the vo ice tag, a nd selec t Option s > Ad d voic e tag . 3 Press Start to record a voice tag. 4 After the starting tone, cl ea rly say th e words y ou want to use as a voice tag. After recording, th e phone plays the recorded tag, and Pl aying voic e tag is displayed. When the voice tag has been succe ssfully saved, Vo i c e t a g s a v e d is displayed and a be ep sounds. A symbol can be seen n ext to the nu mber in the conta ct c ard. To r ep lay , er ase , o r cha ng e a vo ic e t ag, sc rol l to t h e it em th at ha s a vo ic e t ag (indicated by ), and select Op tions > V oice tag > Playback , Change , or Delet e . MAKE A CAL L USING A VOICE TAG 1 In the standby mode, press and hold th e Right sel ection key . A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. 2 When you make a call by using a voice tag, hold the phone at a short dista nce from you r mouth, and s ay the voice tag cle arly . The phon e plays the original voice tag, displays the name and n umber , and dials the nu mber of th e recognized voi ce tag. If the phone plays the wron g voice tag or i f you want to retry voice dialing, press Retry . V oice dia ling should not be u sed whe n a dat a call or a GPRS c onnect ion is active b ecause the voice cal l will inte rrupt the conne ction. Assign 1-touch di a ling keys 1-tou ch d ialin g is a qui ck w ay t o c all fre que ntly used nu mber s. You can as sign 1-t ouch di ali ng k ey s to eig ht pho ne number s. Numbe r 1 is reserve d for voice mai l. 1 Open th e contac t card for w hich you want a 1 -touch dialin g key , a nd scroll to the phone numbe r you w ant to add to 1-touch dialing. 2 Select Opti ons > As sign 1-t o uch no. . The 1-t ouch dialing grid ope ns, showing you the numbe rs from 2 âÂÂ9 .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 35 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information 3 Scroll to a n umber and press Assi gn . Whe n yo u retu rn to the co nt act informat ion view , the 1 -touch dialing ic on is displayed n ext to the num ber . 4 To call the con tact by 1-t ouch dial ing in the stan dby mo de, press the 1-to uch di aling key and Se n d ke y , or pres s and hold th e 1-touch di ali ng key . View subscribed contacts Select Menu > Cont acts , and scroll to the second tab t o open the subscribed conta cts list. This list allo ws you to vie w presen ce data , incl uding ava ilability and IM st atus, f or all subscr ibed contact s . See also âÂÂPr esence (network se rvice)â on page 35 and âÂÂInstant messaging (IM) (network service)â on page 96. Op tions i n the s u bsc ribed contac ts vie w are Ope n , Call , Create message , Open con versation , Unsub scribe , Subscribe new , Ma rk/Unmark , My pres ence , Help , and Exi t . If you are not logge d in to th e presence service, y ou will se e only a few of the se options. Manage contact groups Select Me nu > Cont acts , and scrol l to the third tab to open the contact groups list. Options in the groups list view are Open , New group, Delete, Ren ame , Ringi n g tone , Contact s info , Se ttings , He l p , a n d Exi t . CRE ATE CO NTA CT G ROU PS 1 In the con tacts directory , scroll t o the groups tab . 2 Select Optio ns > Ne w grou p . 3 Wri te a name fo r the gr oup, or use the def aul t name Group 1 , and pr ess OK . ADD M EMBERS TO A G ROUP 1 In the contac ts directory , scroll to the conta ct you want to add to a group, and sele ct Optio ns > Add to gr oup. A list of availabl e groups opens. 2 Select a group, and press the Scroll key to ad d the cont act. ⢠PRESENC E (NETWORK SERVICE) Select Menu > Presence . Opt ions in P resen ce are Open , My availability , Viewers , Update presence , Login or Logou t , Settings , Help , and Exi t . Use t he pres ence ser vice to inf orm o the rs when , wher e, and h o w yo u want to be contacte d. Presence allow s you to view and create a dy namic profile and sh a r e informa tion or control services. Presence informatio n is visible to other users of the servi c e and can show where you are an d what you are doing, as well as let others know whe ther you are available and whether you pre fer for people to c all or send mess ages.
36 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Bef ore yo u can u se the p resen ce ser vic e, yo u mus t ch oose a se rvice pr ovide r and save the settings of that service . Y ou ma y receive the settin gs in a special text message, called a smart message, from the servic e provider that offers the presence service. See "Smart messages " on page 57. For more information, contact your service prov ider . Select Optio ns > Login or Logou t to log in and out of th e presence service. The pre sen ce appl icat ion on your ph one all ows y ou to change your ow n pu blishe d informat ion and determin e who is auth orized to see you r presence . T o v iew the presence in formation of oth ers, you must use th e Contacts a pplication. Se e "View subscribed contac ts" on page 35. Change your availability Select Optio ns > My av ailabi lity and one of the follow ing: Avail able â Y ou are available for people to call or send you messa ges, for e xample, your pho ne is set to Norm al profile. See " Profiles" on page 82. Busy âÂÂY ou may be available for people to c a ll or send you m essages, for ex ample, y our phone is in Meeti ng profile. Not avail able âÂÂY ou are not available for people to call o r send you m ess ages , fo r e xampl e, you r phone is in S ilent profile. Change your presence information Y ou can set up public, private, and blocked presence information , and define who can vie w you r inform ation. PUB LIC PRES ENC E Selec t Menu > Presence > Public pre s. t o cha ng e yo ur p ub lic p res en ce inf ormat ion. This information is availa ble to any one you have n ot blocked. Select Optio ns a n d one of the following: My ava ilabi lity âÂÂSele ct Availa ble , Busy , or Not available . Viewers âÂÂOpe n th e Curr ent v i e w ers list to see the n ames, pho ne numbers , or user IDs of the viewers whom you do not allow to view your private presence messages, but wh o are currently viewing your public presence. Y ou c an scroll to a v iew er , p ress Optio ns , and select from the following o ptions: ⢠Add to private list âÂÂA llow the v iew er to als o see your priv ate pres ence . ⢠Block â Prevent th e viewer from seeing you r presenc e information. ⢠Ad d to con ta cts âÂÂAdd the vie wer to you r con tacts dire cto ry . ⢠Re fre sh lis ts â Update the viewer lis ts. This option is only available when you are not logge d in to the presence service.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 37 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information Logi n or Logou t âÂÂConnec t to or disconnect from the pres ence service. Update pr esence âÂÂUpda te your pr ese nce inf orm atio n to th e pre sen ce se rvi ce. Set ting s âÂÂMa nage the publishing o f you r presence information. PRIVATE P RESENCE Select Menu > Presence > Pri vate p res. t o change your privat e presence informat ion. This inform ation is onl y available to th ose whom you have authorized to view y our priva te information . Select Options and one of the followin g: My ava ilabi lity âÂÂSele ct Availa ble , Busy , or Not available . My pr esen ce msg. â Wri te a tex t mes sage o f up t o 40 characters to describe your curre nt ava ilability . My p resenc e logo âÂÂAdd a logo to you r availability in formation. Logo files are st ored in Galler y . See "G allery" on page 48. Viewers âÂÂOpe n yo ur pri vat e p resen ce vi ew ers li st to see the na mes , pho ne numb ers, o r user IDs of t he viewe rs w hom yo u all ow t o view you r privat e pre sence mess ages. Y ou can scro ll to a vi ewer , press Option s , and select from the follow ing options: ⢠Add n ew âÂÂAd d a new vie wer ma nua lly or fr om y our cont act s di re ctor y . Y ou can only sele ct a co ntact w ho has a user I D in the co ntact ca rd. ⢠Block â Prevent th e viewer from seeing you r presenc e information. ⢠Ad d to con ta cts âÂÂAdd the vie wer to you r con tacts dire cto ry . ⢠Remo ve fr om list âÂÂR emove the view er from the private list. This option is available also wh en you mark s everal view ers in th e list. I f the list is em pty , the optio n is not available. Y o u can also scroll to a vie wer and press the Clear key to p rev ent that vi ewer fro m seein g y our p riva te prese nce mess ages. ⢠View d etails âÂÂS how the u ser ID inform ation o f the vi ewer . ⢠Re fre sh lis ts â Update the viewer lis ts. This option is only available when you are not logge d in to the presence service. Update pr esence âÂÂUpda te your pr ese nce inf orm atio n to th e pre sen ce se rvi ce. Logi n or Logou t âÂÂConnec t to or disconnect from the pres ence service. Set ting s âÂÂManage t he publ is hing of yo ur pre sence. BLOC KED PRESE NCE Select Me nu > Pres ence > Bloc ked pr es. t o change your bloc k ed presence informat ion. Blocked v iewers will see a screen cont aining n o personal de tails. Select Optio ns and one of the following: Viewers âÂÂOpen your blocked viewers list to see the names, phone num bers, or user IDs of the viewers wh om you have blocked from seeing you r public or pri vate pr esence in format ion. Y ou can sc roll to a viewe r , press Options , an d select fro m the fo llowing option s:
38 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Unbl ock âÂÂRemove th e viewer from the bloc ked list. Y ou c an also unblock a view er by scrollin g to the viewer and pressing t he Clear key . ⢠Add to private list âÂÂA llow the v iew er to als o see your priv ate pres ence . ⢠Add ne w â Add a new block ed viewer m anually or from your contacts dire ctory . Y ou can only select a c ontact who h as a user ID in t he cont a c t ca rd. ⢠Ad d to con ta cts âÂÂAdd the vie wer to you r con tacts dire cto ry . ⢠View d etails âÂÂS how the u ser ID i nfor matio n of the vi ewer . ⢠Re fre sh lis ts â Connect to the presence service to update the vie wer lists. This option is only availa ble when you ar e not lo gged in to the presenc e service. Update pr esence âÂÂUpda te your pr ese nce inf orm atio n to th e pre sen ce se rvi ce. Logi n or Logou t âÂÂConnec t to or disconnect from the pres ence service. Set ting s âÂÂManage t he publi shin g of you r pre senc e. Update your information Select Me nu > Pres enc e > Option s > Up date pre senc e . This option is onl y available when you are logged in to the presence serv ice, have change d your information i n the Pri vate Pr ese nce or Publ ic Pre sence view , an d have not u pdated that pres ence informat ion yet. Presence settings Select Opti ons > S ettings from th e Presen ce ma in menu, and select from the follow ing: Show pres ence to â Select from the following: ⢠Privat e & publ ic âÂÂBoth public and priv ate presence is publi shed. ⢠Priv ate viewers âÂÂOnly priv ate vi ewe rs can see yo ur pres en ce infor ma tion. ⢠Publi c vie wers â Both public and priv ate viewers see your public presence in formation. ⢠No o ne âÂÂY o ur presence information is not publishe d. Sync. wi th Prof iles âÂÂD ef ines whet her your published presen ce informati on is lin ked to you r phone profile settings. W hen you c hoose an option othe r than Off , be sure to define your profile pre sence informati on as well (see âÂÂCreate and customize profile sâ on page 8 2). Select from th e following: ⢠Off âÂÂY our pre sence inform ation is not change d, even if you change your phone profile setting. ⢠On âÂÂBoth A vailab ilit y an d Private message are changed w h en you c h ange your phon e profile setting. ⢠A vai labi lit y only â Pr ivate m essage is not chan ged when you ch an ge your profile . ⢠Privat e msg. on ly â Av ailab ility is not chan ged when you change y our profile settin g.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 39 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P er sonal information Server settings âÂÂOpens th e Server settings me nu in t he IM fe ature. Select Pre se n ce l ogin type from this me nu to designate when you want to lo g in t o the presenc e service. Se e âÂÂIM settin gsâ on page 9 7 for further in formation on the login types. ⢠P OSITIONING (NETWORK SERVICE ) Select Me nu > Tools > Position ing . P ositi oning allows the netw ork to de tect th e po sition of your phone. By enabling or disabling P o si ti oning , yo u choo se wh en your position informat ion is provided to the net work. To e nab le positioning in your ph one, selec t Sett ing s > P o si ti oning > O n . If yo u need to e nter a lock code, see âÂÂSecurity â on page 72. When you rece ive a position request, a messag e is displayed showin g the service tha t is making the requ est. Pres s Acc ept to allow your pos ition information to be sent, or press Reject to den y th e reques t. P osition request messages are logged in the Recv . requests lis t. To v iew t hem, s elect Menu > P ositi oning > Rec v . request s . T he i con bes ide each reque st indica tes whethe r the reque st is new , rejecte d, or acc epted. If y ou want to see detai ls of a req uest, scroll to the re quest, and press the center of the Sc roll key . I f you wan t to cl ear the Rec v . requ ests list , sele ct Opti ons > Cl ear list . â¢C A L E N D A R In Calendar , you c an keep track of y our appointme nts, meet ings, birthda ys, anniv ersaries , and o ther ev ents . Y o u can also set a calendar alarm to remind you of upcoming events. Create entries 1 Select M enu > C alend ar > O pti ons > N ew e ntry and one of th e following opt ions: Meeti ng âÂÂCreates an appoint ment th at has a specific date and tim e. Me mo âÂÂC reates a general en try for a day . Anni vers ary â Creates a re minder for birthdays or speci al dates. Ann i ve rsary entr ie s are repeat ed ever y year . 2 Fill in th e fields, and scroll to m ove be tween fie lds. Subj ect or Occa si on âÂÂWrite a de scription of the event. Locat ion âÂÂIndicates the place of a me eting (optional).
40 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Sta rt t ime , En d time , Start d ate , an d End dat e . Al arm âÂÂSele ct On to display t he Alar m time and Al arm da te fields. Repeat â Press the center of the Scr oll key to change the entry to be repe ating. Shown w ith in the day view . Repeat un til âÂÂSet an ending date for the repeated ent ry , for example , the ending date of a weekly course you are tak ing. This option is show n only if you have s elect ed to repeat the ev en t. Sync hroni zati on â â¢ Privat e âÂÂAfter synchroniza tion the c alend ar entry c an be see n only by you a nd it will no t be shown t o others, even if they h ave online a ccess to view th e ca lenda r . ⢠Publi c âÂÂThe calendar e ntry is shown to othe rs who ha ve ac cess to view your ca lendar onli ne. ⢠None âÂÂThe calendar e ntry w ill not be copie d whe n you syn chronize you r calend ar . 3 T o save the en try , pre ss Do ne . When editi ng or deleting a repeated e ntry , choose how you want the change s to tak e effect: All oc curr enc es âÂÂAll repeated entrie s are changed. Thi s entry onl y âÂÂOnly the cu rrent e ntry will be chan ged. Cale nda r v iews Press t he # key in t he mont h, we ek, or day views to auto mat ically hig hlight todayâÂÂs date. To key in a ca lendar en try , pres s an y numb er k ey ( 1 âÂÂ0 ) in any calendar view . A meeting e ntry is opened, an d the characters you keyed in are added to the Subj ect field. To go to a c e rtain date, sele ct Option s > Go to dat e . W rite the d ate, a nd p res s OK . Icons in t he day v iew are memo and anniversary . Synchronization i cons in the w eek and mo nth views are red for private synchroniza tion, blue for public s ynchro n ization, pin k for no syn chronization, and black for more than one synchroniz ation entry in a day . Calendar settings Select Opti ons > S ettings and one of the following o ptions: Calendar alarm tone âÂÂSelec t a personalized al arm tone, or no tone at all . Def aul t vie w âÂÂSe lect th e vie w tha t is show n first when you open Calendar .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 4 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia P er sonal information W eek starts on âÂÂCh ange th e starti ng day o f th e week. I f yo u ch ange the setting s s o that the week starts on a day other than Sunday , the week numbers will not be s h own. W eek view title âÂÂC hange the ti tle of th e we ek vi ew to be the week numbe r or th e week da tes. Clear calendar memory T o remove more than one event at a time, go to the month vi ew , and select Options > De let e en try and one of th e following: Before date â D elet e all cale ndar entries that take place before a certain date. Enter the date before which all cale ndar entrie s will be deleted. All e ntri es â Dele te all c alenda r entries. ⢠T O-DO In the To- do list y ou can ke ep a list of tasks that you ne ed to do . The to-do list uses shared me mory . See " Shared memory" on page 13. 1 Select Menu > T o-do . 2 To start ente ring a to-do n ote, pre ss an y number k ey ( 1 âÂÂ0 ). The editor ope ns, and the cursor blinks afte r the lette rs you have e ntered in the Subje ct field. 3 Finish enteri ng th e ta sk in the Su bject field. 4 Scroll to the Due date field, and key in a date. 5 To set a priority for the t ask, scroll to the Pri ority fie ld, and select Hi g h , Norm al , or Low . 6 To sav e the to-do note, press Done . If you re move all characters from the Subj ect field and press Done , the note w ill be deleted, even if you are e diting a pre viously saved note . To open a to-do note, scroll to it, and press the Scro ll ke y . To delete a to -do note, scroll to it, and select Op ti on s > De lete ; or press the Clear key , and sele ct Ye s to co nfir m. T o mark a to-do note as completed, s c roll to it, and se le ct Opt ions > Mark as done . To res tore a t o-do note, select Opt ions > Mark as not done . ⢠COPY CO NTENT FROM COMPATIBLE NOKIA PHONE S Y ou can mov e calendar , contacts, and to-do data from compatible Nokia ph ones to your ph one using your P C and th e PC Suite con tent copier application. Instructions for us ing the ap plication ca n be fo und in th e help func tion of PC Suit e on the CD-ROM.
42 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 6 Mu ltime dia â¢C A M E R A Y ou can use th e came ra to tak e pict ure s and recor d videos w hile on the mov e. The images are automatical l y saved i n Gallery , where you ca n rename th em a nd or gani ze them in folde rs. Y ou can als o send ima ges and vide o recordin gs in a m ultimedi a message, a s an e-m ail attac hmen t, or by Blue toot h con necti on. The came ra pro duces JPEG im ages, and video c lips are recorde d in the 3 GPP file form at with the .3gp file e xtension. T ake picture s 1 Select Camera in t he standby mode, or select Menu > C amer a , a nd scroll left to m ake su re you are on the Ima ge tab . The camera opens, and you can see the viewfinder and the croppin g lines, whi ch sh ow y ou th e im age a rea to be captur ed. Y ou ca n al so s ee th e im ag e counter , wh ich shows you h ow many image s, depending on th e selected picture qual ity , fit in the memory of your phone or memory car d, if you use one . Options before taking a picture are Capt ure , New , Activate night mode or Deact. night mode , Self-timer , Go to Galler y , Settings, He lp , and Exit . 2 Scroll up to zoom in on your subject be fore tak ing the p icture; scroll down to zoom out again. The zoom indicator to the right of the display sh ows the zoom level. The resolution of a zoomed picture is lowe r than that of a non-zoomed picture, but the image re mains th e same size. Y ou may notice the differen ce in image qua lity if view ed on a PC. 3 To tak e a picture, press the Scro ll key . Do not move th e phon e before the cam era ap pl ication starts to sav e the ima ge. Th e im age is sav ed au toma ti cally in Gal ler y . Se e "Galler y" on page 48. To tak e a photo im mediately after anoth er , se lect Opt ions > Se tting s > Imag e > Show captured image , t hen se l e ct No . Th e phot os do not rema in on the d isplay after b eing t aken, are saved in th e Gallery , and the cam era is read y for us e again. If camera image s look smudgy , check th at the camera lens protection window is clean. See " Care and maintenan ce" on page 126 . The camera goes int o battery saving mode if there have been no key presses within a minu te. To continue taki ng picture s, press t he Sc roll ke y .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 43 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia OPT IONS AFTER CAP TURING AN IMAG E Options after a picture has been taken are Ne w , Delet e , Send , Se t as wa llpaper , Rena me image , Go to Gall ery , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . If you do not wa nt to s ave the imag e, select Options > Delete . To return to th e view find er to ta ke a n ew pic ture, press the Scro ll key . Y ou can insert an image into a contac t card. See " Create an d edit contact cards" on page 32. SELF-TI MER T o inc lude yourself in the picture, use the self-timer to delay the taking of a picture. Select Op tion s > Se lf-tim er > 10 sec on ds , 20 seconds , o r 30 seco n ds > Act iv ate . Th e camer a tak es th e pict ure af ter the se lect ed delay has elap sed. IMAGE S AND MEMORY C O NSUM PTION Y our phone has approximately 8 MB of free memory for images, contact information, calendar , messages, and so on. See "Shared memory" on page 13. Images taken u sing the h igh-quality setting and th ose taken in night mode take up the mo st me mory . By u sing a me mory card with you r phon e you ca n incre ase th e numb er of images you can store. To see how much memo ry is av ailable on your phon e and memory card, see âÂÂV iew memory consum ptionâ on page 78. The follo wing table show s approximately how many images w ould fit in 1 MB of memory , de pending on image type and qualit y : Record videos 1 Press Cam era in the standby mode, or select Menu > Cam era , and scroll right to the Video ta b . Options before recording a video are Record , New , A ctiv ate night mode or Deact. night mode , Mute, Go to Galler y , Sett ings, Help , and Exit . 2 Press t he Scro ll key to sta rt recordin g. To pause recording at any time, press Pa u s e . T o resume , pr ess Co ntin ue . Scroll up to zoom in on your subject before or during recordin g; scroll down to zoom out. 3 To stop recording, press St op . Image q ualit y Ima ge ty pe Bas ic Norm al Hig h Sta nd ard 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18
44 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia The video clip is saved to eith er phone memory or the me mory card, depending on the Me mory i n use setting. See "Camera and video settings" on page 44. To immediate ly play t he vide o clip you jus t recorde d, s elect Options > Play . To play previously saved video clips, go to Gallery . See "Galle ry" on page 48. Opt ions after you have re corde d a vi deo are New , Play , Dele te, Send , Renam e , Go to Galle ry , Settings, Help , and Exit . Camera and video settings Select Menu > Cam era > Op tions > Sett ing s to a djust th e settin gs for still image captures and video recordin g. Select the follow ing options: Ima ge âÂÂA djust the s ettings for still ima ges: ⢠Ima ge qua lity â High , Norma l , and Basic . Th e bett er th e ima ge q ualit y , the more memory the imag e consum es. S ee "Imag es an d memo ry con sumpti on" on p age 43. ⢠Show capt ured image âÂÂT o take a ph oto imme diately after anoth er , select No . The photos do not remain on t he display after being t aken, are saved in the Galle ry , and the ca mera is ready for use again. ⢠Def aul t imag e nam e â Allows y ou to set a na me for sa ved image s. By default, images are n amed Image(00 1) , Image(002) , Image(0 03) , and so forth when they are saved. ⢠Me mory in use â Selec t wh ether yo u want to save your images in phone memory or on the me mory card, if you use one. Video âÂÂAdjust the settings for recording v ideos: ⢠Leng th âÂÂAv ailable record ing time is displayed above the top right c o rner of the viewfind er . Select on e of the follow ing video le ngth option s: Max imum âÂÂRecorded video lengt h is restricted by available me mory . Recordings can last up t o 1 0 m inutes, depending on available memory . Shor t âÂÂRes tricts vide o length to optimize it for MM S sending. ⢠Vi deo res olut ion âÂÂSele c t 128x96 or 176x144 . ⢠Defa ult vide o name âÂÂAllows you to set a name for saved videos. By default, videos are name d V ide o(00 1) , Vi deo( 00 2) , Video(003) , and so forth when they are saved. ⢠Me mory in use â Se lect wheth er you wa nt to save you r videos in phone memory or on the me mory card, if you use one. ⢠VIEW IMAGES Pictu res taken wi th the cam era are sto red as im ag es in Gal le ry . See "G allery " on page 48. Select Me nu > Ga llery > Ima ge s , and selec t an image. Pres s the Scro ll key to dis play th e i mag e.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 45 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia In the i mages th umbnai l view : 1 Scroll right o r left to m ove between th e phone and memory card. 2 To browse the list of image s, scroll up and down. 3 Press t he Scro ll key to open an image. Wh en the i mage is o pen, you can see t he name of t he image . When vie wing an image, scroll right or left to go t o the ne xt or previous image in the current folde r . Options when viewing an image are Send , Set as wallpap er , Ro ta te, Zoom in , Zoom ou t , F ull s cree n , Delet e , Renam e , View deta ils , A dd to âÂÂGo t oâ , Help , and Ex it . Y ou c an vi ew anim ated GIF files in the same wa y as oth er images. Zoom on a sav ed image 1 Select Optio ns > Zoo m in or Z oom ou t . Y ou can see the zo oming rat io at the top of the displ ay . See "Keyb oard short cuts" on page 45. 2 Press Bac k to retu rn to the initial vie w . The zooming ratio is not s tore d permanent ly . If you zoo m in on GIF animati ons while they are playi ng, the anim ation w ill freeze un til norma l zoom is resum ed, whe n play will con tinu e. FULL SCR EEN When yo u sele ct Options > Full scr een , the panes around the im age are remo ved so t hat yo u ca n see more of th e im age. Pr ess the Right se l ectio n key to return to the initia l vie w . MOVE THE FOC U S When you ar e zo oming an im age , us e the Scro ll ke y to mo ve the focu s to the left, right, up, or do wn, so that you can take a c loser look at one part of the image, for example , its upper righ t corner . K eyboard shortcuts 1 keyâÂÂRo tat e i mag e 90 degre es count ercl ockwis e. 3 k eyâÂÂRotate image 90 de gre es clockwise. 5 keyâÂÂZoom in. 0 keyâÂÂZoom out. * keyâÂÂChange be tween full scre en and normal v iew . Scro ll key âÂÂScroll up, down , left, right. When you rota te an im age, the rot ation sta tus is n ot store d permane ntly .
46 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠PLAYE R Select Menu > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can play local m edia files stored in the phone memory or memory card, or stream media files over the air from a st reaming l ink. The s treaming link can be ac tivated durin g a browsing ses s ion or stored in t he phone mem ory or memory card. Media files are video, music, or au dio clips. F iles with th e extensions .3gp, .amr , .mp4, .ra, .rv , .rm, and .ram are support ed by RealPlayer . RealPlayer does not support all file formats or all t he variations of a file format. For exam ple, RealPlayer will a ttempt to open all .mp4 file s. However , some . mp4 files ma y include c ontent that is n ot co mpliant wit h 3GPP sta ndards and, therefore, is not supported by this phone. I n this case, the operation migh t fail and result in partial playback or in an error message. Play media files Opt ions in R ealPlayer are Play , Pa u s e , Contin ue, Stop , Mute, Unmut e , Cli p details , Settings , Help , an d Exit . T he available options m ay vary . T o play a media file , select Menu > RealPlayer > Options > Op en and one of the follow ing: Most recent c lips â Play on e of the las t six f iles p layed i n RealP layer . Saved cl ip âÂÂScr oll t o a f ile in ph one mem ory or on memor y ca rd, and pres s t he Scroll key t o play t h e file. Me m. car d sou nd cli ps âÂÂCreate a tra ck list from all sou nd files on the memory ca r d. Wh en yo u cr e a te a track list this way , the first song in the list automatically begins playing. STREAM CONT ENT OVER THE AI R ⢠Select a streaming lin k save d in G allery . B efore y our live cont ent begins streamin g, your phone will c onnect to the sit e and load th e file. ⢠Open t he link to a file i n the b rowser . T o str eam li ve con tent , you m ust fi rst c onfig ure y our def aul t acce ss po int. Se e "Access points" on page 68. For the default access poin t, some service provide rs will require you to use an ac cess point define d in your phone. Ot her service pr ov ide rs all ow yo u t o use a WAP a ccess point. Contact your service provider for more inform ation. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rt sp:// URL address. Y ou cannot open an http:// U RL addre ss. Ho wever , RealPlay er will recogn ize a n http lin k to a . ram file sin ce a .ra m file is a text file conta ining an rts p link. SHORTC UTS DURING PLAY When a m edia file is playing, use the Scro ll key t o se ek (m ove quickl y throug h the me dia file), an d to m ute the s ound, as follows :
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 47 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia Scroll up and hold to seek forward, or scroll down and h old to seek back ward through th e media file. Scroll left and hold un til th e indicator is displaye d to mut e the sou nd. Scroll right a nd hold until you see the indicator to turn on the sound. Change settings Select Opti o ns > Settin g s > Audi o , Vid eo , o r Connection . ⢠MOVIE DIRECTOR Select Menu > Mov ie . Use M ovie dire ctor to crea te edited v ideo clips t hat may con tain video, sound, and t ext. Editing is carried out automati cally according to t he sty le that yo u sele ct. Th e sty le det ermines the tran sition s and visual effect s that are used in the v ideo clip. Ope n Movie d irect or , a nd scroll right or left to move betw een th e ta b and the tab . In the tab , you can sele ct the following op tions: Quic k mu vee â Create video c lips suita ble to be s ent by mult imedia message . Y ou c an se lect s eve ral video clips and the styl e you wa nt to app ly to t hem . The duration of th e Qui ck mu vee video clip is typically less than 1 0 s econds. Custom mu ve e âÂÂCre ate custom video clip s by applying a styl e, music, an d a me ssage . You can set the duration and preview the video clip before saving. T o create a custom mov ie, see âÂÂCreate a custom m ovieâ on page 47 . Sty le d ow nld s. âÂÂDownload and install new sty les. Set ting s âÂÂSe lect th e se tting you wan t to cha nge: ⢠Me mory in use â Select Ph one memo ry or Memory card . ⢠Resolu tion âÂÂSele ct Hi g h , Low or Autom atic . ⢠Defau l t mu vee nam e â Enter a default name for y our video clips. The tab con tains a list of video c lips that you c an Pla y , Se nd , Rename, and Delete . Create a custom movie 1 Select Menu > Mov ie > C ustom mu vee . Define the followi ng items : ⢠Video âÂÂSelect the so urce file or file s you want to use. Selec t Mark/ Unm ark , Play , o r Captur e . ⢠Sty le âÂÂSel ect a st yle f rom the l ist. Sty les d eter mine t he ef fect s and mess age ca ption . Each s tyle is asso ciate d with d efault music and messag e text.
48 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Musi c âÂÂSele ct a music clip from the list. ⢠Messag e âÂÂA dd a caption to the beginni ng and end of th e video clip. Y ou can e nter a mes sage or selec t one from the te mplate. Y ou can edit the defa ult mess age tex t. 2 Select Option s > Cr eate muvee . 3 Select one of t he following du rations for the video clip : ⢠Multime dia message to c r e a t e a v id e o s iz e s u i ta b l e to b e s e nt b y M M S ⢠Sam e as mus ic to create a v ideo of the same duration as th e se le cted music clip ⢠Use r defin ed to enter the vid eo dura tion manua lly . Aft er the v ideo preview i s prep ared, t he Pr eview muve e v iew ope ns, wh ere you can Play , Sa ve the new video clip, and Recre ate ( to make a ne w varia tion of the v ideo clip). ⢠GALLER Y Select Menu > Ga ller y . Opt ions in Ga llery are Open (folder or item), Send , Delet e , Create new , Move to folder , Copy to folde r , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Edit , Renam e , Gallery downloads , Image uploader , Vie w details , Add to âÂÂGo toâ , Sett ings , Help , and Exi t . Use Ga llery to store and organize your imag es, sound c lips, video clips, and streamin g links. Ope n Gall ery to se e a list of th e folders in the phone memory . Scroll right to see the folders on t he memory card, if a m emory c ard is ins talled. Scroll to Images , Soun d clips , Vi deo cl ips , or anothe r folder th at you ha ve created, and press the Scro ll ke y to op en it . The open folde r displays the follow ing informa tion: ⢠An icon d epicting the type of each file in the folder , or in the ca se of a n image, a small thumbnail pictu re giving a pre view of the image ⢠Th e name of the fi le ⢠The date and t ime a file w as sav e d or the size o f the file ⢠Subfolders, if present Y ou can brow se, open, and c reate folders; and y ou can m ark, copy , and m ove items to fold ers. See "Common actions for a ll applications " on page 23. T he options vary acco rding to th e content of th e list of me dia files.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 49 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Multimedia Open files Select any file and press the Sc ro ll key to o pen it. Each fi le will open in its correspo nding application as follows: ⢠Image s files op en in the image vie wer . Se e "View ima ges" on page 44 . ⢠Sound clips open and play in th e music player . ⢠Video clips and streaming links open an d play in RealPlayer . See "Player" on page 46. ⢠Subfolders open to display contents. Default images folders Select Galler y > Im ages . Th e Image s folder is the default lo cation where y our phone saves imag es tak en wi th the c ame ra. With in the Im ages folder , there ar e additional default folders calle d Pic ture m sgs. , Pre sence lo gos , and Wallap ers . PICTUR E MESSAGES FOLDER Select Ga llery > Im age s > Pictu re m sgs. . Use t his fol der to stor e pict ures sent to you in pictur e messages . To save a pictu re tha t you hav e rece ived in a pi cture messa ge, se lect Messa gin g > Inbox , open the message, and select Opti ons > Sa ve pict ure . Op tion s in the p ictur e mes sages fo lder are Op en , Se nd , Delete , Mark/Unm ark , Ren a me , V iew details , Hel p , an d Exit . PRESE NCE LOGOS FOLDER Select Galler y > Images > Presen ce logos . Use this folder to store logos for Presen ce . Se e "Presence ( network service )" on page 35. W ALLPAPE RS FO LDER Select Ga llery > Im age s > Wallp apers . Use t his fo lder to store p ic tures t hat you wa nt t o use as b ackgro un d images . Download files To download files into Ga lle ry usin g the browser , select Optio ns > Ga llery down loads > G raph ic dow nloads , Video do wnloa ds , or T one download s . The brow ser open s and you ca n cho ose a bookm ark for the site from which to dow nloa d. See "Bookmarks" on p age 1 0 7. To download files, you must c onfigure your de fault access point. See " Access points" on page 6 8. Once items have been downloaded, the browser clos es, and the phone retu rns to Gal l e ry .
50 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Upload images to a n image server (network se rvice) Y ou c an s end yo ur pi ctures to a n ima ge server to allow ot hers t o sha re yo ur pictu res online . B efore you ca n upload ima g e s, you must set up the i m a ge server; you c an get the specific settings from you r service provider: 1 Select Setti ngs > Image servers , and press the L eft selec tion key . 2 Fill in the details for e a ch field. (See âÂÂAccess pointsâ on page 68.) 3 Press t he Ri ght sele ction key . To upload images: 1 Select Options > Image uploader . 2 T o begin an uplo ad, mark the ima ges that you want to upload, and sel ect Uploa d . 3 Enter a nam e for the folde r on the image server in which th e images will be stored, and press the Left se lecti on key . T rack lists for audio files Y ou c an create a track list to play audio file s on your phone. Sele ct Menu > Ga llery > Op tions > Cre ate ne w > T r ack list , and follow the screen prom pts to select sound clips for the track list. T o add mult iple tracks at one t ime, pr ess the Edit key an d the Sc ro ll k ey s imultaneous ly to place a checkm ark beside ea ch tr ack you wan t to ad d, a nd select Opti ons > Sele ct marke d items . To pla y a track lis t, selec t Menu > Galle ry and locate the tra ck list in phone memory or on the memory card. Scroll to the track list, and press the Scroll ke y to begin playing it. To modify a track list, locate the track list in Galle ry , and selec t Opt ions > Edit tra ck l ist > Op tio ns > A dd s ound clip . To delete clips , open t he track lis t, scroll to a clip, and s elect Option s > D elete . Options when the track lis t is playing are Pause , Edit track list , Clip details , Settings , Hel p , and Exit .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 5 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Messaging 7 Messaging Note: This function can only be used if it is supported by your netw ork operator or service prov ider . Only devices that offe r compat ible picture message, m ultimedia m essage, or e -mail f eature s can receive an d display these messages. Devices that do n ot have multime dia features m ay re ceive de tails of a lin k to a web page. Select Menu > Messag ing . In Messag ing you can cre ate , sen d, r eceiv e, vi ew , edit , and or gani ze: ⢠T ext messa ges ⢠Multi m edia message s (MMS) ⢠E-mail m essages ⢠Smart messages When yo u open Mes sagin g , yo u can see th e New m essage selection a nd a list of default fold ers: Inbox âÂÂCont ains received messages e x cept e-mail and cell broadcast messages . E-mail mess ages are store d in Mailbo x . Y ou c an read c ell broadcast messages by selecting Optio ns > Cell broadcas t . My fo lders âÂÂFor organizing you r messages into folders. Mailb ox â When you open this folder , you can eit her connect to your remote ma ilbox t o retrieve y our new e -mail messages, or you ca n view your previous ly retri eved e-mail messages w ithout log ging in to the e-mail server . After you have de fined settin gs for a new mailbox, the n ame given to that mailbox will re place Mai lbox in the main view . See "E-mail" on page 63 . Dra fts âÂÂStore s drafts of mes sages that have not been sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂO th er settingsâ on page 65. Messages or data that h ave been sent by a Blue tooth connection are not sav ed in th e Dra ft or Sent fold ers. Outbox â Te m porary storage place for messages w aiting to be sent.
52 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging optio ns are Create messag e , Connect ( shown if you have defined set ting s for the mailbox) or Disconne ct (s h ow n i f t h e r e i s a n a ct iv e c o n ne c t io n to the m ail box), SIM message s , Ce ll broad cast , Se rvice com mand , Settings , Help , and Exit . ⢠WRITE TEXT Y ou can key in text in two different ways , using the method tradition ally used in mobile phones or an other method called predictiv e text input. T raditional text input The indi cator is shown on the top right of the display wh en you are writing t ext using tradition al text input. Press a number key ( 1 âÂÂ9 ), re peatedly until the desired character appears. Note that t h ere are more charac ters ava il a ble for a number key t han are printe d on the k ey . Icon s: and indica te the s elected case . means that th e first l ett er of the next wo rd is wri tte n in uppe r case , and all ot he r lette rs will aut omati cally be writte n in lowe r case . indicate s numbe r mode. To insert a number , press and hold th e corresponding n umber key . To sw itc h between letter and numbe r mode, press and hold th e # key . Re port s (n etw ork ser vice ) âÂÂYou c an reques t that the netw ork send you a delive ry report of the text messages , smart mes sages, and multime dia m essages you have s ent. To turn on delivery report reception, go t o the Messagi ng main me nu, se lect Optio ns > Setti ngs > T ext mes sage or Mu ltim edia me ssage , a nd se le ct Rece ive repo rt > Y e s . It might not be possible to receive a delivery report of a multime dia mess age that ha s been sent to an e-mai l addre ss. Not e: When s ending messa ges, yo ur device may disp lay the word s Mes sage Se nt . This is an indication that the message ha s been sent by your devic e to the m essage c enter number programme d into your de vice. This is not an indication that the mess age has be en recei ved at the intended desti nation. For more de tails about messaging services, check w ith your service provider . Before yo u create a multime dia messa ge, write an e-mail, or connect to your r emote ma ilbo x, yo u mu st ha ve the c orr ect c onne ctio n settings in place. See "Write and send m ess ages" on page 55. See "Settings ne eded for multi media me ssaging" on page 56.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 53 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging If the n ext lette r is locate d on the same key as the pre sent one, wait un til the cursor appears (or s croll right to end th e time-out period) , and key in the le tter . If you make a mistake, press the Clear key to remove a character . Press and h old the Clear ke y to c lear m ore than o ne charact er . The most common punct uation marks are available un der the 1 ke y . Pres s the 1 key repeatedly to re ach the de sired pu nct uation mark. Y ou can a lso press the * key to ope n a list of special ch aracters. Sc roll through th e list, and pre ss Selec t to sele c t a charac ter . To inse rt a spa ce, pr ess th e 0 k ey . To move the cu rsor to the ne xt line, press the 0 key thre e times. To sw itc h between upper and lowe r case, press the # key . Predictive text input To activate predictiv e text in put, pre ss the Ed it ke y an d select Pr ed ictiv e te xt on , or press the # key twice quickly when writing t ext. This will ac tivate predictiv e text input for all ed itors in the phone. The indica tor is shown at the top of th e display . 1 Write the desired word by pressing the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only once for one lette r . The w ord change s after every key pres s. For exam ple, to w rite Nokia when the English dic tionary is selected, press the fo ll owing keys : 6 key for N 6 key for o 5 key for k 4 key for i 2 key for a The word sugge stion changes after ea ch key p re ss. 2 When you have fin ish ed t he word , che ck tha t it is correct . If the wo rd is correct, con firm it b y scrolling right or by pressing the 0 ke y to insert a space. T he underlining disappears an d you can begin to write a new wo rd. If the word is not c orrect, you have the following optio ns: ⢠Press t he * k ey repea tedly to view t he match ing words the dict ionary has found one by one. ⢠Press t he Edit key , and se lect Pre d ict ive text > Matches to v iew a lis t of match ing words. Scroll to the wo rd you want to us e, and press the Scro ll key t o s elect it.
54 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia If the ? cha racter is show n aft er the word, the word you inte nded to wri te is not in the dictiona r y . To add a word to the dic tionary , press Sp ell , ke y in the word (up to 32 letters) usi ng traditional tex t input, and press OK . Th e word is added to the dictionary . Wh en the dictionary be comes full, a n ew word replaces the oldest added word. To r e m ov e t h e ? and clear characters one by one from the word, press t he Clear key . TIPS ON PR EDI CTIVE TE XT IN PUT Erase a c har acter âÂÂPr ess the Clear key . Press and hold the Clear key t o clea r more tha n one character . Chan g e b etween the diff erent charact er c ases âÂÂPr ess t he # key to chang e betwee n the char acter cases Abc () , abc () , a n d ABC () . Note that if yo u press the # ke y twi ce qui ckl y the p redi ctiv e tex t input is turned off. Inse rt a nu mbe r in let ter mo de â Press and ho ld the desired n umber key , or press t he Edit key , and select number mode. Key in the nu mbers you want, and press OK . Inser t symbols an d punctu ation mar ks â â¢ The most comm on symbol s and punctu ation marks are available u nder t he 1 ke y . Pres s the 1 k ey repeatedly to find the desired e ntry . ⢠Press and hold the * key to open a list of special cha racters. Scroll through the list, and press Se lect to select a c haracter ; or press the Edit ke y , an d sel ect Inser t s ymbo l . The predictiv e text input will try to guess wh ich commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is ne eded. The order and availability of the pu nctuation marks depend on th e language of th e dictiona ry . Choo se from m ultiple entri e s âÂÂPress the * key r epeat edly to view the mat ching words the dictionary h as found one by on e. Choo se predic tive te xt options âÂÂWh en a word has been entered with p red icti ve text on, press the Edi t key , sel ect Pr ed ic tive text , and select one of th e following opt ions: ⢠Mat ches âÂÂView a list of words that correspond to y our key presses. Scroll to the desired wo rd, and press the Scro ll ke y . ⢠Insert word âÂÂA dd a wor d (up to 32 le tters) to th e dict ionar y by usi ng traditi o nal t ext input. When the di ctionary beco mes full , a new wor d replac es the ol dest adde d word. ⢠Ed it w ord âÂÂO pen a view wher e you c an edi t the word . Thi s opt ion is available only if th e word i s active ( underline d). ⢠Off âÂÂTurn off predictiv e text in put for a ll editors in t he phon e.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 55 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging WRITE COM P OUND WORD S Write th e first half of a com pound word, and confirm it by sc rolling right. Write the last part o f the compoun d word, and pre ss the 0 key to add a space to comp lete th e co mpound word. Copy and paste text If you wa nt to cop y text to t he clipboard, the followin g is the easiest m ethod: 1 T o sel ect let t ers an d words, pr ess and hold the Edit key . At the same t ime, scrol l right or le ft. As the selecti on m oves, text is highlighte d. T o select lines of text, pr ess an d hold the Edit key . At th e same ti me sc roll d own or up. 2 To end the se lection, releas e the Scrol l key w hile h olding the Edit key . 3 To copy the t ext to the clipboard w hile still hold ing the Edit key , press Copy ; or rele ase t he Ed it key , a nd press it once to open a list of editin g commands, for example, Copy or Cut . If you want to r emove the selec ted text f r om the document , press the Clear key . 4 T o paste the text int o a d o cument, p ress and hold the Edi t ke y , an d pres s P aste ; or press the Edi t key on ce, a nd sel ect Pas t e . ⢠WRITE AND SEND MESSAGES Bef ore you c an create a mu l ti media m essag e, writ e an e -mail message, or con nect t o your re mot e mailbox , you must have the correct co nnection setting s in place. See âÂÂSettings neede d for multimedia m essa g ingâ on page 56. Opt ions in th e tex t mes sage edit or a re Send , Add recipient , Inse rt , De lete , Ch ec k names , Message details , Sending options , Hel p , and Exit . 1 Select New message and one of the following options: T ext message â Create and send a text message . T o se nd a pic ture mess age, sel ect O ptions > Inser t > Pict ure . Eac h pictu re mes sage is made u p of s everal text m essages . Therefo re , sending one picture message may cos t more th an sending one text message. Mult imedia mess age âÂÂCreate and sen d a multi media message (MMS). Copyright protection s may prevent some images, ringtones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or fo rwarded. E-m ail â Create and send an e- mail. If y ou h ave not set u p you r e- mail account, you w ill be prompted to do so.
56 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 2 Press t he Scro ll key to s elect rec ipients from the con tacts dire cto ry , or write the phon e number or e-mail address of the recipient in the To field if y ou a r e se nding an MMS or e-mail to the recipient. Press the # key to a dd a semi colon ( ; ) to separate each recipien t. 3 Scroll to th e message field. 4 Writ e t he m ess age. Y our device su p ports the sen ding of t ext messages beyond the normal 160- character limit. If your message exceeds 16 0 charac ters, it will b e sent as a series of two or more m essages. In t he navi gation bar , yo u can s ee the m essa ge lengt h indi cator co unting backwa rds from 160. For example , 1 0 (2) means that you can sti ll add 1 0 characters for the text to b e sent as two m essages. Using special (Unicode) characters such as ë, â, á, ì will ta ke up more space. To add a media ob ject to a multime dia messag e, select Options > Inse rt n ew > Im age , So und c lip , Video c lip , or Slide . Select the item you wish to add. 5 T o send the me ssage, s elect Opt i on s > Se n d , or press the Send key . Settings needed for multimedia messaging Y ou m ay rece ive the s ettings a s a s mart mes sage from your ne twork operator or service provider . Se e "Smart messages" on page 57. For ava ilability of a nd subscript ion to data services, c ontact your ne twork operator or service provi der . Selec t Me s sa ging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Access point in use and select the access p oi nt you created. See "Multimedia m essages" on p age 62. Settings needed for e - mai l Before you can send, recei ve, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-m ail to a separate e-ma il account , you m ust: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP). See "Conn ection" on pa ge 6 8. ⢠Define you r e-mail settings. See "E-mail" on page 63. Follow the ins truction s given by your remote mailbo x and Inte rnet service provider . ⢠VIEW A MULTIMEDIA PRESENTATION When you receiv e a mult imedia message that includes a presen tation, s elect Play pres entation . The presentati on opens and starts. A multime dia m essage conta ining pre sentation c ontent c an still be viewed as a standard mu ltimedia message.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 57 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging Object s with in the pres enta tion may not start automat ically . I f, for exa mple, a video does not play when th e presentation starts, move to the video clip obje ct, and press the Scro ll key . All objects can be selected indiv idually and ope ned. ⢠INBOXâÂÂRECEIVE MESSAGES Opt ions in Inbo x are Open , Cre ate mess age , Reply , Delete , Message details , Mo ve to folder , Mark/Unm ark, He lp , and Exit . Wh en there a re unr ead m essa ges in Inbox , the icon changes to . In Inbo x , the message icons indicate the kind of message : View multimedia objects Opt ions in Obj ect s are Open , Save , Send , Hel p , and Exit . T o see the available media obje cts in the multimedia mess age, open the message, and sele ct Options > Obj ects . I n Objects you ca n vie w files th at ha ve be en inclu ded in the mu ltime dia me ssa ge. Y ou ca n ch oose to s ave th e file in your phone or send it, for example , by Blueto oth connec tion to anot her compat ible devi ce. Impor tant: Multimedia m essage objects may contain viruses or be harmfu l to your d evice or PC. Do n ot open an y attac hment if you a re not su re of the tru stworth iness of t he sender . See "Certif. mana gement" on page 73. Smart messages Y our ph one ca n rec eive ma ny kinds of sm art mes sages; text messages tha t contain data (also called over-the-air (O TA) messages). To open a received smart mess age, open In box , scrol l to the smar t mess age ( ), and press th e Scro ll key . Pict ure me ssage âÂÂSaves the p icture i n th e Picture messages folder in G allery for later use; select Optio ns > Sa ve pic ture . If yo u receive a business card file that has a pictu re atta ched, the picture will be s aved to Contacts as we ll. An unread text message An unread smart mess age An unre ad multime dia mes sage An unre ad service message Data received by Bluetooth connection An unkno wn mes sa ge typ e
58 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Busi ness card âÂÂSav es th e cont act in fo rmati on; sel ect Op tio ns > S av e bu sin ess car d . I f certific ates or s ound file s are attached t o bu siness cards , th ey will n ot be s aved. Ringing tone âÂÂSa ves the ringi ng tone to Galler y ; sele ct Op ti ons > Sav e . Operat or lo go âÂÂSaves the logo; selec t Opti ons > S ave . The operator logo can now be seen i n the st andby mode in stead of th e netw ork operat orâ s ow n identific ation. Calendar en try âÂÂSa ves the en try to Calendar ; selec t Opti ons > Sav e to C al enda r . Web message âÂÂSaves the bookmark; select Options > Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to t he Bookmar ks list in bro wser servic es. If a message contains both browser ac ces s point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Opt ions > Sa ve all ; or to view the bookmark and access point informa tion separately , sele ct Opti o ns > View details . If yo u do n ot wa nt to save all data, select a setting or bo okmark, open the details, and select Opti ons > Save to Setti ngs or S ave to bookmarks , de pending on what you ar e view ing . E-mai l notifi cation âÂÂTells y ou how m any new e -mails you have in your remot e mailbox. An extend ed notificat ion may list m ore detaile d information such as subje c t, se nder , attach ments, and so on. Wal l et â Recei ves pa yment cards , loya lty card s, a ccess cards, addre ss ca rds, RFIDs, and t ickets . In addition , you can receive a text mes sage service numb er; voice mail nu mber; profile settin gs for remote synchroni zation; access po int settings for the browser , multimed ia messagin g, or e-m ail; pres ence a nd IM settin gs; a ccess point login sc ript settings; or e-ma il settings. T o save the settin gs, se lect Opt ions > Sa ve to SM S s ett. , Sa ve to Voice ma il , Sa ve to Se ttin gs , or Save to e-m ail se tt. Service messages (networ k service) Service messages can be, for example, notifications of news h eadlines, and they may contain a te xt messag e or address of a browser service. F or availability a nd subscription, contac t your service provider . â¢M Y F O L D E R S In My folder s yo u can o rganiz e you r mess ages int o fold ers, crea te new folders, and rename and delete folde rs. Y ou c an use Te m p l a t e s to create text tem plates for messa ges th at yo u send often. To create a new templa te, selec t Op ti ons > N ew tem plat e .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 59 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging ⢠REMOTE MAILBOX (NE T WORK S ERVICE) When you open th is folder , y ou ca n conne ct to y our remote mailbox to do the following : ⢠Retrieve new e -mail head ings or messages. ⢠View your pre viously retrieved e-mail headings or messages without logging in to the e -mail server . If you s el ect New message > E-mail in Messag ing , a nd you h a v e not s et up your e-mail accoun t, you will be pro mpted to do so. See "W rite and send me ssages" on p age 55. When yo u create a new mailbo x, the name yo u give to the mailb ox automa tica lly replaces Mail box in Mes sag ing . Y ou can have up to six mailboxes . Open the mailbox When you open th e mailbox, you c an choose whethe r you wa nt to view the pr evi ous ly retrieve d e-mail messages and e-ma il headings w ith or w ithout connec ting to the e-m ail server . When you scroll to your mailbox and press the Scro ll key , Connect to mail b ox? appears. S elect Ye s to con nec t to you r mailb ox o r No t o v i ew pr ev io u sly re t ri eve d e-mail messages while not l ogged in to the e-mail server . Another way to start a c onnect ion is to select O ptions > Conn ect . Retrieve e- mail messages If you are not l ogged in to the e-m ail server , sele ct Option s > Conn ect to st art a connection to a re mote mailbox. 1 When you ha ve an open con nection to a remote mailbox, sele ct Option s > Retriev e e-mai l and one of th e following: New â Retri eve all n ew e-mail messages t o your p h on e. Sele ct ed âÂÂRetri eve onl y the e- mail mes sages that have been m a rked. Use the Mark/U nmark > Mar k or Unma rk c omma nds to sele ct m ess ages one by one. See "Comm on actions for all applications" on page 23. Al l âÂÂR etrieve al l messa ges fro m th e mailbo x. To c ance l re tri evi ng , p ress Can ce l . A fte r you ha ve retr iev ed th e e-m ail message s, you ca n co ntinue vi ewing them o nline . 2 Select Optio ns > Disconnect to close th e conn ection a nd vie w the messages offline from the e-m ail server . 3 To open an e-m ail mes sage, scroll to t he e- mail you w ant to view , and press t he Scro ll key . If the e-mail m essage h as not bee n retrieve d (arrow i n the icon is point ing outwards) and you are offline from the e-mail server , and select Open , you will be asked if you wan t to retrieve this me ssage from t he mailbox .
60 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia To view e- mail atta chments , ope n a mess age tha t has th e at tachmen t indicator , and se le ct O ptio ns > Attachm ents . In At tach ments , you can retrieve, open, or save attachments in supported formats. Y ou can also send at tachm ents by B luetoo th conne ction. Impor tant: E-m ail attach ments ma y con tain virus es or othe rwise be harmful to y our device or PC. Do not ope n any a ttachme nt if you are not su re of the trustworth iness of t he sende r . If your m ailbox uses the IM AP4 protocol, you can decide whether to re trieve e-mail headings on ly , m ess ages only , or messages and attac hments. With th e POP3 protocol, the opt ions are e-mail headings only or messages and attachme nts. See "E-mail" on page 63. Delete e -mail messages To dele te a n e- ma il fro m the p ho ne wh ile still r etai ning it i n th e rem ot e ma ilbo x, sel ect O pti ons > Delete > Phon e only . The ph one mirrors th e e-mail headings in the remote m ailbox. If y ou de lete the messag e conte nt, the e -mail he ading stays in your ph one. If you wan t to remove the hea ding, delet e the e-mail message from your remo te mailbox first ; then ma ke a co nnect ion from your pho ne to the re mote mailbox again t o up date th e stat us. To delete an e-mail from both the phone and the remote m ailbox, select Option s > Delet e > Phone and serve r . If you are not logged in to the e-mail server , the e-mail will be delete d from your phon e. Duri ng the nex t conn ection to the remote m ailbox, it will be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the PO P3 protocol, messages marked to be de leted are removed on ly after you h ave closed the co nnection to the rem ote ma ilbox. UNDELETE ME SSAGES WHEN OFFLINE FROM TH E E-MAIL SERVER To u ndelete an e-mail from both the phone and server , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted durin g the n ext connection ( ), and select Option s > Unde lete . Disconnect When y ou are online , select Option s > Disconn ect to end the d ata ca ll or G PRS connec tion to the remo te mailbox. ⢠OUTBOX Outbox is a temporary storage plac e for messages t hat are wait ing to be sent. Status of the messages in Out box are as follows: Sen ding â A conne ction is being m ade and th e message is being sent. Waiting or Queue d âÂÂW hen there are tw o similar ty pes of mes sages in Outbo x , one of th em is w aiting until the firs t one is sen t.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 6 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Messaging Resend at (time)âÂÂSe nding ha s failed. The phon e will try to se nd the me ssage ag ain after a tim e-out period. Press Sen d if y ou want to resta rt the sending imm ediately . Def erred âÂÂY ou can set doc uments to be on hold w hile th ey are in Out box . Scroll to a message th at is be ing sent, and selec t Opt i on s > De fer send ing . Failed âÂÂThe maximu m numbe r of sendin g attempts has bee n reache d. If you were trying to send a text m ess age, ope n the messa ge an d chec k tha t the sending s ettings are correct. ⢠VIEW MESSAGES ON A SIM CARD Select M ess agin g > Op ti ons > SIM mes sag es . ⢠CELL BROADCAST (NETWORK SERVICE) Select Me ssaging > Option s > Cell b roadcast . Y ou m ay be a ble to rece ive m essag es on various t opi cs, su ch as weather or t raff i c condition s, from your service provider . For available topics and relevant topi c numbers, con tact your service provider . In the main view you can se e: ⢠The status of t he topic: for ne w , su bscribed me ssages an d for new , unsubscr ibed mess ages. ⢠The topic nu mber , topic name, and whethe r it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. You will be no tified whe n messages belonging to a flagged topic have arrived. Opt ions in C ell bro adcast are Open , Subscribe or Unsub scrib e , Hotma rk or Remove hotmark , T opic , Settin gs , Help , and Exit . Note: A packet data (GPRS) conn ecti on may preve nt cell broadcast recep tion. C ontac t your network operato r for t he corr ect GPRS s etti ngs. See "GPRS" on page 7 0. ⢠SERVICE COMM AND E D ITOR Select M ess agin g > Op ti ons > Se rvi ce c om ma nd . Key in and send service requests (also know n as USSD comman ds) for network services to you r service provider (for e xample, a reque st for activation com mand s). ⢠MESSAGING SETTINGS Messag ing settings ha ve been divided int o groups according to th e different messag e types . Scroll to the s etting s you want to e dit , and press th e Scro ll key .
62 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia T ext messages Select M essa gin g > Op tio ns > S ett ings > Text me ssa ge to ope n the following list of settin gs: Messag e cent ers âÂÂLists all the m essage c enters that have been defined. Msg. cente r in us e (mes sage cent er in u se)âÂÂDe fin es which m e ssag e center is used for delivering text messages an d smart messages su ch as picture messages. Option s when edi ting messa g e c enter se tting s ar e Edit , New msg. center , Del ete , Hel p , and Exi t . Receiv e repor t (delivery report )âÂÂWhen this netw ork se rvice i s set to Ye s , the status of th e sent mess age ( Pe n d i n g , Failed , or D eli v ered ) is show n in the reports (network servic e). Me ssage v a li dity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the message is removed from t he message service center . Note that the network m ust support this fe ature. Maxi mum t ime is the ma ximu m amount of t ime allowed by th e network. Mess ag e sent as âÂÂThe opt ions a re Te x t , Fa x , Pa g i n g , an d E-m ail . For furth er information, con tact your ne twork operator . Change this option only if you are sure that yo ur message ce nter is able to conv ert text messa ges into the se other formats . Prefe rred co nn ection âÂÂYou can send text mess ages ov er the norm al GSM network or b y GPRS, if su pported by the network. Rep ly vi a same ct r . (network servic e)âÂÂBy setting this option to Ye s , if the r ecip ient repl i es t o you r message , the return message is sent u sing the same mes s age service cente r numbe r . Note that this may not work betwee n all operators. Multimedia messages Select M essag ing > Option s > Se ttings > Mult ime dia m essage to open t he following list of settin gs: Acces s poi nt in us e âÂÂSel ect whi ch acc ess poin t is us ed as the p referre d con necti on f or the mul tim edia m ess age c ent er . See "S etting s ne eded for multimedia me ssaging" on page 56. If you rec eive multimed ia message settings in a smar t message a nd save them , the received set tings are aut oma tic ally used f o r t h e access poin t. See "Smart messages" on page 57 . Mult imedia rece ption â Select from the following: ⢠Only in home net. âÂÂReceiv e multi media me ssag es only when you are i n yo u r home ne tw ork. Wh en you a re o ut sid e yo ur home ne tw ork, mu ltim ed ia me ssage re ception is turned off. ⢠Alwa ys o n âÂÂAllow your phon e to re ceive mu ltimedia m essages . ⢠Off âÂÂDo n ot receive multime dia mes sages or adv ertiseme nts at all.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 63 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging If Only in home net. or Alway s on is sel ect ed, you r phone can ma ke an a ctive data call or GPRS connection w ithout y our knowle dge. On r eceiv ing msg. â Select from the following: ⢠Retr . im media tely â The phone will try to retrieve multime dia messages instantly . If there a re m essages w ith deferre d statu s, the y will be retrie ved as well. ⢠Def er ret rieva l âÂÂThe multime dia messa ging ce nter wil l save th e messa ge to be re trieved la ter . Whe n you want to re trieve the m essag e, set On re ceiv ing ms g. to Retr . imm edia tely . ⢠Reje ct mes sa ge âÂÂRe ject m ultimedia m essag es. The multime dia mes sage cente r will delet e the message s. Allow anon. m essages âÂÂSe lec t No , i f y o u w a n t t o r e j e c t m e s s a g e s c o m i n g f r o m an anonym o us sen der . Receive ads âÂÂDe fine w hether yo u wa nt to allow reception of multi media message adverti sements or not. Receive repo rt âÂÂS e t to Ye s i f you want the status of the sent message ( Pe n d i n g , Fa i l e d , or Deliv ered ) to be sh o w n in the reports. Rece ivin g a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-m ail address might not be possible. Den y rep ort se ndin g âÂÂC hoose Ye s if yo u do n ot want your phone to send delivery re ports of rece ived mu ltimedia m essages. Message validity (network service)âÂÂIf t h e r ecip ient of a message cann ot be re ache d within the validit y period, the message is removed from the multim edia mes sage center . Max imum t ime is the maximum amount of ti me allowed by the ne twork. Ima ge size âÂÂDefin e the size of the image in a multim edia m essage. Th e options are Sma ll (up to 16 0x120 pixels) and Large ( u p to 6 40x480 pix els). E-mail Select M essa gin g > Op tio ns > S ett ings > E-m ail . Sele c t Mailboxe s to open a list of mailboxes that have been defined, or select M ailbox in use to choose which mailbox you w ant to use. Options when e diting Mailbo x settin gs a re Editing options , Ne w mailbox , Delete , Hel p , and Exit . If no mailboxe s have be en defined, you will be prompted t o do so. The following list of se ttings is show n (thi s information is available from your e-mail service provider): Ma ilbox na me âÂÂWrite a descriptive nam e for the m ailbox. Acces s poi nt in use ( must be defined)âÂÂThe Internet access po int (IAP) used for the mailb ox. Choose an IAP from the lis t. See "Conne ction" on page 68.
64 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia My e-mail address (m ust be define d)âÂÂWrite the e-mail address given to y ou by your service provider . The address must contain the @ characte r . Replies to your messag es ar e sent to thi s addres s. Outgo ing m ail se rve r (must be defined)âÂÂWrite the IP address or host name of th e compu ter that sends yo ur e-mai l. Send message (network service)â Define how e-mail is sent from your phon e: ⢠Imme diate ly âÂÂA con nection to the mailbox is started imm ediately after you have s elect ed Sen d . ⢠Dur i n g next conn. âÂÂE-mail is s ent whe n you connec t to yo ur remote mailbox th e next t ime. Send copy to self âÂÂSel ect Ye s to save a copy of th e e-mail to yo ur remote mailbox and to the address d efined in My e-mail add r ess . Inclu de sign atur e âÂÂS ele ct Ye s if you want to attach a signature to yo ur e-m ail messages an d to st art to write or edit your signat ure text. Use r name âÂÂWrite y our user name, giv en to you by yo ur service provider . Pa s s w o r d âÂÂW rite you r passw ord. If yo u leave thi s field bl ank, you will be prompted for the password whe n you try to connect to your rem ote mailbox. Inco ming ma il serv er (mu st be defined)âÂÂW rite the I P address or host name of th e compu ter that receiv es you r e -mail. Ma ilbox ty pe â Defines the e-mail protocol you r remote mailbox service provider recomme nds. T he options are POP 3 and IMAP 4 . This s etting can be selected onl y once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from th e mailbox settings. Sec urit y âÂÂUsed w ith the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure th e connec tion to the remo te mailbox. AP OP se cure login âÂÂUsed w ith the PO P3 protocol to encrypt the sen ding of passwords to the remot e e-m ail server . Th is option i s only shown if PO P3 is selecte d for Mail box type . Re trie ve at tac hme nts âÂÂRetrieve e-mail w ith or withou t attac hments . This option is only shown if the Mailbo x ty pe is set to IM AP4. Retriev e head ers âÂÂLim it the number of e-mail headers you wa nt to re trieve to your phon e. The options are All and Us er defin ed . Used with th e IM AP4 protocol only . Service messages When yo u sele ct Messaging > Opti o ns > Settin gs > Ser vice mes sage , the following list of setting s opens: Ser vice me ssag es âÂÂC hoose wheth er or not you want to a llow rece ption of ser vic e me ssa ges . Download messages âÂÂChoos e if you wa nt to receive s ervice m essage s only from authoriz ed sources.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 65 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Messaging Cell broadcast (network service) Check with yo ur service provider about whethe r C ell broadc ast is available and what the av ailable topics and related topic nu mbers are. Se lect Mes sagin g > Op tio ns > S ett ings > C ell broa dca st to change the setting s: Recept ion â On or Off . Lang uag e â All allows you to receiv e cell broadcast message s in every possible language . Selec ted allows y ou to ch oose in w hich la nguages you wish to receive cell broadcas t mess ages. If th e language you prefe r is no t in the lis t, sel ect Othe r . T o pic de tection âÂÂI f you receive a message that does not belong t o any of the existing topics , s e lect On t o save the topic nu mber a utomatica lly . The topic number is saved to the topic list and show n wi thout a n ame. Select Off if you do not wa nt t o sa ve ne w topi c num bers a uto mati ca lly . Other settings Select M essa gin g > Op ti ons > S ett ing s > O ther to ope n the follow ing list of se ttings: Sav e se nt m e ssa ges âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multime dia mes sage, or e-mail th at you have se nt to the Sent folder . No. of sav ed ms gs. âÂÂDe fine how man y sent mes sages will be sa ved to the Se nt folder at a time. Th e default limit is 20 messa ges. Wh en the lim it is rea ched, the oldest me ssage is deleted. Me mory in use âÂÂDefin e t he mem ory st ore. Cho ic es ar e p hon e m emo ry or memory card, if on e is used.
66 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 8 Set ting s Select M enu > Setti ng s . 1 Scroll to a setting group, and press the Scro ll key t o op en i t. 2 Scroll to a setting yo u want to change and press t he Scro ll key to : ⢠Switch between options if there are only tw o ( On /Off ). ⢠Open a list of options or an e ditor . ⢠Open a slider view (scroll righ t to increas e or left to decrea se the value). Y ou m ay be able to rece ive some settings from you r service provider in a smart message, or some set ting s may be preprogrammed in to the phone . See "Smart messages" on page 57 . ⢠PHONE Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Phon e > Ge neral , S tand by m ode , or Di s pla y . General Phon e language âÂÂY ou c an change the language for the display texts in your phone. This c hange may also affect the format us ed for date and tim e and th e separators used, for example, in cal culations. If you select Automa tic , the phone selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the display text language, you must restart t he phone. Note: Ch ang ing th e se tt ings for Phone langua ge or Writing langua ge affects ev ery application in your phone and the change remains effecti ve unt il you ch ange these se ttings aga in. Writ ing l ang uag e âÂÂY ou can change th e writing langu age of your phone. Changing the langu age affe cts t he follow ing feature s: ⢠The cha racters av ailab le when you p ress any ke y ( 1 âÂÂ9 ) ⢠Th e predic tive te xt dic tiona ry us ed ⢠The spe cial char ac ter s t hat are av ailable whe n you press the * and 1 keys Pr edic tiv e te xt âÂÂSet pred ict ive t ext inp ut On or Off for all editors in the phone. Select a language for entering predictiv e text from th e list available. Y o u can also ch ange this settin g when you a re in an editor . Press the Ed it key , and s elec t Pr edic tive tex t > On or Off .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 67 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings Welcom e note or log o âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed brie fly each time y ou switch on t he phone. Select De faul t if you wa nt to us e the default image or a nimation. Se lect Te xt to write a welc ome note ( up to 50 letters ). Select Im age to choose a photo or picture from Ga llery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂY ou can r eset some of the setti ngs to the ir orig inal val ues. To do this, you need th e lock code . See "Security" on page 72. Afte r resetting the sett ings, the p hone ma y take a longer time to power on. All doc uments and file s t hat you ha ve created are l e ft as the y are. Standby mode Left selec tion ke y and Right selecti on key â Y ou can change the shortcu ts that appear ov er the Left selecti o n key a nd Right selection key in the stan dby m ode. In addition to the applications, you c an have the s hortcut poin t to a function , for example, New messag e . Display Brightness âÂÂAdjust the slide bar between Dark an d Bright . Scr een saver timeo u t âÂÂThe screen saver is activated after the screen sav er time-out period. When the s creen saver is active, the display is cl eared and you can se e the scre en sav er bar . To deac tivate t he scree n save r , p ress any ke y . â¢C A L L Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Ca ll > Se nd my cal ler ID , C all wa itin g , Aut omati c redial , Summary af ter call , 1-to uch dialing , Any key ans w er , or Line in use . Send my caller ID (network service) This service allows you to di splay you r phone num ber ( Ye s ) or hide your n umber ( No ) from the person you call. Th is option may be set by your n etwork operator or service provider when you subscribe. Call wa iting (network service) The networ k w ill no tify you of a ne w incoming c all w hi le you have a ca ll in progr e ss. Select Acti vate to re quest the network t o activ ate call waiting, Cancel to request the n etwork to deactiv ate call waiting, or Check status to ch eck if th e function is active or not. Automatic redial When this s etting is ac tivate d, your phone at tem pts to co nnect the call a maximum of ten tim es after a n un succes sful call attempt. Press the End key to stop automa tic redialing.
68 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Summary after call Activa te this s etting i f you want th e phone to b riefly dis play th e approxim ate duration of th e last call. 1-touch dialing Selec t On , and the number s assigned to the 1-touch dialing keys ( 2 âÂÂ9 ) can be diale d by pressi ng and holdin g the ke y . See "Assig n 1-to uch dial ing key s" on pa ge 34. Anykey answ er Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key , exce pt t he Rig h t select ion key , the Po w e r ke y , and the End key . Lin e in use (netw ork serv ice) This setting is shown only if th e SIM card supports two subscriber nu mbers, that is, two ph one lines . Select the phon e line ( Li ne 1 or Line 2 ) you w ant t o use for making c alls and sending short messages. Calls on both line s can be answ ered regardl ess of the sel ected line . Y ou c annot make calls if you se lect Line 2 and have not subsc ribed to th is netw ork service. To prevent line selection, s elect L ine c hange > Dis able if your SIM card supports this funct ion. T o change this se tting, you need th e PIN2 code. â¢C O N N E C T I O N Select Menu > Se ttings > Conn ection > Acc ess po ints , GPRS , Dat a cal l , o r Co nfigur ati ons . Access points An access point is where your phone connects to the mobile Internet by way of a data call or pack e t d a ta co nnecti on . A n access poi n t ca n be p rovi d ed, fo r example, by a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), ser vice provider , or network operator . Many servic e providers require an Int ernet access poin t (IAP) for y our default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a browser access point. Contact your servic e provider for m ore informati on. To define acce ss point s etting s, select Menu > Sett ings > Conne ction > Acc ess poin ts . If you have n ot yet use d you r phone to make a WAP co nnect ion, you may nee d to contact yo ur servic e prov ide r for assistance with the first-time con nectio n. Fill in th ese settin gs from t he top beca use you r Dat a bea rer se l ec t ion determine s which fie lds are a vailable: ⢠Conn ection na me âÂÂGive a de scriptive nam e for the data c onnect ion.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 69 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings ⢠Data b ear er âÂÂThe options are GPRS and Data ca ll . The data bearer selection affects the other fields that a re available. F ill in al l fields marke d with Mus t be defi ned , or with an asterisk. Othe r fields can be left empty , unles s you have been instructed oth erwise by your service provider . To u se a data con nection, your network operator or service provider must support this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. ⢠Access point name (fo r packet dat a only )âÂÂTh e access poi nt na me is n eeded to establ ish a conn ection to the G PRS network . Y o u obtain the access point name from your netw ork operator or service pro vider . ⢠Dial-u p number (fo r Dat a cal l only)âÂÂEnte r the the modem telephone number of the access poin t. ⢠Use r na me â Ente r a us er na me i f th e se rvic e p rovide r req uir es it . Th e us er name m ay b e need ed t o make a dat a conn ection an d is usually provided by the ser vice prov ider . The us er name is ofte n case -sensi tive . ⢠Promp t passwo rd âÂÂI f you mu st key i n a ne w pass word every tim e you l og on to a server o r if you do n ot want t o sa ve your password to the phone, cho ose Ye s . ⢠Pa s s w o r d âÂÂA passwo rd may be needed to make a data c onnect ion and is usually provided by the service provider . The password is often case-sensitive. When you a re writin g th e password, the characte rs you enter a re sh own bri efly an d the n cha n ge d to aster isks (*) . The ea sies t way t o enter numbers is to press and ho ld the n umber you want to enter , an d then continue enterin g lette rs. ⢠Auth enticati o n â Norm al or Secur e . ⢠Homepage âÂÂThis setting de pends on what you a re setting u p. Writ e e ither the service address or t he address of the multimed ia messaging center . ⢠Dat a cal l type (for data ca ll only)â Analog , ISDN v .1 10 , or ISDN v .120 defi nes w hethe r th e pho ne use s an a nalog or digita l co nnecti on. Th is se tting depends on both your GSM ne twork operator and your Internet service prov ider (ISP) becau se some G SM netw orks do not sup port cer tain typ es of ISDN connec tions . For de tails, co ntact y our I SP . If I SDN co nnection s a re available, they conne ct more quic kly than analog methods. ⢠Maximum da ta speed (for da ta call onl y)âÂÂT he opti ons are Automatic , 9600 , o r 14400 , depen ding on what yo u hav e chosen in Data call type . This opti o n all o ws y o u to l imi t the m aximum conn ection speed when G S M data is used . High er data rates ma y cost m ore, depen ding on th e servic e provid er . These sp eeds repre sent the maximu m speed at which yo ur connectio n w ill operate. During the connect ion, the operating speed may be less, depen d ing on network conditions.
7 0 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia ADVANC ED ACCESS POINT SET TINGS If yo u need to enter a dvanc ed settings , co ntac t y our In tern et se rvic e prov ider . T o a ccess advanced a ccess point settings, sele ct Menu > S ettings > Conn ection > Access poin ts , selec t the access po int you want to m odify , an d selec t O ptions > Adv anced sett ings . Y ou c an then define the follow ing settin gs: ⢠Phon e IP address âÂÂThe IP addre ss of your phone ⢠Primar y name serv er âÂÂThe IP addre ss of the prim a ry DNS server ⢠Sec on d. nam e se rve r âÂÂThe I P address of the secondary DNS server ⢠Proxy s erv . addr ess â The IP add ress of the prox y server ⢠Proxy p ort nu mb er âÂÂThe port num ber of the prox y server These additional set tings are shown if you se lected Data ca ll as the Da ta bearer type: ⢠Use cal lback âÂÂThis opt ion allows a serve r to c all yo u bac k once y ou make the ini tial call. C ontact y our service provider to subscribe to this s ervice. The phon e expects that the callbac k will use th e same data call settings . The netw ork must support that type of c all in both d irections. ⢠Callback type âÂÂThe options ar e Use serv er no. or Use ot her no. As k you r service provider which setting t heir con figuration uses. ⢠Callback number âÂÂK e y in the phone data ph one numbe r that the dial back server u ses. Usually , this n umber is th e data call phon e number of your ph one. ⢠Use PP P compressio n â Wh en s et to Yes , th is opti on speed s up the dat a tra nsfe r , i f the remote PPP server supports the compression. If you hav e problems with es tablishing a co nnec tion, try setting th is to No . Co nta ct your servic e provider for gu idance. ⢠Use login s cript âÂÂThe option s are Ye s or No . ⢠Logi n script âÂÂInsert the login script. ⢠Mode m in itiali zati on (mode m initialization s tring)âÂÂThis option controls you r phone u sing modem AT comman ds. If modem init ialization is re quired, enter characters specified by your service provider or Inte rnet service provider . GPRS GPRS ( general packet radio service) is a netw ork se rvice that a llows mobile phones to send and receive data ov er a n IP -based network. GPRS i s a d ata bearer that enables wirele ss ac cess to data netw orks, such as the mobile In ternet. The applic ations that may use GPR S are mult imedia , IM and t ext mess aging, pr es enc e, streaming, browsing sessions, e-mail, data sync, Java⢠application downloading, and the PC dial-up (such as Internet and e -mail). To use GPRS technology , you mu st first do the following: ⢠Contact you r servic e provider for a vailability and subs cription. ⢠S ave the GP RS se ttin gs for eac h of th e applica tions u sed.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 7 1 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings For information on pricing, contac t your service provider . To de fin e GPRS connection settings, select Me nu > Setti ngs > Conne ction > GP RS , a nd spe cif y th ese sett in gs: GP RS con nec ti on âÂÂIf you se lect When available and your ne twork supports packet data, the phone registers to the GP RS net work. Also, st arting an activ e packet d ata connection, for exam ple, to s end and re ceive e-mail, is quicke r . If you select Wh en needed , the ph one will use a packe t da ta co nne ction only if yo u start an applicat ion or ac ti on th at ne ed s i t. The G PR S c on nec t ion ca n b e c l ose d after the applica tions no longer use it. If there i s no GP RS cover age and y ou have chose n Wh en avail able , the phone periodica lly tries to e s tablish a packet data conn ection. Acces s poi nt âÂÂTh e access point name is nee ded when you use your phon e as a packe t dat a mode m to yo ur com pute r . Data call Onlin e time âÂÂThis set ting af fect s all acce ss points usi n g a GSM data ca ll. If there are n o actions, the data call is dropped automatic ally after a t ime-out period. Select Use r def ined ( in which c ase you ente r a tim e) or Unli mite d . Configurations When y o u open a message that contain s co nfiguration settin gs for your phone, the me ssage is displaye d in this viewer . If yo u do not h ave a ny configu ration settings messages, this scree n will be e mpty . To delet e a messa ge from th is scr een, pr ess the Clear key . Options in the co nfigurations v iewer are Save , Message details , and Mov e to folder . ⢠DATE AND TIME Select M enu > Setti ng s > Date an d time . The D ate and time settings allow you to define t he date and time used i n your phone, as well as c h ange th e date and time form at and separators. Y ou can also chan ge the following se ttings: Clock type âÂÂSel ect An alog or Dig ital to change how the c lock is displayed in the standby mode . See "Clock" on page 88. Clock alar m tone âÂÂC hange s the t one p layed when t he cloc k rea c he s an al arm t ime. Auto t ime update âÂÂAllow s the n etwork to update time, da te, and time zon e informat ion to you r phone (network servic e). For the auto tim e update setting to take effect, th e phone needs to be restarted. Che ck any alarms because they may be affect ed by th e au to time update. GMT off set âÂÂC ha nges t he ti me zo ne fo r the c lock time . Day light -sa ving âÂÂSe ts daylight saving time on or off.
72 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠SECURITY Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Se curit y > Ph one and SI M or Certif. management . Phone and SIM If your ph one requests a s ecurity cod e, refer to the follow ing explanation s to determine wh at you should enter . If y ou forget or lose a PIN or PUK code or if you have no t rece ived s uch a code, conta ct your s ervic e prov ider . Y ou can change the followi ng codes: lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . The PUK (pe rsonal unblocking ke y) code is required t o change a blocked PIN code. The PUK2 c ode is required to c han ge a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, c ontact your service provider for the codes. The PUK and PUK 2 codes are 8 digits long. Avoid using security co des similar to emergency numbers, su ch as 9 1 1, to prevent acciden tal dialing of the eme rgency nu mber . ⢠PIN cod e re quest âÂÂW hen the PIN code request is act ive, the code is reques ted ea ch time the p hone is switche d on . Note that deactiva ting the PIN code request m ay not be allow ed by some SIM cards. ⢠PIN cod e (4 to 8 digits) âÂÂThe PIN code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN c ode is usually su pplied w ith the SIM c ard. ⢠After three cons ecutive incor rect PIN code ent r ies, the PIN code is b locked. I f the PIN co de is blo cked, you need to unbl ock th e PI N cod e bef ore yo u can use th e SIM card again. See also the in formation below ab out the PUK c o de. ⢠PIN2 code (4 to 8 digits)âÂÂTh e PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards and is required to acc ess some functions, such as fixed dialin g numbe r s (FDN). ⢠Aut olock pe riod â Y ou can set an autol oc k period, a ti me-out after which the ph one is au tomatic ally l ocked a nd c an be used only if the corre ct lock code is entered. Key in a num ber for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the a utolock period. To unlock the phon e, key in t he lock code . When the phone is lock ed, calls may still be possible to the official e mergency number programmed into y our phone. ⢠Lock co de (5 digit s) â The loc k code can be u sed to lock the ph one and keypad to av oid unauthorized use. The fact ory setting for the loc k code is 12345 . T o prevent unaut horized use of your phone, change the lock code. K e ep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. If you forget or lose the lock code, contact you r service provider . ⢠Lock if SI M changed âÂÂSele ct Ye s if yo u want the ph one to pr ompt for the loc k code when an unknown, new SIM car d is inserted in to your phone. T he phon e mainta ins a list of SIM cards th at are re cogni zed as the ownerâÂÂs cards.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 73 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings ⢠Fixed dialing âÂÂYou can restrict your ou tgoing calls to selec ted phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. Y ou n eed the P IN2 code for this function. When this function is active , you can on ly call those phone num bers th at are in clud ed in the fixed dialing list or wh ich begin w ith the sam e digits as a phone number on th e list. Press t h e Scrol l k ey to set fix ed dialing on. W hen fixe d dialing is activ ated, calls s till may be possible to th e official e mergency num ber programme d into your phone. To add new nu mbers to th e fixed dialing list, select Options > New conta ct or Add from Contacts . Options in fixed dialing are Open , Call, A c tiv . fixed dialing or Deact. fixed dialing , New co ntact , Edit , Del ete , A dd to Contacts , Add from Contacts , Find , Mark/Unmark , He lp , an d Exit . ⢠Closed u ser group ( network service)âÂÂY ou can specify a group of people who m you can ca ll an d who can call y ou. Fo r more in for mat io n, con tact your netw ork operator or servic e provider . Select one of the following: Def aul t âÂÂActivate the default group agreed on with the net work operator . On âÂÂUse another group ( you need to know the group index number). Off âÂÂDo not u se closed user groups. When calls are limited t o closed user groups , calls s till may be possible to the offic ial emergency n umber programme d into your phone. ⢠Co nfir m SIM serv ices (n etw ork ser vice) âÂÂS ets t he p hone to disp lay confirmat ion messages when you are u s ing a SIM card servic e. ⢠Restore ser v er âÂÂR es et yo ur co nnect ion s etti ngs allo wing you t o re cei ve new settings from y our service provider . Certif. management Opt ions in C ert if. ma nag emen t are C ertificate deta ils , Delete, T rus t settings , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exi t . In the ce r tificate manageme nt main view , you can see a list of au thor ity certificates that have been stored in y our phone. Scro ll r ight to see a list of pe rsonal certif icates, if available . Authority ce rtificates are us ed by so me br o wse r se rvi ces , su ch as ba nkin g se rv ices , for chec king signature s or serv er certificates or other aut hority certific ates. Ser ver cert ificates are used to improv e security i n the conn ection bet ween the phone and the gateway . The phone receives the ser ver cert ificate from th e service prov ider before th e co nnec tion is establi she d, and it s validi ty is che cked using th e aut hority certifi cates sav ed in th e phone. Serv er cert i fi cates ar e not sav ed. Server certi ficates m ay b e need ed, fo r exam ple, w hen you wan t to d o the f ollowin g: ⢠Connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confide ntial information .
74 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Decrease the risk of viruses or other malic ious software and be sure of the authent icity of so ftware whe n down loading and installing software . Impor tant: Note t hat e ven if th e use of ce rtifi cat es mak es th e risk s involve d in remote con nections a nd software in stallation con siderably smaller , they must be used correctly in orde r to benefit from incr eased security . The existence of a certificate does not offer any pro tection by itself; the certificate manage r must con tain correc t, authentic , or trusted ce rtificates fo r incre ased security to be available . Certificates have a restricte d lifetim e. If E xpired c ertifi cate or Cert ifica te not valid y et is show n even if the c ertificate should be v alid, check that the c urrent da te and time in your device are correct. Before ch anging any c ertificate settings, y ou must m ake su re that yo u really trust th e owne r of the certificate and t hat the c ertifica te really belo ngs to the listed owner . CHA NGE THE TRUST SET TINGS OF AN A UTHORIT Y CERTI FICATE Scro ll to an authority certi ficate, and select O ptions > Trust setting s . D epending on the ce rtificate, a list of the applications tha t can use the selected c ertifica te is s hown. For example: ⢠Inte rne t âÂÂTh e certificate can ce rtify e-ma il a nd imaging server s. ⢠Ap p. in stal la tion â The c ertificate can certify the origin of ne w so ftware. ⢠CALL RESTRICTION (NETWOR K SERVICE ) Select Menu > Sett ings > C all res tric tion . Call restric tion allo ws yo u to restrict outgoing a nd inco ming calls w ith your p hone. For this function, y ou nee d the re stricti on password, which you ca n obtain from you r service provider . Select Optio ns , and choose one of the follow ing: Act iv ate âÂÂReque st th e net work to se t call res triction o n. Cancel âÂÂSet the s elected call restriction off. Check statu s âÂÂChec k whe ther th e c alls ar e blocke d. Ed it r est r . pa ssw . â Change the restriction password. Canc el all r est rict. âÂÂC ancel all activ e call re striction s. Y ou cann ot restrict incom ing calls while call forwa rding or fixed dialing is ac tive. See "Call forwarding (ne tw ork serv ice)" on page 29 . See a lso âÂÂSecurityâ on page 72 . When calls are restricted, cal ls still may be possible to cert ain official em ergenc y n umbe rs.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 75 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Settings â¢N E T W O R K Select Me nu > Set ting s > Networ k > Operator selec tion or Cell in fo di splay . Operator selection Aut om ati c âÂÂSet the phone to automatically search for and select one of th e cellular n etworks a vailab le in you r area. Man ual âÂÂSelect the desired network manually from a list of networks. If the connec tion to th e manually selecte d network is lost, the phone w ill sou nd an error tone and ask you to select a netw ork ag ain . The se lecte d netw ork m ust have a roaming a greem ent w ith your h ome ne twork, that is , the opera tor whose SIM card is in your phone. Cell info display On or Off âÂÂSet the phon e to indicate when it is used in a cellular netw ork based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception (network servic e). â¢E N H A N C E M E N T Select Menu > Setti ngs > Enhanc ement and one of these options: Enh anc eme nt in us e âÂÂI f yo u are usi ng an enh ance ment suc h as a loopset, headset, or TTY adapter , you m ust activate it by selecting Headset , Loop set , or TTY . If you ha ve activ ated a loopset, th e head set will use the s ame settings as the loopset. Headse t , Loopset , TTY , a n d Handsfre e âÂÂFor each of these ite ms, define the following se ttings: ⢠Default profile âÂÂS elect the profil e to be a cti vated eac h time yo u connec t a cert ai n enh ancement to y o ur p hon e. See " C hang e the profi l e" on page 82. ⢠Aut om ati c an sw er â Set the phone to answ er an incomin g call autom atically after 5 seconds time when you conn ect a cert ain enha ncem ent to your phone. If t he inc oming ca ll alert is set to Beep once or S ilen t , you mu st answer th e phone ma nually . Th is option is not av ailable for TT Y . See also âÂÂE nhanc ement indicatorsâ on page 22.
76 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 9 T o ols an d appl ications Select Menu > T ools to access c ommon tools and a pplications. F or instructions on voice mail a nd 1-touc h dialing, se e âÂÂCall voic e mailâ on page 26 and âÂÂ1-touch dialin gâ on page 27. ⢠APPLICATION MANAGER Select Me nu > Tools > Ma nage r . In App. ma nager you ca n instal l new comp atible Symbian op eratin g system applications (SIS file s) and Ja va application s (Java MIDle ts and MI Dlet suites). Y ou can also update and unin stall a pplications from the phon e and mon itor the installation h istory . Opt ions in App. m an ager are Install , Vie w de tails , V iew certificate , Update , Go to web address , Remo ve , View l og , Send log , Se t tings , App. do wnlo ads , Help , an d Exit . Whe n y ou o pen A pp. manag er , you can se e a list of: ⢠Applicati ons saved in App . man ager ⢠P arti ally in stall ed ap plic ati ons (ind icated by ) ⢠Fully in stalled applic ations th at you can remo ve (indica ted by ) Y ou c an only us e Sym bian opera ting syst em application s with a .SIS ex tension. Y our phone supports J2MEâ¢Java applications. Do not download P ersonalJav a⢠applications to your phone; they cannot be installed. Install applications Y ou c an install appl ications t hat are specifica lly intende d for this phone an d suitable for the Symbian operating s ystem. If you in stall an a pplication t hat is not intended specifically for this phone, it may func tion and look different from w hat was originally in tended. Applications may be downloaded to your phone during browsing, re ceived as attach ments in multime dia messa ges or e-m ails, or rec eived by Blue tooth connection from another de vic e, for examp le, a phone or a c ompatible PC. Impor tant: Onl y install a pplications from s ources tha t offer adequa te protection agains t harmful softw are.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 77 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia T ools and applications T o increase protecti o n, t h e applic ation installation sy stem uses digital signatures and certific ates for applicatio ns. Do not ins tall the applic ation if App . m anage r gives a security warni ng during installation. If you in stall an u pdate or rep air to an existing appl ication, th e original applic ation is removed and t he update or repair take s its pl ace. Y ou must have the original application or a fu ll backup copy of it in order to re store it after it h as been rem oved. To restor e the o rigin al appl icati on, fir st rem ove th e upda ted or r epair ed application, and th en ins tall again from the original application or the bac kup c opy . During installation , the phon e checks t h e integrity of th e application to be insta lled . The phon e sh ows in form ation a bout t he check s bei ng c arried o ut, a nd you a re gi ven optio ns on w het her to c onti nue or cance l the in stal latio n. Once the phon e has chec ked th e integri ty of th e applic ation , it is inst alled on y our phon e. INSTA LL APPLIC ATIONS Ope n App . man ager , scroll to t h e applicatio n, and select Opti ons > Install to start the installati on. Y ou c an also s earch the phone memory or the me mory card, select th e applica tion, and press the Sc ro ll key to start the installation . Some applic ations may give th e option of partial installa tion, all owing you to select t he particu lar com ponents of an applica tion that you want to install. If you are installing an applica tion without a digital signature or a certificate, the phone w arns you of the risk s. Cont inue installa tion onl y if you a re abs olutely sure of the origin and conte nts of the application. INS TAL L JAV A⢠APPL IC ATI ON S The .JAR file is required for in stallation. If it is missing, the phone may ask y ou to download it. If there is no access point define d for App. man ager , you will be asked to select one. When you are downloading the .J AR file, you may need to ente r a user na me an d passw ord to acce ss the server . Y ou obt ain th ese from the supplier or m anufacture r of the appl ication. ⢠T o start a dat a connection an d to view ex tra information abou t the application , scroll to it a nd select Op tions > Go t o web addre ss . ⢠T o start a data c onn ection and check i f there is an update a vailable for the application , scroll to it a nd select Op tions > Upda te . JAVA S ETTINGS T o chan ge the defau lt acce ss point tha t a Java applicatio n uses for d ownloadi ng extra da ta, sele ct Op tions > Set ting s > Acc es s point . See "Access points" on page 68. T o change th e security settings that determine the actions that a Java application is permi tted to d o , sele ct Options > Settings . Not all Java appli cations pe rmit you to cha nge the s ecurity se ttings.
78 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Remove an application 1 Scroll to th e application and select Options > Remove . 2 Press Ye s to confirm the remov al. If you re move an applicatio n, you can only reinstall it if you h ave the origina l application or a full back up of the re mo ved ap plicatio n. If yo u remo ve a n application, you may no long er be able to open documents create d with that app licat ion. If anoth er a ppl icat ion d epe nds on t he a pplic ation tha t you re move d, the oth er application may stop working. Refer to the docume ntation of t he installed a pplication for deta ils. ⢠FILE M ANAGER Select Me nu > Tools > F ile mngr . Opt ions in F ile ma nager are Open , Send , Del ete, Move t o folder , Copy to fo lder , New folder , Mark/Unmark , Re nam e , Fi nd , Vie w details , Memory de tails , Help , and Exit . In File man ager , you can browse, open, and manage files and folders in the phone m emory or on th e memory card, if you use one . Ope n File ma nager to se e a lis t of t he folders in t he phone me mory . Scroll right to se e t he f olders on the m em ory c ard , if you use one. Y ou can bro wse, open, and create folders, mark, copy an d move items to folders. See "Common actions for all applic ations" on page 23 . Not all fo lders are visible in File man ager ( for e xample, syst em folde rs ar e not visible) . View memory consumption If you h ave a memory ca rd install ed on your phon e, yo u will h ave a ch oice of two memory view s, one for the phone mem ory and one for the memory card. Scroll right o r left to m ove from one me mory tab to another . To chec k mem ory co nsumpt ion of the cu rrent me mory , sele ct Options > Me mory detai ls . The phone calcu lates the approximate am ount of free me mory for storing data and installin g new a pplications. In the memory views, y ou can view the mem ory cons umption of the diffe rent data groups: Cal en dar , Contacts , Docu ments , Messag es , Ima ges , So und file s , Vi deo cl ips , App licat ions , Mem. in use , an d Free memory .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 79 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia T ools and applications ⢠V OICE COMMANDS Select Menu > T ools > V oice co m. . Opt ions in Voice c omman ds are A dd vo ice command , Ope n , New application , Playback , Chan g e , Delete , Delete all , He lp , and Exi t . Y ou can use voice comm ands to start applications and profile s, and to dial numbers from Contacts , without ha ving to look at th e phone display . Y ou record a word, or words, ( voi ce comm and) and then say this voice command to open an application, activate a profile, or dial a numbe r . Y ou can hav e only one voice command pe r item. Any spoken words can be a voic e comm and. When reco rding, hold the ph one at a short distance away from your mout h. After the sta rting tone, say cle arly the wo rd, or words, you want to record as a voic e comm and. V oice comm ands have the same requirements as voice tags. Before recording a voice comm and, see âÂÂRequire ments for voice tagsâ on page 33. Note: Y ou mu st sa y the voice com mand ex actly as yo u said it whe n you recorded it. This may be difficult in , for examp le, a n oisy env ironment or during an e mergency , so you should n ot rely solely u pon voice com mands in all circumsta nces. Add a voice command to an application 1 In Vo i c e c o m m a n d s , scroll to the application to which you are addin g a voic e command, and select Option s > Add voice command . T o ad d a voice com mand to a profile, you must h ave the Pro files folder open and a specific profile sele cted. Pre ss â StartâÂÂ, t hen speak af ter tone is dis played . 2 Press Start to record a voice c ommand. The phon e sounds a starting tone , and the n ote Speak now is displaye d. 3 Say t he voice c omm and. The phon e will stop rec ording after approx imately 5 seconds. Aft er recording, the phone plays the recor d ed command. V oice command sav e d is displa yed, and a beep sounds. A sym bol can be seen next to the application. If you do not want to save the recording, pre ss Qui t be fore the recording stops .
80 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Add an application to the list Y ou can assign vo ice comma nds to othe r application s that are n ot listed in th e Vo i c e c o m m a n d s mai n vi ew . 1 In the V oice comman ds main v iew , s elect Opt ions > New application . Available applications are display ed. 2 Scroll to th e application that y ou want to add, and p ress Sele ct . 3 Add a voice command to the new applic ation. See "Add a voice command to an application" on page 79. Use a voice command to start an application 1 In the standby mode, press and hold th e Right sel ection key . A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. 2 When y ou start an a pplication by saying a voice command, h old the p hone a sho rt di stance fr om you r mout h, and sa y the voice co mman d cl early . The phon e plays the original voic e com mand and starts the appli cation. 3 If the phone plays the wrong vo ice command, press Retry . R epl ay , eras e, o r chan ge a vo ice co mm and T o repla y , erase, or c h a nge a vo ice co mmand, scr oll to the item that has a voic e command (in dicated by ), and select Options and one of the following : Playback â Listen to the voice c omm and again. Delet e âÂÂEra se the voice co mman d. Change âÂÂRecord a ne w voice comm and. Press St art to re cord. ⢠DEVICE MANAGER This feature is ope rator dependent and ma y not be available on all phones. Con tact your se rvice provide r for informa tion and availabili ty . Select Menu > T ools > Dev . mgr . Opt ions in D evi ce man age r are Co nnect , New profile , Edi t profile , Delet e profile , En able or Disable configurations , Vi ew l og , Hel p , and Exit . When you ne ed hel p wi th difficult phone c onfiguratio ns, D evi ce man ager allows a third party , s uch as your servic e provide r , to assist you directly with phone settings. To allow device ma na gement, your phone must establish a connection and synchronize with the third partyâÂÂs server . Y ou can start the synchronizatio n session from your phon e, and you can accept or reje ct server-ini tiated synch ronization attempts.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 8 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia T ools and applications A device ma nager profile must b e defined before you can conn ect to a server . The th ird party who is assisting you ca n help defin e the profile settings: Ser ver na me âÂÂDisplay name of the server . Ser ver I D âÂÂRemote device manager server ID. Serv er passw ord âÂÂP a ssw ord used in ser ver alert s. En ter th e pa ssw ord that mu st be provided by the de vice manager server when synch ronizing with you r phone . Acces s poi nt âÂÂInter net ac cess p oint you r ph one us es to estab lis h the se rver connection. Choose from the list of acce ss points defined in your ph one. See "Access points" on page 68. Host address âÂÂDe vice manage ment server URL. Po r t â Device managem ent server port. Use r name âÂÂY our u ser nam e for this profile. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂY our passw ord for this profile. Allow configuration âÂÂDev i ce management allowed on this server . Select Ye s or No . Auto-acc ept all r eq s . âÂÂA utomatic or approve d device manage ment on this ser ver . S elect Ye s t o allow sync hronization w ithout you r verifica tion, or select No to verify e ach syn chronization attemp t.
82 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 1 0 P e rsonalization ⢠PROFI LES Select Menu > Pr ofiles . Use Prof iles to adju st and c ustomize sound tones for different events, environments, or c aller groups. The c urrently sele cted profile is define d at the top of the di splay in the standby mode. If the Normal profile is in use, only the curre nt date is shown. Opt ions in Prof iles are Act iv at e , Cu st om ize , Cre ate n ew , Delete profile , He lp , and Exi t . Change the profile 1 Select Menu > Pr ofiles . A list of profiles opens. 2 Scroll to a profile, and select Op tio ns > A ctiv ate . Sh ort cut : T o ch an ge the profi le i n the s tan dby mode , pres s the Po w e r key b riefly , scroll to the profile yo u wa nt to a ctivate, a nd press OK . Create and cu stomize profiles T o cre ate a new profile , select Op ti ons > C re ate ne w . To modify a profile, select Opti ons > Customi ze . Scroll to th e se tting you wan t to change , and pre ss the Scr oll ke y to o pen the c hoices: Ring ing to ne âÂÂSe t the ringing tone for voice calls. Cho ose a rin ging ton e from the list. Press any key to stop th e sound. If a memory card is us ed, tone s stored on it have the icon nex t to the tone name. Rin ging tones u se sha red memory . See "Shared memory" on page 13. Y ou can also change ringing t ones in Contacts . See "Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group" on page 33. Ringin g type âÂÂWhe n Ascen ding is selecte d, the ringing t one volu me start s from level on e and inc reases le vel by level to t he set v olume l evel. Ring ing volu me â Set the volume level for the ringing an d mess age alert tones. Messag e alert t one âÂÂSe t the t one f or mes sages . IM a lert ton e âÂÂSet t he tone f or instan t message s. Vibrating alert âÂÂSet t he p hone to vibrat e at in comin g voic e call s and m essag es. Ke yp a d to n e s âÂÂSe t the volu me level for keypad tones.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 83 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P ersonalization Warnin g tones âÂÂIns truct the phone to sound a warnin g tone, for e xample, when the battery is running low on power . Aler t for âÂÂSet the phone to ring only wit h calls from pho ne num bers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from pe ople outside the selecte d group will have a silent ale rt. Y ou can select A ll calls , or you can sele ct items from a list of contact groups, if yo u have created t hem. See "Create contact groups" on page 35. A vai labi lit y â Choose Av ailab le , Bu sy , o r Not avail able to be displayed as your presence inform ation for th e selected profile . This option is dis played only if you activate the proper Sy nc. wi th Pr ofiles setting in the Pr esence application. See "Presence settings" on page 3 8. User avail ab . alerts âÂÂEnter a cus tomized mess age (up to 40 charact e rs) to display your current pre sence status f or the se lected profile. Th is option is displayed only if you activate the proper Sync. wi th Profi les setting in the Prese nce application. Se e "Presence settings" on page 38 . Prof ile name âÂÂIf you are creat ing a n ew profile, us e this s etting t o give it a name. Y ou c an rename a profile a nd give it any n ame you want . The No rmal profile cann ot be renamed. ⢠THEMES Select Menu > T hemes . Y ou can ch ange the look of your ph one display by act ivat i ng a theme . A th eme ca n in clude t h e idle screen wa llpaper , color pa lette, screen saver , and background image in Go to . Edit a theme for more detaile d personalization. When yo u op en The m es you will s ee a list of the avai labl e themes . The cur rent ly activ e them e is indicated by a c heck mark. Scroll right to se e the th emes on th e memo ry card, i f you u se one. T o previ ew a theme, scroll to the t heme, and sel ect O ption s > Pre view . P res s Se lec t to activ ate the the me. Y ou can activ ate the the me without previewing it by s electing Op tions > Appl y fro m the m ai n view . Opt ions in Themes are Preview , Apply , Edit, Th eme do wnl oads , Delet e, He lp , and Exi t . Y ou can cop y themes th at you hav e downloaded. To copy a theme from your memor y card to the phone memory , scroll to the theme and select Op ti on s > Copy to ph one m em. . To copy a theme from your phon e memory to the me mory card, scroll to the th eme an d select Options > C opy to m em. card. .
84 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Edit themes To personalize themes fu rther , you can group together elements from oth er th emes or im ages from Gal lery : 1 Scroll to a theme, and select Opt ions > Edit to change the following options: Wallpaper âÂÂChoose an image to use as a background ima ge in the stan dby mode. Select an im age from one of the available the mes or from Galle ry , where your ow n ima ges ar e saved. Col or pa lette âÂÂChan ge the colo r used on the di splay . Scr een saver âÂÂSelect what is shown on the screen saver bar . Choose to displ ay the time and date o r wr i te t he text yo u want d ispl ayed. T he locatio n and background color of the screen saver bar change s in one minut e intervals . Also, t he scree n save r change s to in dicate the number of n ew me ssag es a n d mis sed ca lls . Y ou ca n se t t he time th at e lap se s b efor e th e screen saver is activated. See "Standby mode" o n page 67. Ima ge in âÂÂGo to â âÂÂChoose an image to use as a background i m age i n Go t o . Y ou can select an image from one of the available the mes or from Galle ry , where your ow n ima ges ar e saved. 2 Select Back to acce pt the c hange s. 3 Select Options > Set to se lec t the cu rren t theme. Y o u c an prev iew the updated th eme by selecting Op tions > Previ ew . Not e that you ca nnot preview all elements . Restore themes To restore the curre ntly s elected theme to its original settings, s elect Op tions > Resto re orig. theme wh en editi ng a theme. â¢G O T O Press Go t o ( Right sele ction key) in the standby mode, or select Me nu > Extr as > Go to . In Go t o , you can store shortcu ts, sav ed browser pages, and links t o your f avorite photos , video clips, n o t es, re cor der s o un d f iles, and br owse r bo okma rks. Opt ions in Go to are Op en , Edit shortcut name , Mov e , Lis t view or Grid vie w , Hel p , and Exi t . Default s hortcuts in Go t o : âÂÂopens Calendar to t he cu rrent date , âÂÂopens the Mes sagin g inbox, and âÂÂopens the Notes edit or .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 85 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P ersonalization Y ou can only add shortcuts from preinstalled applications and functions. 1 Open the applica tion and scroll to the item that you want to add as a short cut. 2 Select Optio ns > Add t o âÂÂGo toâ , and press OK . A shortcut in Go t o is autom atically upda ted if you mov e the ite m to wh ich it poin ts, for exa mple , from on e fold er to anoth er . Hints on using shortcuts: ⢠To open a shortcut, scroll to th e icon, and press the Sc ro ll key . The file opens in the corresponding app lication. ⢠To delete a s hortcut, s croll to th e shortcut , and s elect Opti ons > Delete sho rtc u t . Removin g a shortc ut does not affect the fil e to which it refers. ⢠To change the shortcut n ame, select Op tions > Ed it sho rtcut nam e . Write the ne w name . This c hange affec ts only the s hortcut, n ot th e file or item to whic h the shortcut refers. The de fau lt shortcuts can not be deleted.
86 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 11 E x t r a s â¢N O T E S Select M enu > Ex tras > No tes . Y ou c an link not es to Go t o and sen d them to oth er devices. Plain text files (T XT forma t) you rece ive can be saved t o No tes . Press any key from 1 to 0 to s tart to write. Pre ss th e Cl ear ke y to cl ea r let ters. Press Do ne to s ave . ⢠CALCUL ATOR Select M enu > Ex tras > Calc ula tor . Op tions in th e calcu lat or a re Last r esu lt , Memory , Clear screen , Hel p , and Exi t . 1 Enter the firs t numb er of your calculation. To add a decimal, press the # key . If you m ake a mist ake, pre ss the Clear key t o eras e it. 2 Scroll to an arithmetic func tion, and press the Scrol l ke y to s elect it. 3 Enter the second num ber . 4 T o exec ute the cal culati on, sc rol l to and press t h e Scro ll key . Press and hold the Cl ear ke y to clea r t he r esult of th e pre viou s ca lcul atio n. Use and to view previous calc ulations and mov e in th e shee t. Note: Th is calcu lator has lim ited acc uracy and is designe d for simple calcu lations. Ro unding errors may occu r , espe cially in lon g division . â¢C O N V E R T E R Select M enu > Ext ras > C onv er ter . In Converter , yo u ca n co nvert mea sure s fr om on e unit to an othe r; for exam ple, you ca n con ver t length from yards to meters. Converter has limited accurac y and round ing errors may occu r . Convert u nits Opt ions in Con ver te r are Conversion type , Currency rates (not appli cable to other un its), Hel p , and Exit . T o make curr ency c onvers ions , you must first set t he ex chan ge rat e. See "Set a base curre ncy and exchange rate s" on page 87. 1 Scroll to Type , and press th e Scroll key to open a list of me asures.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 87 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras 2 Scroll to th e m easure yo u wa nt to us e, and press OK . 3 Scroll to th e first Un it field, and press the Sc roll k ey to open a list of avail able units. 4 Select the unit from whi ch yo u want t o conv ert, a nd pr es s OK . 5 Scroll to the next Unit field, and select t he unit to whic h you wa nt t o c onver t. 6 Scroll to the first Am ount fiel d, and ke y in t he val ue yo u want to c onvert . Press t he # k e y to add a decima l, and press the * ke y to ins ert the , - (for tempe rature), a nd E (expone nt) symbols. The se cond Amount fiel d changes autom atica lly to show the conv erted value . The con ver sion o rder ch ange s if you writ e a value in the s econd Amoun t field. The result is s h own in the first Am ount field. Set a base currency and exchange rates Before you ca n ma ke c urrency conve rsion s, y ou mus t cho ose a b ase currenc y (usually your dom estic currency) and add exchange rates. The rate of the b ase curre ncy is alw ays 1. Th e b ase cu rrenc y d etermin es th e conver sion rat es of t he other c urrencies. 1 Selec t Cur ren cy as the measure type, and select Options > Currency rates . A list of currenc ies opens with the current base curre ncy at the top. 2 To ch ange the b ase currenc y , scroll to the currenc y (us ually your dome stic currenc y), and select Optio ns > Set as base curr . . When you change base currency , all previously set exchange rates are reset to zero, and y ou must ente r new rates. 3 Add exchange rate s, scroll to th e currency , and k ey in a ne w rate, that is, how man y u nits of the currenc y equa l one unit of th e base currenc y you have select ed. 4 After y ou have inserted all the required e xchang e rates, mak e the c urrency conversions. See "Conv ert units" on page 86. ⢠V OI CE RE CORD ER Select M enu > Extra s > R ec order . Opt ions in V o ic e record er are Reco rd sou nd clip , Delete, Rename sound clip , Send, Go t o Gal lery , Settings, A d d to âÂÂG o toâ , Help , an d Exit . The voic e recorder allow s you to record te lephone con versations an d voice memos . If you a re recording a teleph one con versation, b oth parties w ill hear a tone every 5 secon ds during recording. V oice re corder cannot be used when a data call or GPRS c onnect ion is act ive. Rec or ded fi les a re st ored in Galler y . S ee "Gallery" on page 48.
88 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Select Opti ons > Rec o r d soun d clip , scroll to a function, and press the Scro ll key t o s elect it: â¢C L O C K Select M enu > Ex tras > Cl ock . Opt ions in C lock are Set alarm , Reset alarm , Re mo ve alarm , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Change settings To change the time or date , select Op ti on s > S ett ings . Se e also âÂÂDat e and tim eâ on page 7 1. Set an alarm 1 To se t a ne w al ar m , sel ec t Op ti ons > Se t ala rm . 2 Enter th e alarm time, and press OK . When the a larm i s active, the indica tor is show n. T o cance l an alarm, se lect Clock > Options > Remove alarm . Stop an alarm Press Stop to turn off the alarm. Press Snoo ze to stop t he alarm for 5 m inute s, after w hich it will res ume. Y o u can do this a maximum of 5 times. If t he a larm time is reac hed w hile th e ph one i s swi tche d off , t he p hon e sw itch es on and starts soun d ing the alarm tone. If you press Sto p , you rece ive a message asking w hether you w ant to a ctivate the ph one for calls . Press No t o s w i t c h o f f the pho ne or Ye s to make and re ceive c alls. Do not pre ss Yes when wireless phone use is prohibited or whe n it may cause interferenc e or dange r . Record Pa u s e Stop F ast forw ard Fa st r e w in d Play an opened sound file
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 89 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras P er sonalize the alarm tone 1 To pers on al ize t he al arm ton e, se lec t Options > Settings > Clock ala rm tone . Whe n yo u scr oll thro ug h the lis t of tone s, y ou ca n st op on a tone t o li sten to it before y ou ma ke you r se lection . 2 Press Select to s elec t the current tone. ⢠MEMO RY CARD Select Menu > T ools > M emory . Opt ions in Memor y card are Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Fo rmat mem. car d , Memory card n ame , Set password , Change pas sword , Remo ve password , Memory details , Hel p , and Exit . K e ep all me mory cards out of the reach of small childre n. For details on ins erting a memory card i nto th e phon e, see âÂÂIn sert t he mem ory cardâ on page 17 . Y ou c an use the memory c ard to back up informat ion from phone mem ory and to store your mu ltimedia files such as video clips, sound files, photos, messaging data, etc. Y ou r ph one may come with a Reduced Si ze M ultiMediaCard (RS-MMC ) that may contain add-on applic ations from independent developers. These a pplications are designed by th e devlopers to be compatibl e with your phon e. Nokia does not provide any w arranty or support for these applications. Contact the con tent provider for any ass i stance needed. Use only compat ible MultiM ediaCards (MMC ) with this device. Other m emory cards, s uch as Secure Digital (SD ) cards , do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compa tible with this device . Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memo ry card as well as the device, and data stored on the i ncompatible card m ay be corru pted. B Y USI N G THE APPLICA TION S PROVIDED ON THE RS-M MC, Y OU ACKNOWLEDG E THE SOFTWARE AND /OR APPLICATI O NS (COLLECTIVEL Y , THE "SOFTWARE" ) ARE PROV IDED "AS I S" W ITHOUT WA RRANTY OF A NY KI ND E XPRES S OR IMPL IED AND TO THE MAXIMUM E XTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICABLE LAW NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIA TES MAK E ANY REPRESENTA TI ONS OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS O R I MPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NO T LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITL E, MERCH ANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULA R PU RPOSE OR TH A T THE SOFTWARE W ILL NOT INFRINGE ANY TH IR D PAR T Y PATE N TS , C OP Y RI GH TS , TRADEMARKS OR O THER RIGHTS. T H E R E I S N O W A R R A N T Y B Y N O K I A O R B Y I T S A F F I L I A T E S T H A T A N Y A S P E C T O F THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET Y O UR REQU IREMENTS OR THAT TH E OPER A T ION OF THE SOF TW ARE WI LL BE UN INTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. Y OU ASSUME A LL R ESP ON S IB IL I T Y AND RISK FOR TH E SELE CTION OF THE SOFTW ARE T O ACHIEVE
90 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Y OUR INTENDED RESULTS AND FOR THE INSTALLA TION, USE AND RESU L TS OBT AINED FROM IT . TO THE MAXIM UM E XTENT PERM ITTED BY APP LICABLE LAW , IN NO EV ENT SHALL NO KIA, IT S EMPLO YEES O R AFFI LIA TES B E LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFIT S, REVEN U E, SALES, DAT A, INFORMATION OR COSTS OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES, PRO PERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY , I NTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS , OR FOR ANY DIRECT , INDIRE CT , INCIDE NTAL, EC ONO MIC, COVER, PUNI TIVE , SPECIA L OR CON SEQU ENTIAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND WHETHER ARISING UNDER CONT RACT , TORT , NEGL IGEN CE, OR OTHER THEOR Y OF LIABIL ITY A RISIN G OU T OF TH E IN ST ALL AT ION OR US E OF OR INA BILI TY T O USE T HE SO FTW ARE, E VEN IF N OKI A OR ITS AFFILIA TES ARE ADVISED OF THE PO SSIBILI T Y OF SUCH DAMAGES. BECAUS E SOME COUNT RIES/STATES/JURI SDICTI ONS DO NOT ALLO W THE ABOV E EXCLUSION OR LI MITA TION OF LIAB ILITY , BU T MA Y ALLO W LIAB ILITY TO BE LIMIT ED, IN SUCH CASE S, NOK IA, IT S EM PLO YE ESâ OR AF FILIATES' LIABILIT Y SHALL BE LIMITED TO U.S.$5 0. Nothin g containe d in this disclaimer s hall prejudice the statutory rights of an y party dealing as a consume r . Attach and remove the memory card adapter The RS-MMC comes with an adapter attach ment tha t allows you to use the card in regular sized MMC slots (for instance, in other Nokia phones or in a card reader). Be sure to rem ove the adapte r whe n you use the R S-MM C in your Nokia 667 0 phone. See " Insert the mem ory card" o n page 17. To remove the adapter , press t he arrow labeled Push to re lease the catch ( 1 ), an d gently pull the RS -MMC a way from t he adapter ( 2 ). To reattach the ad apter , locate the lon g side of the RS-MMC ( opposite from the side with the bevelled corner) and slide the card in to the meta l slots of th e ada pter . Make sure the RS-MMC is at tache d securely to t he adapter before y ou attempt t o use the card in anot her Nokia phone or in a card reader . Format memory card When a memory card is form atted, all data on the card is perman ently lost. Some m emory cards are supplied pre -formatted and ot hers require form atting. When format ting, t he memo ry card should always be formatted in your Nokia 667 0 phone to ensure correct operation. The memory acce ss and performance cannot be guaranteed whe n formatti ng with another operating syste m. 2 1 be velle d corner
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 9 1 Copy right é 2005 N okia Extras Y ou can us e Fil e manager to che ck for da ta o n a mem ory c ard be fore for matti ng it. See "File m anager" on page 78. To format a memory card, select Options > For mat mem. card , and select Yes to confirm. When form atting is comple te, key in a nam e for the me mory card (up to 1 1 le tters or num bers). Back up and r estore information Y ou can back up the phone memory and re store it to your ph one. To back up information fro m ph one memo ry to th e memory card, select Options > B ackup phon e mem. T o restore information from the m emory card to phone me mory , sel ect O pti ons > Restor e from ca rd . Lock the memory card Y ou c an set a pa ssword to lo ck your me mory card again s t unauthorized use . Select Opti o ns > Se t pass word . Y ou will be aske d to enter and confirm y our password. The passw ord can be up t o eight characters long. The password is stored in your phone a nd you do not have to enter it again while you are using th e memory c ard on the same phone. If you wa nt to use the memo ry card on anothe r phone, you will be a sked for th e password again to unlock the c ard. Unlock a memory card If you insert an other password-protected mem ory card in your phone, you w ill be pro mpted upo n startup to enter the password of the card. En ter the passwo rd, and press OK to unlock the card, or pre ss Can cel to leave the card loc ked. To unlo ck the ca rd lat er , sel ect M enu > Ex tras > M emo ry > Opt ions > Unloc k memo ry c ard . Enter the password, and press OK . Remove memory card password To remove a memor y card password ent irely , select Options > Remove password . Once the pas sword is remov ed, the memo ry card is un locked and can b e used on your ph one or anothe r phone with out a password. Check m e mory consumption Y ou can check the me mory consum ption of different data grou ps and th e available memory for inst alling new applications or softw are on you r memory card. Selec t Opt ions > Memo ry de tails .
92 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠WALLET Select M enu > Ex tras > Wal let . Wal l et prov ides you with a storage area for your pe rsonal information, such as credit and debit card numbers, addresses, and other useful data (for exam ple, user names and passwords). The inform ation stored in the w allet ca n be easily retrieved while browsing to autom atically fill in on line form s on browse r pag es, fo r exam ple , when the service as ks for credit card details. Data in the wallet is encrypted and prote cted with a walle t code that y ou define. Y ou can group wallet dat a into p rofiles that can be ac cessed, for example , for making purchases onlin e. Beca use o f the na ture o f th e walle t, it wil l autom atically close after 5 mi nutes . Enter the wallet c ode to re gain ac cess to the con tents . Y ou can ch ange t h i s auto matic ti me-ou t perio d, if r equired . See "W alle t setting s" on p age 95. Opt ions in Walle t are Ope n , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Enter the wallet code Each t ime you ope n the wallet y ou will be prom pted for a wallet code . When you open th e walle t for the first time, you mu st cre ate your o wn secu rity code : 1 Enter a code of y our choice (4âÂÂ1 0 alphan umeric characters), and pre ss OK . Y ou w ill be prompte d to verify the code. 2 Enter the same cod e, and pres s OK . Do not gi ve you r wall et cod e to any o ne e lse. If you ente r the wallet code incorrect ly on three cons ecutiv e attempts , the wallet application is blocked for 5 minut es. The block ed time in creases if further in correct walle t codes are e ntered. If you forget your w allet code, yo u will ha ve to reset the code, and you w ill lose all inf ormation stored in th e wallet. S ee "Reset the wallet and wallet cod e" on pa ge 95. Store personal card details Options when view ing or editing c ard details are Dele te , Hel p , an d Exit . 1 Select Cards from the main wallet menu .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 93 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras 2 Select a type o f card: P a yme nt ca rds âÂÂCredit and debit cards Loyal ty ca rds âÂÂMembership an d store cards Onlin e acc. ca rds âÂÂP ersonal u ser names and passwords to onlin e services Addre ss cards âÂÂBasic contact details for hom e/office Use r inf o car ds âÂÂCu stomized personal pre fe rences for online s e rvices 3 Select Options > Create new . An empty form opens. 4 Fill in th e fields, a nd press Done . Y ou can also receive card inform ation di rectly to the phone from a card issuer or service prov ider (if they offer th is service). Y ou are notified as to whic h category the card belongs. Save or discard the c ard. Y ou can view and rename a saved card, but you cann ot ed it it. Y ou can ope n, edit, or de lete the fields in the card. Any c hanges will be saved upon exitin g. Create personal notes P ersonal notes are a mean s of storing sensiti ve in formation, for exam pl e, a bank accou nt number . Y ou ca n access the data in a personal note from the browser or send a note as a m essa ge. 1 Select P e rson al notes from the main wallet m enu. 2 Select Options > Create new . An empty n ote opens. 3 Pre ss any key fro m 1 to 0 to start writing, and press the Clear key to clea r characte rs if ne cessary . 4 Press Do ne to s ave . Create a wallet profil e Once you have s tore d you r perso na l detai ls, y ou can com bine th em into a wa llet profile. Use a wallet profile to retrieve walle t data from different cards and categories to the browser . 1 Select Wallet pr ofiles from the main walle t men u. 2 Select Options > Create new . A new w allet profile form opens. 3 Enter a nam e for the profile in the Prof ile name field.
94 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 4 Scroll to each of the following fields, and press the Scro ll key t o op en a li st of select ions: P a yme nt ca rd â Select a card from the list. Loyal ty ca rd â Selec t a ca rd from the list . Onlin e acces s card âÂÂSel ect a card f rom th e list. Ship ping addr ess âÂÂSelec t an addr ess f rom the l ist . Bill ing ad dres s âÂÂBy default t his is Us e shippin g ad. If you requ ire a billi ng address that is different from the shipping address, select one from the billing address list. Use r inf o car d âÂÂS elect a ca rd from th e l ist. Re ceiv e e-r ece ip t âÂÂSelect a destination from the list. Del i ve r e-recei pt âÂÂSe lect T o phon e , T o e-m ail , or T o ph o. & e-mail . RFID sen din g âÂÂSe t to On or Of f . De fines w hether or n ot yo ur unique phon e identificat ion is sent with the wallet profile (for future de velopment dependent on RFID-based tic k eting). 5 Press Do ne to sa ve th e new profile. Retrieve information from wallet to your browser When usin g online mobile services support ing the wallet functi onality , you can upload t he data s tored in yo ur walle t to automatic ally ente r your de tails int o an online form. For example, by u ploading your p ayment card details, you do not ne ed to key in the car d number and expir ation date eac h ti me you n eed them (de pending on the c ontent being browsed). Also, you can ret rieve your u s e r n a m e a n d p a s s w o r d s t o r e d a s a n a c c e s s c a r d w h e n c o n n e c t i n g t o a m o b i l e service that re quires auth entication. See "Pu rchase an item" on page 1 1 0 . View tic ket details Y ou can re ceive notifi cations of electronic t ickets purchased online w ith the brow ser . R eceive d ticket noti fications ar e stored in t he walle t. To view the not ifications: 1 Select Tickets from the main Wa ll et me nu. 2 Select Options > View . Th e tick et deta ils are d is playe d in a form. None of th e field s in the t ick et notification form can be edited. Opt ions in Ti c kets ar e Vi ew , De let e , Rename , Mark/U nmark , He lp , and Exit .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 95 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Extras W allet settings Select Opti ons > S ettings from the main wa llet menu to m odify the following it ems: Wal l et c o de âÂÂChan ge your wallet code. Y o u will be prompted to e n ter the current code, create a ne w code, and ve rify the ne w code. RFID â Set t he ph one I D co de, typ e, and send ing o ptions ( for futu re de velop ment dependent on RFID-based tic k eting). Aut om ati c clos e âÂÂChang e t he automa tic tim e-o ut period (1â 60 m inutes). After the tim e-out period h as elapsed, the walle t code must be re -entered to gain ac cess to the con tents . Reset the wallet and wallet code T o re set both th e c ontents of the w allet and the w alle t code: 1 Ke y in *#737 0925538# in the standby mode. 2 Enter the ph one lock cod e, and press OK . See "Security " on page 72 . 3 To con firm t ha t th e dat a is era sed, pre ss OK . When openi ng the wa llet aga in, yo u mus t enter a new w allet code. See "Ente r the wallet code" on page 92. ⢠GAMES Select Menu > Ga mes . T o start a game, scroll t o the game icon, a nd press the Scroll key . For i nstructi ons on how to play the game , select Options > Hel p .
96 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 12 Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Select Menu > IM . Opt ions in Instant M essaging are Open , Login or Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . T ake te xt me ssagin g to th e next l evel b y exp er ien cing instant messaging in a wi reless en vironme nt. Engage in instant me ssaging with frie nds and family as lon g as you all use th e sa me IM se rvice. C heck with y our wireless s ervice prov ider for availability . Before you can start using IM on your phone, you must make s ure that yo ur phone can e stablish a GPRS connecti on. Yo u must also register wi th the IM servi ce you want to use. See â IM se rv ic e pr ovid er icon sâ on pa ge 96 fo r more in for mati on. Note: Due to va riations in IM and wirele ss service providers, y ou may not have a ccess to all of the fe atures describ ed in th is guide. ⢠IM SERVICE PROVIDER ICONS Since each IM service has its own display text and icons associated with it, the display text and icons on your phon e may appear differently for each IM service provider . If you have any questions a bout the differences in the various IM service providersâ display text an d icons, contact your w i reless service provider for more info rmati on. Exa mples of I M ic ons a nd th eir desc ri ptio ns are as follows: Contac t onl ine Contact not logged in to IM Contact bloc ked Tracking set for c ontact New unre ad message
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 97 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) ⢠REGISTER WITH AN IM SERVICE Before yo u can use IM , yo u must re gister wi th an I M serv ice to obtain an IM user name and passw ord . Y ou can obtain an IM u ser name and password by registering over th e I nternet ( using y our c omputer) with t he IM service provider y ou have selecte d to use. Du ring th e registration process, yo u will hav e the opportunity to creat e the user name and passw o rd o f your choice. For more informat ion about signing up for IM serv ices, contact your wireless s ervice prov ider . ⢠BEFORE USING IM Before you can u se the IM fe a tur e, your p hon e m ust have at le ast on e access poin t defin ed. See " Acce ss points" on pag e 6 8. An IM se rver m ust also b e defin ed in y our phon e: 1 Select Menu > IM > Opti ons > S etting s > Se rver s ett ings > Ser vers . 2 Select a s erver from the l ist, or select Option s > New server to d efine a new serve r . If you n eed he lp definin g a new server , conta ct you r wirele ss service provider or IM service provider . Y ou mu st also obtain a user name and password (see âÂÂRegister with an IM serviceâ on page 97). For mo r e information about si gning up for instant m essaging service s, contact your wireless se rvice provider . â¢L O G I N Select Menu > I M > Opt ions > Log in , ente r your us er name and pas sword , an d press OK . Afte r you h ave logged into IM initially , you h ave the optio n of a manual login or an automatic login. See â Autom atic loginâ on page 9 8. ⢠I M SETTINGS Y ou ca n cus tomiz e your IM set ting s, d epend ing upo n th e IM ser vic e you ha ve sel ecte d. S e l e c t O pti ons > Sett ings > IM setting s from the ma in IM m enu screen, and select the follow ing: Use s creen name âÂÂS elect Yes to key in a ni cknam e (u p to 10 char acters ). IM pr esence âÂÂSelect on e of the follow ing options: ⢠Acti ve for all âÂÂAll othe r users see you r status as online an d you receiv e availability information an d messag es from all ot her users. ⢠Acti ve for c ntcts. âÂÂEve n though only the c ontacts in IM con tacts s ee y our status a s online, you re ceive a vailability inform ation and m essages from all other use rs. ⢠No t ac tive âÂÂY ou r status to other users appears to be offlin e from th e IM service, bu t you re ceive availability inform ation and message s from all other use rs.
98 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Allow mes sage s from and A llow in vita tio ns fr om âÂÂThe se settings de fine whether you receive instant messages or group inv itations from All , IM co ntac ts onl y , o r None . Messag e speed âÂÂSelec t the sp eed at which new mess ages ar e disp layed. Auto-r eload availab . âÂÂCho ose how to upda te i nfor mati on whe n yo ur IM contacts log in or ou t of the IM se rvice. Select Auto maticall y or Manua lly . Reload user availab . â Use this setting to define wh ich IM conta cts are i ncluded in a manual or automatic status update . Select For all contacts to r efre sh the status information of all you r IM conta cts, or choose s pecific I M contacts . Automatic login Y ou can log in autom atically when y ou start th e IM applic ation. First yo u mu st ensure that y our IM us er ID and passw ord are entered for your IM server . To check this, go to the I M main menu, a nd sele ct O ption s > Sett ings > Se rver setti ngs > Servers and the IM s erver you a re us ing. Scroll to th e Us er ID and Pa s s w o r d fie lds to ente r your inform ation. To turn autom atic login on , scroll to t he IM login type fiel d in the Ser ver setti ngs sc ree n, and se lec t On app. st a rt- up . If you wan t to t urn automatic login off, se lect Manual . Set up presence status updates Presence allows you and other users to know who is online and available to cha t. Y ou can s et your phone to update a con tactâ s presen ce status aut o ma ticall y every time i t is changed. From the IM main m enu, select Options > Se ttings > IM se tti ngs > Relo ad us er av ailab. Y ou can also designate wheth er your own presence inform ation is update d when you log in to IM. From the IM ma in men u, select Opti ons > Settings > Ser ver se ttin gs > Pr esen ce log in typ e > Au to matic , A ut. in ho me net . (automa tic in h ome ne twork), On app. start-up , o r Man ual . For more information on the presence feature, see âÂÂPresenc e ( n etwork service )â on page 35. ⢠IM CONVERSATIONS Select Menu > IM > Co nver sations . Opt ions in Conv ersation s are Op en , De lete , Add to IM cont acts , New conversati on , Set auto re ply on , Blocking options , Cl ose conversation , Settings, Help , and Exi t .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 99 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Y ou can send i nstant messages to any o ne who uses t h e same I M service as y o u do, as long as you have that per sonâ s user name. Y ou ca n als o add th at perso n to IM c on tac ts du ring an I M con vers ation . Se e âÂÂIM cont actsâ on pag e 1 00 for more inform ation. More than one IM conversatio n can be active at the same time. Conversations li sts all ac tive co nversati ons by IM conta ct name. Se lect one of the nam es to open the conversati o n wi th that p erson. The co ntact âÂÂs name is displayed at the t op of t he screen, and as t he conversation pr ogresses, the most recent message appears at the bottom of the screen, causing the last message to move up one le ve l. Start a conv ersation Y ou must be able to select a contact who is online before you can begin a conversation. 1 From the IM main me nu, sele ct Conversations . 2 Select Options > N ew conv ersa tion > Se lect reci pien t or Enter Us er ID . If yo u choose Sel ect recipie nt , a lis t of your IM c ontac ts who are curren tly online is dis played. If you s elect Enter Us er ID , you mu st en ter the exac t user ID of the contact. After you select a recipient, a conv ersation view is opened with the re cipientâÂÂs name dis played at the t op of the screen. The conversation is still active, even if you leave t he convers ation v iew . Y ou can re turn to it when you want by selecti ng Conversati o ns from the IM main m enu. Write and send to contact 1 Start a new c onversation or open an ac tive one from Convers ations . 2 Enter you r mes sage in the field a t the bottom of th e scre en. See " Write text" on page 5 2. 3 T o send the me ssage, press t he Scro ll key , o r sele ct Opt io ns > Sen d . Th e mess age is di spla yed i n the co nvers ati o n v i e w for that cont act. Receive me ssage and reply When you receive an instant m essage , your phon e beeps (if the phone is not set to the Sile nt profile) and th e senderâ s reply appears b eneath the most recent mes sage in th e conv ersati on. Select Co nve rsations from the IM main menu an d open the co nversation wit h the new message indicated by the icon. Y ou can also select IM cont ac ts from the IM ma in menu, and the new message ic on is displayed by th e contact who sent you th e message. Select the name to open the conversation.
1 00 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Save To sa v e your conversation or group con versation, perform the follow ing steps be fore yo u end the conv ers atio n: 1 From the conversation view or group conversation v iew, select Options > Record c onv ers. . 2 In the Co nversa tion name screen, en ter a name for the co nversati on, and sel ect OK . The conversati on is saved as a note un der the Extras phone men u. 3 To stop recording the conversation, select Options > Stop rec ordin g . T o view sa ved con versat ions, se lect Menu > Ex tra s > Notes , and open t he co nver sati on yo u wa nt to vi ew . To de lete a saved conversation, highlight it in the list of Notes docum ents, and sel ect O pti ons > Delete . End a conversation Select Co nv er satio ns fro m the IM mai n menu , op en the con ver sati on yo u want to end, and select Opt ions > En d co nvers ati on . â¢I M C O N T A C T S Add to IM con tact s the nam es of your frie nds an d family with w hom you wan t to intera ct freque ntly t hr o u gh I M. Opt ions in IM c ont acts are Op en co nvers ation , Con tact details , Switc h tracking on or off , New IM contact , Edit , Delete , Blocking options , My se rver contacts , Se arch , Settings , Hel p , and Exit . Add manually or from phone Contacts list From the IM ma in men u, select IM co ntac ts > Option s > Ne w IM con tact and one of th e following: Ent er man ually âÂÂTh is option opens a new c ontact card. At a minimum , y ou must enter an ex act IM user ID in th e User ID field. Y ou may also enter a first name, last name, and ot her conta ct nu mbers on this contact c ard. If you w ant to modify t he contact card later , see âÂÂContactsâ on page 32. Add fr om Contac ts âÂÂThis option dis plays a lis t of entries from yo ur contact directory . T o select a contact to add to y our IM contacts lis t, scroll t o the contact , and press the Scroll key to select it ( this places an X in th e box beside the c ontact na me). W hen y ou have chosen a ll the con tacts you wa nt to a dd, press OK .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 10 1 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Search To s e arch for a person or group that is curre ntly online, fro m the IM con tact s scr een, sele ct Options > Search and one of the fo llowing: Grou ps âÂÂSelect t his option to search for an IM group b y Grou p n ame , Top ic , or Grou p mem bers . If you search by group m ember , you must enter the memberâÂÂs exa ct IM us er ID. Use rs â Select this op tion to sea rch fo r an IM user by Use râÂÂs n am e , User ID , Phon e number , or E-mail ad dres s . The search crite ria doe s no t have to be an exact match for the item for whic h you are s earching. Add contact to IM contacts during IM session 1 Select Conversations from the IM main menu. 2 Scroll to th e contact yo u want t o add, and select Op ti ons > Add t o IM co ntac ts . Yo u can al so open th e conversation, and select Opti ons > Add to IM co n tac ts . A conta ct card is op ened for th e new con tact, and th e co ntactâÂÂs IM u ser ID is automatica lly entered in the Use r ID field. Y ou may also sp ecify a first name, last name , and other contact ph one numbers on this contac t card. 3 Select Opti ons > O K . Re mov e From the I M main menu, select IM con tacts , the contac t you want to re move, and Del ete > Y es . Block and unblock To block a cont act, selec t the c ontact name in IM cont acts or in Conver sations , and sele ct Optio ns > Blockin g options > Add to blo cked list . To unblock one or m ore contacts from t he IM c ontacts list or from an open conv ersat ion, sele ct Op tions > Bl ocking options > Un block , scroll to the c ontac t, and press the Sc ro ll key to select it (this places an X in the box beside th e conta ct name ). When you have c hosen all th e contac ts you wan t to unbloc k, press OK . View blocked list From the IM contacts list or from an open con versation, select Op tions > Blockin g options > View blo cked list . Set or re move alert T o s et an alert for a contact to notify you whe n the contactâÂÂs a vailability changes, go to the IM c ontac ts scree n, and select the contact for whom you wan t to set an alert; then s elect Op tions > Switch trac king on . To remove th e ale rt, sele ct Options > Switch tracking off .
1 02 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia ⢠IM GROUP SESSIONS Select IM g rou ps from the IM main menu . The group featu re allo ws yo u to converse with multiple participa nts simultane ously . Y o u ca n create your o wn private group or be invi ted to join a live group in progress. During a group conversation, all messages are displayed in one group conversation view screen. Y ou can al so sav e a group conv ersation history . See âÂÂSaveâ on page 1 0 0. In IM g roups , a list of IM groups that you h ave saved or a re currently joined t o is s hown. The ico n next to a group indicates wh ether it is: ⢠A group that you saved an d are currently join ed to ( or ) ⢠A group that you saved bu t are not currently join ed to ( or ) ⢠A group tha t you are curre ntly joined to but h ave not saved ( ) Op tion s in th e IM g rou ps view are Ope n , Join group , Create new group , Lea ve IM group , IM group , Se arch , Settings , Help , an d Exit . Options when you have an IM grou p conversation ope n are Send , Se nd privat e msg. , Reply , Fo rwa rd , Send invitation , Leave IM group , A dd t o banne d list , IM group , Reco rd conv ers. or Stop recording , He lp , an d Exit . Create an IM group 1 Fro m the IM main menu, select IM g roups > Option s > Create n e w group . 2 Select each of the follow ing options and follow the promp ts to ente r the appropriate information: Grou p na me âÂÂEnter a name for the new group, and select OK . Grou p topi c âÂÂEnter a conv ersation topic for the group, and select OK . T he default topic is General . Wel c om e n ot e âÂÂEnter a we lcome n ote of up to 1 00 characters, and select OK . The we lcome note is displayed to any group membe r who logs in to the grou p. Grou p size â Enter the m aximum group size, and select OK . The de fault size is 1 00 memb er s. Allow se ar ch âÂÂDeter mine whet her s earch engine s are al lowed to sho w th e group as a search result. Select either Ye s or No . Edit ing r igh ts âÂÂDe termine w hich grou p members should ha ve rights t o edit group properties. To give a member editing rights , scroll to that member name and press the Scr oll key to mark the name. Whe n you are finishe d, select OK . The Grou p crea tor alw a ys has editing rights and c annot be u nmarked.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 03 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) Grou p mem ber s âÂÂDeterm ine whe ther to res trict the group to a lis t of mem ber s or to a ll ow a nyo ne to part i c ipate. Select eith er Selected only (g rou p is restr icted to a list of membe rs) or All (an yone can jo in the group). See â Ad d and remov e group m embersâ on page 1 03 for more in formation. Banned list âÂÂSelect contacts that cannot join th e group or send mess ages to the group . Allow p rivate msgs. âÂÂDeter m ine wheth er participants in the group are al lowe d to sen d private messages during a group. Select either Ye s or No . 3 Select Back . 4 Enter you r screen name and select OK . Y ou are con nected to the new group conv ersation in th e group con versation view . Join or leave an IM group From the IM main me nu, sele ct IM groups , and se lect the group y ou want to join. Enter your s creen name, a nd sele ct OK . Y ou are connec ted to th e group c onve rsat ion in t he group conv ersation view, and the name of the group is displayed at th e top of the screen. To lea ve the group, select Opt ion s > L ea ve IM g rou p . Add and remov e group members Y ou can restric t a grou p to selected mem bers by add ing and r emo ving co ntacts from the group m embers list. 1 In the group conversation view, select Op tion s > I M gr oup > IM gro up setti ngs > Group member s . 2 Scroll to Select ed on ly , a nd sel ec t OK . The Gro up me mbers scr een i s di sp lay ed. 3 T o add a membe r , at the Grou p members screen, select Opti ons > Add memb e r , and one of the following: ⢠IM con tact to se lect from yo ur list of IM c ontact s. ⢠Ent er us er ID to ent er the exa ct IM us er ID. 4 To remove a member , at t he Group me mbers scree n, scroll t o the cont actâ s name, and select Options > Remove . 5 To remove all group membe rs, at the Grou p membe rs sc reen, se lect Options > Re move all . 6 When you are finish ed desi gnating group m embers, select Back and then Done to ret urn to the group conve rsation view .
1 04 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Send an invitation for a group conversation Members must be onlin e before you c an invite the m to a grou p conversation. 1 From the grou p conversation view, select Op ti on s > Send inv ita tion . 2 Scroll to th e co ntacts whom y ou want to in vite to the group, press t he Scro ll key to ins ert an X int o the box be side the con tact n ame, and s elect OK . 3 Enter an i n vit ation message, and se lect Do ne . The inv itation is sent. 4 To invite other m embers to the group, repeat steps 2â 3. When a member accepts an invitation, a message is displayed in the group co nve rsat ion v iew a nn ounc ing t hat t he memb er ha s joi ned. Acce pt or reje ct in vit ation s to a gr oup c onv ers ation When you rec eive an invi tation to a group, sele ct Accep t , e nter your screen name, and select OK to accept the invita tion. T o re ject the invitation , sele ct Reject . Converse with group members All group me ssages are displayed in the group con versation view. The sender name is displayed in front of each m essa ge. Enter a messag e in the text entry a rea a t the bot tom o f the scre en; th en se lect Options > Sen d , or press the Scro ll key . Y our message is displayed in the group con versation view un der the last message received. If you close the group con versation view whi le the group is still active, you can return t o it. In the IM main menu, select IM gro ups ; then s elec t the n ame of the grou p. Send a priva te message While you are in a group conversation , you can send a pri vate message to one or more m embers of the group. The m essage c annot be seen by other grou p mem ber s wh o ar e no t incl uded in the p riv ate m ess age . 1 From the grou p conversation view, select Optio ns > Send pri vate msg. 2 Select the c ontact to w hom you wan t to send the priva te m essage. 3 Enter the mess age; the n selec t Options > Send , or press the Sc roll ke y .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 05 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Instant messaging (IM) (network service) ⢠LOG OUT SERVIC E To close the IM application and log out of the IM service at th e sa me time, press Exi t from the IM main menu. Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you ex it IM . To log out of the IM se rvice but leave the IM application open, go to the IM main menu an d select Options > Lo gout . Y ou c an also exit th e IM a pplication but still stay con necte d to the IM service. Press a nd hold the phone Men u key to bring up a list of open applications, and sel ect Tele phon e to retu rn to the standby mode . This ena bles you to rece ive insta nt me ssages from your con tacts, w hen using your phone for other purpo ses, for example, if you want to send a text me ssage. If yo u are connec ted to your IM ser vice, but you have not u sed the IM a p pl ication for some tim e, you m ay be autom atically disconn ected from the IM service. The next time y ou open t he IM a pplication, you mu st log in again. If you m ake a phone c all, you will be disc onnect ed from the I M service . To return to the IM applicati on, you can either s elect Menu > IM , or y ou c an press and hold th e Menu key again, and sele ct IM from th e list of open applic ations.
1 06 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia 13 W eb (mob ile bro wser) Selec t Menu > Web , or pre ss an d hold the 0 key in t he standby mod e. V ari ous se rvice pr ovid er s ma intain page s spe cific all y desig ned fo r mobi le pho nes, offering service s such as new s, weathe r reports, banking, travel in formation, enter t ainme nt, and games. Wi th the mobi l e b ro wser you c a n vi ew these ser vices as WML, X HTML, or HTML page s. If you ha ve not y et used y our ph one to m ake a WAP conne ctio n, you may need to contact your s ervice provide r for assistan ce with t he first con nection . Check the av ailabi lity of se rvi ces, pric ing, and t ari ffs with you r netw ork ope rator and/or service provider . S ervice providers will also give you instruc tions on how to use their se rvices . ⢠BASIC STEPS FOR WEB ACCES S 1 Save the settings th at are needed to access the browser service that you want to use. See "Browse r service set-u p" on page 1 06. 2 Make a connection to the service. See "Make a connect ion" on page 1 0 7. 3 Start browsing t he web pages. See "Browse" on page 1 08. 4 End the connection to the service. See " End a conne ction" on page 1 1 0. ⢠BROWSER SERVIC E SET-UP Receive settings in a smart message Y ou m ay rece ive serv ice setti ngs in a special t ext mes sage cal led a sm art message from the ne twork o perator or servic e provider th at offers the service. See "Smart messa ge s" on page 57. For more information, contact your n etwork operator or service provi der . Enter setting s manually Follow th e instruc tions given to you by your s ervice provide r . 1 Select M enu > Se tti ngs > Co nn ection > A ccess point s and define th e settings for an ac cess point. See "Con nection" on page 68. 2 Select Menu > Web > Opt ions > Bookmark m anag er > Ad d bookmar k . 3 Write a name for the bookmark and t he address of the browser page defined for the current ac cess point.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 10 7 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Web (mobile bro wser ) ⢠MAKE A CONNECTION Once you have s tore d all th e requ ired c onn ection s ettings , you can acce ss browser pages. There are three diffe rent ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the h omepage ( ) of your servic e provider . ⢠Select a bookmark from the Bookm arks vie w . ⢠Pre ss the ke ys 2 âÂÂ9 to start to write the address of a brow ser service. The Go to field at the bo ttom of the display is imme diately activated, and you can continue to write the addres s ther e. After you have sel ected a page or written the address, press the Sc roll ke y to start downloading the page. ⢠BOOKMARKS Y our device m ay have some preinstalle d bookmarks f o r si tes not af fili ated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access the m, yo u sho ul d ta ke the sam e pr eca utio ns f or se cur ity or cont ent as you wou ld with any si te. In the Bookmark s view , you ca n see bo okmark s pointin g to different k inds of browser pages. When you scroll throug h bookmarks, you can see the address of the hig hlighted bo okmark in the Go t o field at th e bo ttom of the display . Bookmarks are indicated by the following icons: Opt ions in B ookma rks (when a book mark or folder is selected) are Ope n , Downlo ad , Back to pa ge , B ookma rk ma nager , Ma rk/Unmar k, N aviga tion optio ns , Advanced options , Send , Find bo okmark , Details , Settings , Help , an d Ex it . The starting page defined for the browser access point. If you use another browser access poin t for browsing, the st arting page is changed accordingly . The last visited page . When the phone is disconnect ed from the service, th e address of the last v isited pag e is kept in m emory u ntil a new page is visited during the ne xt conne ction. A bookmark sho wing the tit le. An automatic bookmark. See "Add bookmarks aut omatically" on page 1 0 8.
1 08 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Add bookmarks manually 1 In Bookmarks , select Option s > Bookmark m anag er > Add bookm ark . 2 Start to fill in the fields. Only the address must be defined. The default access poin t is ass igned to the bookmark if no othe r one is selected. Press the * ke y to ente r speci al characte rs such as / , . , : , an d @ . Press the Clear key to clea r charac ters. 3 Select Options > Save to save the bookmark. Add bookmarks automatically When you visit a we b page, your browser automatic ally saves a bookmark in the autom atic bookmarks folder ( ), which is located in the list of bookmarks when you ope n th e Web applic ation. Automa tic bookmarks can be renamed and deleted, bu t they cannot be moved. To modify automatic bookmarks set tin gs, se lec t Options > Settings > Automatic bookmarks > On , Hide Folder , or Off . â¢B R O W S E On a browser page, new links appear un derlined in blue and previously v isited links i n purp le. Im ages th at act as lin ks hav e a b lue bord er aro und the m. Options when browsing are Ope n , Op en Wal let , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , Navigati on options , Advanc ed options , Send bo okmark , Find , Details , Setti ngs , Help , and Exi t . K eys and commands used in browsing ⢠To open a link, press the Scrol l ke y . ⢠T o scro ll th e vi ew , us e the Scro ll key . ⢠To e nt er letters and numbers in a field, press the 0 âÂÂ9 keys. Pr ess the * key to ente r specia l cha racters su ch as / , . , : , an d @ . Pr ess t he Clear key to clear ch aracters . ⢠To go to the previous p age while browsing, press Back . If Back is not available , select Op tions > Na vigati on o ptions > Hi story t o view a chronological list of th e pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is c leared eac h time a session is closed. ⢠To check boxes and mak e selections, press the Sc roll key . ⢠To re triev e the latest c ontent from the serv er , select Opti ons > Na vigat ion optio ns > Re load . ⢠To open a sublist of commands or ac tions for the cu rrently open browser page, se lect Opt ions > Ser vice optio ns . ⢠To disc onn ect from a brow ser service and to quit browsing, select Opti ons > A dvance d options > Di scon nect .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 09 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Web (mobile bro wser ) Save bookmarks ⢠To sa v e a bookmark while brow sing, select Options > Save as bookmark . ⢠To sa ve a bookmark received in a smart message, select Menu > Mess aging > In bo x , open the m ess age , and select Options > S a ve to bookmarks . See "Sm art messages" on page 57. View saved pages Opt ions in S aved page s are Ope n , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages mngr . , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Details , Sett ings , Help , and Exi t . If you regularly browse pages containing information th at does not c hange very often, you can sa ve a nd the n b rowse them w hen not logged in. To save a page, while browsing select Optio ns > Adv ance d optio ns > S ave pag e . To open saved pages, sc roll right in th e Bo okmark s view . In th e Sa ved pages v iew , p ress the Sc ro ll key to open a saved page . Saved pages are indicated by the icon. In the Sav ed pag es view you can also crea te folders to store your saved browser pages. Folders containing saved browser pages are indicated by the icon. To start a co nnectio n to the brow ser service and to re trieve the page again, sel ect O ption s > Navi gation opt ions > Reload . The phone stays on line after you reload the page. ⢠DOWNLOAD Y ou can downl oad ite ms such as ring ing tones , i mages, o p era tor logo s, sof tware, and video clips through th e mobile browser . These items may be provided free, or you can purchase them . T o clear the c ache after downloads, see âÂÂClear the cacheâ on page 1 1 1 . Once downloaded , items are handled by the respective applications on your phone (for e xample, a dow nloaded photo w ill be sa ved in Gallery ). Impor tant: O nly install applicatio ns from sourc es that offer adequate protection agains t harmful softw are.
1 10 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Purchase an item To download an item: 1 Scroll to th e link and select Options > Open . 2 Choose the appropriate option to purchase the ite m, for example, Buy . Carefully re ad all th e information provided. If the online content is compatib le, yo u can use your walle t informa tion to make th e purch ase: 1 Select Open wal l et . 2 Enter your w allet code. See "Enter the wallet code" on page 92. 3 Select the appropriate card cate gory from y our wallet. 4 Select Fill in . This up loads the selected w allet inform ation. If the wallet doe s not contai n all informa tion nece ssary fo r the purc hase, y ou will be requ ested to enter t he remaining details manually . The infor ma tion or se rvi ces y ou ac cess are sto red in th e cach e. To empty th e cach e, s ee âÂÂCl ear th e cacheâ on p age 1 1 1. Copyright protections may prevent some images, rin ging tones , and o ther content from being cop ied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Check an item before downloading Y ou can see de tails about an item be fore you download it. Details abou t an item may inc lude the price, a brie f description, and si ze. 1 Scroll to th e link and select Option s > Open . Details about the item are displa yed on your ph one. 2 If you w ant to continu e with the downloading, press Acc ept , or if you wa nt to ca ncel th e do wnload , press Cancel . ⢠END A CO NNE CTIO N Select Opti ons > Ad vance d optio ns > D isco nnect , or press and hold the End k ey to quit b rowsing and re turn to th e standby mode.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 1 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Web (mobile bro wser ) ⢠CLE AR THE CACHE A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporaril y . The information or services y ou access are store d in th e cache me mory of the phone . If you have tr ied to ac cess or ha ve ac cessed co nfi d e ntial i nformation requirin g passwords, em pty the cac he after ea ch use . To em pty the ca che, select Opt ions > Navigatio n options > Clear cac he . ⢠BROWSER SETTINGS Fr om th e Book marks screen , select Options > Settings and on e of the foll owin g: Defau l t acc ess poin t â To change the default access point, pre ss the Sc ro ll ke y to open a list of available access points. The current defa ult access point is hi ghl ight ed. See "Connection " on page 68. Show ima ges âÂÂC hoose if y ou want to view pictures when you are browsing. If you cho ose No , you can la t er load images during browsing by se lecting Option s > Show image s . Font size âÂÂY ou can choose 5 tex t sizes in the brow ser: Lar gest , Large , Norm al , Sma ll , and Sm all est . Def aul t enc od ing âÂÂCho ose a language setting to make sure your browser pages di spla y tex t cha ract ers co rre ctl y . Automatic bookmar ks âÂÂS ele ct On , Hide F older , or Off . When you select H ide Folder , book marks are s till automatica lly added to the Aut omatic bo okmar ks folder . See "Add bookmarks autom atically" on page 108. Scr een size âÂÂSe lect N orma l scre en , S ele ct. ke ys onl y , o r Fu ll sc reen to change how th e browser w in dow i s displayed in your ph one screen. Render ing âÂÂSe lect By q uality or By speed to determine how w e b page s are loa ded. Cook ies âÂÂSel ect A llo w or Reject . Y ou c an enable or disable the receiving and sending of c ookies (a means of content prov iders to identify users and their preference s for fre quently used cont ent). Sec urit y warn ings âÂÂC hoose to Hide or Show se curity warnings. Co nfir m touch tone s âÂÂSelect Al way s or Fir st sen ding only . C hoos e wh eth er you want to confirm be fore the phone sends DTMF tones during a voice call. For example, you can make a voice call while you are viewing a browser page, send DTMF ton es wh ile a voic e ca ll is in progre ss, a nd save a na me an d phon e num ber in Cont acts f rom a browse r p age. See " Opt ions duri ng a call " o n pag e 28 . Wal l et â Choose On if you want the wa llet to op en automat ically when a compatible browser page is opened.
1 12 Copy right é 2005 N okia 14 Con nectivity ⢠BLUE TOOTH CONNEC TION Select Menu > Conn ect . > Blu etoo th . There may be res trictions on us in g Bluetooth dev ices in some location s. Check w ith your lo cal auth orities or service provide r . Blu eto oth tec hno logy en abl es w ire less co nne cti ons between e lectronic devices wi thin a max imum range of 30 feet (1 0 meters). A Bluetooth connection can be u sed to send images, videos, texts, business cards, and calenda r note s, or it ca n be used t o connect wirelessly to com patible devices supporting the same Bluetooth protoc ols, such as com puters. Since devi ces using Bluetooth te chnology communicate using radio waves, your phon e and the oth er devices d o not ne ed to be in d irect line-of-sight. Th e two devices only need to be wi thin a maxi m um of 3 0 fe et (1 0 meter s) o f each other , althou gh the connection can be subject to interferenc e from obstru ctions such as w alls or from othe r electronic dev ices. When y ou activa te a Blue tooth conne ction for the first time, you are a sked to give a nam e to your ph one. Bluetooth device compatibility This phone is designed to be com p liant with and to adopt Blue tooth Specification 1.1. Howev er , in teroperability betwee n the phone and othe r products with Blu etooth wirele ss technology depends also on the profiles and protocols used. To ensure inte roperability between other devic es supporting Bluetooth tech nology , use Nokia approved enhance ments for this phone. Check with th e manufactu rers of oth er devices to de termine th eir compatibilit y with this device. The Nokia 66 7 0 phone supports the following profiles: ⢠Dial-up networ king profile as a gateway ⢠Object push profi le as a client and server ⢠File trans fer profile a s a server ⢠Hands-free profile as an audio gateway ⢠Generic o bject exchange profile ⢠Gene ric ac cess p rofile
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 13 Copy right é 2005 N okia Conn ectivity ⢠Serial port profile w ith the PC connectiv ity software For more informatio n on the com patibility between B luetooth devices, c onsult their m anufacturers. Bluetooth connection settings ⢠Bluetooth âÂÂSe lect On if you w ant t o use a Blue tooth conn ection. If you sel ect Off , all active Bluetooth connections are ended, and Bluetooth connection cannot be use d for sending or receiv ing data. ⢠My ph one's vis ibilit y âÂÂIf you s elect Show n to all , your phon e can be found by o th er de vices du ring d evic e sear ch. If you sele ct Hidden , y our phone cannot be found by othe r devices. ⢠My phon eâ s nam e âÂÂD efine a name for your ph one. Afte r you h ave set your Bluet ooth conn ecti on as ac tive and ch ange d My phone's visi bili ty to All , your phone and this name can be seen by othe r devices. Send data by Bl ue tooth connection Y our ph one can only have one ac tive Bluetooth connection at a time. 1 Op en an app licat ion wher e the i tem you wi sh to s end is s tored. For example , to send a photo to another device, open the Galle ry application. 2 Scroll to th e i tem you want to send, a nd sel ect O ption s > Send > Via Blu etoot h . The phone starts to searc h for devices w ith in ra nge . Dev ices us ing Bl uet oot h techn ology tha t are w ithin range start to appear on the display one by one. Y ou can see a d evice i con, th e devi ce name, the device type, or a short nam e. P aire d devi ces a re sho wn with . A p aired device is one where a Bluetooth conn ection already exists between your phon e and th e other device. To interrupt the search , press Stop . Th e devic e list freez es an d you ca n star t to form a connection to one of the de vices alre ady fou nd. When searching for de vices, s ome devices may show only th e unique de vice addresses. To find out the uniqu e address of your phone, ente r the code *#2820# in the standby mode. If you ha ve sear ched for de vices e arli er , a li st of the de vic es tha t wer e found previ ously is shown first. To start a new search , select Mo re devi ces . If you switch off the phone , the list of d evices is cleared and the device search needs to be st arted again before se nding data.
1 14 Copy right é 2005 N okia 3 Scroll to th e d evice wit h whic h yo u want t o con nect an d press Sele ct . Th e it em you a re se nding is co pied to Out box and th e note Conne cting is shown. 4P a i r i n g (if not require d by th e other device, go to step 5 .) ⢠If the oth er device require s pairing before data can be transmitte d, a tone sounds an d you are asked to enter a passcode. ⢠Create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 ch aracters long, numeric) and agree with the ow ner of the other d ev ice to use the same code. This passcode is used only once and you do not have t o memorize it. D evices that do not have a user interface have a preset passcode. See "P aired devices view" on page 1 14. ⢠After pairing, th e device is sav ed to the Paired de vice s vie w . 5 When the co nnection has been succes sfully establis hed, Sen ding data is show n. Copyright protections may prevent some images, rin ging tones , and o ther content from being cop ied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Data received by Bluetooth connection c an be fou nd in the Inbo x folder in Messag ing . See "InboxâÂÂreceive messages" on page 57. Icons for different de vices are âÂÂC omputer , âÂÂPhone, âÂÂAudio/video, and âÂÂBlueto oth device If sending fails, th e messag e or data w ill be deleted. The Draft s folder in Messag ing does not store messages sent by Blue tooth connection. Check Bluetooth connection statu s When is shown in the standby m ode, Bluetooth connection is active. When is blinki ng, you r phon e is t rying to co nnect to th e othe r device . When is sh own con tinuo usly , th e Blu etooth co nnecti on is act ive. P aired devices view P airin g with a device mak e s device searches easier a n d quicker . P aired devices a r e e a s i e r t o r e c o g n i z e ; t h e y a r e i n d i c a t e d b y i n t h e s e a r c h r e s u l t l i s t . I n t h e Bluetooth connection m ain view , scroll right to ope n a list of paired devices ( ). ⢠To pai r with a de vice , se lec t Opt ion s > New pa ir ed de vic e . T he phon e start s a devi ce searc h. Scr oll to the devi ce with whic h you wa nt to pai r and p r ess Select . After yo u exchange passcod es, the device is added to the paired devi ces list. ⢠To c ancel pairing, scroll to the de vice whose pairing you wan t to cancel and press the Clear key o r sel ect Options > Delete . If y ou want to canc el all pairings, select Opti ons > Delete all .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 15 Copy right é 2005 N okia Conn ectivity Note: If you are currentl y co nnected to a device a nd yo u dele te the pairing with that device, the pairing is removed and th e device connec tion is terminate d, but the Bluetooth conn ection rem ains ac tive o n you r phon e. ⢠To set a device to be authorize d or u nauthorized, scroll t o the device, select Options , and th en select one of the follo wing: Set as author ized â C onnections be tween yo ur phone an d this device can be ma de with out y our kn owled ge. No sep arate accep tance or au tho rizati on is needed. Use this status for your own devices, for example, your PC, or devices that belong to some one you trust. T he icon is added ne x t to authorized devices in the P aired devi ces view . Set as un au thorized âÂÂConnectio n re quests from this dev ice ne ed to be accepted separately every time . ⢠T o assi gn a short na m e to a devic e , se lect Opti ons > As sign short n ame . Enter a nam e for the de vice. Receive data by Bluetooth connec tion When you receive data by Bluetooth connectio n, a tone is played, and y ou are asked if you wan t to accep t the mess age. If yo u a ccept, the i tem is pla ced in the In box folde r in Messa gin g . Messages received by B luetooth conn ection are indicated by . See " InboxâÂÂreceive messages" on page 57 . Close the Bluetooth connection A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automati cally after sending or receiving dat a. ⢠USB CONNECTION Y ou can use the Conn ectivity Cable DKU-2 to con nect yo ur Nokia 66 7 0 phon e to the U SB p ort on your co mpute r . Before usin g the c onnectiv ity cable, you must install th e cable driver prior t o PC Suite installation. Carefully follow the in st all ati on in str uct ion s given in t he PC Suite u ser guide an d the DKU -2 (USB) installation guide on the C D -ROM supplied with the phone. Ma king or an swer ing ph one cal ls duri ng a com put er con nect ion is no t re comme nded because it m ight d isrupt the operation . ⢠CON NEC TION MAN AGER Select Menu > Conn ect. > Con n. mg r . .
1 16 Copy right é 2005 N okia In Co nnect ion mana ger you ca n iden tif y the status of multiple data connect ions, view details on the amoun t of data sent and received, and end un used c onn ections . Y ou c an view details of data conne ctions only . V oice c alls are not lis ted. Whe n y ou o pen Conne ction m anag er , you can see t he fol lowin g: ⢠Open d at a conn ectio ns: Da ta ca ll GP RS ⢠The st atus of each connec tion ⢠Amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each c onnection (GPRS connection s only) ⢠The durati on of each con nection (data c all conne ctions only) Note: The actu al time in voiced by your s ervice prov ider may v ary , depending on netwo rk features, rou nding off for billin g, and so forth . Opt ions in Con nection manag er w hen the re are one or mo re conn ec tions are Details , Disc onnect , Disconn ect all , Help , an d Exit . View connection details To view the de tails of a con nection , scroll to a c onnectio n and selec t Options > Deta ils . The following information is displaye d: Name âÂÂTh e name of the Interne t ac cess p oin t (IAP) in u se Bearer âÂÂThe type of data c onnection: Da ta ca ll or GPRS Sta tus âÂÂThe cu rrent status of the connec tion Recei ved âÂÂThe amou nt of data, i n bytes, received to th e phone Sen t âÂÂThe am ount of data, in by tes, sent from the ph one Dura tio n âÂÂThe le ngth of tim e that the connection has been open Sp eed âÂÂTh e current spee d of both sending and receiving data in kB/s Dia l-up (G SM) o r Nam e (GPRS)âÂÂThe GS M dial-up number used or the n ame of th e GPRS acc ess poin t used Sha red âÂÂTh e number of applic ations using th e same c onnecti on. This option is not display ed if the conne ction is not sha red. End connections Scroll to a connection and select Op tions > Di scon nec t to end that con nection only , or se lect Options > Disconnect all to clo se all cur r e ntly open connec tions.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 17 Copy right é 2005 N okia Conn ectivity ⢠CONNECT YOUR PHONE TO A COMPUTER For furthe r information on how to m ake a connectio n to a compatible c omputer by USB or Bluetoot h connection and how to in stall PC Suite, see the PC Suite user guide on the C D-ROM s upplied with the pho ne. For further information on how to use Nok ia PC Suite, s ee the h elp function on PC Suite or visit the support pages at www .no kia.ca . ⢠USE THE CD-ROM The CD -ROM should l aunch its elf after you ha ve inse rted it in to the CD -ROM drive of your c ompatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: 1 Cli ck the Wind ow s Start bu tton a nd sele ct Prog rams > Windows Expl orer . 2 On the CD- ROM drive, loc ate a file called PC Suit e_us .ex e and double-click it. The CD-R OM interface ope ns. 3 Locate PC Su ite in the Inst all So ftwa re se cti on. 4 Double-c lick the Nokia PC Suite file . The installat ion wizard wil l guide you through the ins tallation process . ⢠SYN C HRO NIZA T ION Select Menu > Conn ect. > Sync . The Sync application enab les you to synchronize your c alendar , contacts, and notes with various calendar , address book, and notes application s on a c ompatible c omputer or on the Inte rnet. Remote synchronization takes place over a We b or Bl uetoot h con nection that you ca n initiate from you r phone. Loc al synch ronization ta kes place by a da ta cable conne ction to your PC. The sync hronizat ion applica tion uses Sy ncM L technolo gy for sy nchroniza tion. For informa tion on SyncML comp atibility , c ontact th e supplier of the calendar , address book, or notes ap plication with which y ou want t o synchroniz e your phone data. Create a new synchronization profile Op tion s in th e Sy nc m ain v iew a re Synchronize , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Del ete , Help , and Exit . 1 Select Opti o n s > N ew sync p rofil e . 2 Choose whether y ou want to use the de fault settin g values or c opy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 3 Define the following: Syn c profile name âÂÂWrite a de scriptive name for the profil e. Data bearer âÂÂS elect Web or Bl uetoot h as your synchronization method.
1 18 Copy right é 2005 N okia Acces s poi nt âÂÂSelec t the ac cess poi nt you want to us e for the dat a connection. This option is only available if you choose Web in the Dat a bearer settin g. Host address âÂÂContac t your s ervice provid er or system adminis trator for th e corre ct va lues. Po r t â Contact you r service provider or system administrator for the c orrect values . This option is only a vailable if y ou choose We b in the Dat a bearer settin g. Use r name âÂÂY our u ser ID for the sy nchronization server . Contac t your service provider or syste m administrator for your corre ct ID. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂW rite your password. Contact your service provider or sy stem administrator for the correct v alue. 4 Scroll right a nd sele ct wh ich applica tions you w ould like to synch ronize: Contacts âÂÂS ele ct Ye s if y ou want to syn chronize your cont acts. Calendar âÂÂSel ect Ye s if you wa nt to s ync hron ize your cale ndar . Notes âÂÂS elect Ye s i f y ou wa nt to syn chro niz e your note s. When y ou sele ct Ye s t o synch ronize each of these a pplications , you must al so spe cif y : ⢠Re mote da ta bas e âÂÂEnter the c orrect path t o the server for t he remote address book (to sync w ith Contacts ), th e rem ot e ca len dar (t o syn c with Calendar ), or the rem ote notes a pplication (to sync with No tes ). ⢠Sync hroni zati o n typ e âÂÂSe lec t Norma l , To s er ver on ly , or To phone only . 5 Press Do ne to sa ve the se ttings. Synchronize data In the Sy nc main view , you can see the different profiles, and what kind of data will be sy nchronized: Cal en dar , Con tacts , Note s , or all thre e. 1 In the main view , scroll to a profile and select Opti ons > S ynchron ize . The status of the synchronization is shown at the bottom of th e screen. To cancel synchroniza tion be fore it is finished, press Cancel . Y ou ar e notified w hen the sync hronization h as bee n completed. 2 Afte r sy nch roniz atio n i s co mp lete, pr ess Vi ew log , or select Options > View log to op en a log file s how ing the sync hr oniza tion statu s ( Com plet e or Incomp lete ) and how many calendar , contact, and no tes e n tries have been adde d, upda ted, de lete d, or discar ded (n ot sy nchron ized) in t he pho ne or o n the server .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 1 19 Copy right é 2005 N okia T r oubleshooting 15 T ro ublesho oting ⢠SI M C ARD A SIM (subs cribe r ide ntity m odule) c ard is requ ired for your Nok ia GSM pho ne to oper ate. The SIM card is sup plie d by your service pro vider an d has you r mobile phon e numb er a nd all s ubsc ribe r acco un t info rmat ion pro gra mme d on it. Y ou c an save con tact informa tion from your co ntacts list on the SIM card s o th at when y ou us e the SI M card i n anot her GSM phone or terminal, your phone nu mber a nd con tact s wi ll b e av ail able to you on the SIM c ard rat her th an st ore d in phone memory . Note that you c an only save nam es and phone nu mbers on the SIM card. The SIM card in the Nok ia 667 0 phon e is loc ated under th e ba ttery in the top left corner . The SIM card must be inserted under the hood and the gold-colored con tacts on t he ca rd must make direct c ontac t with t he g old-colore d contact s in the card slot. Se e âÂÂInsert the SIM c ardâ on page 16. â¢M E M O R Y L O W When one of th e followi ng no tes is s h ow n, the phone memory is low and you must delete some data: ⢠Not eno ugh me mor y to perfor m oper ation . ⢠Del ete some da ta firs t . ⢠Me mory low . Del ete so me dat a . T o view what kind of data y ou have and how mu ch memory the differen t data groups consume, select Menu > Tools > File mngr . > Options > M emory details . Y ou ma y want to delete th e following ite m s regularly to a v oid memor y getting low: ⢠Message s from the Inbo x , Drafts , and Se nt folders in Mes sagin g . ⢠Retrieve d e-mail messages from the ph one memory . ⢠Saved browser pages. ⢠Images , video clips, and soun d clips in Galle ry . If yo u wa nt to de le te co ntac t in form ati on, c al end ar no tes , ca ll tim ers, cal l cos t timer s, game sc ores, or any other da ta, go to the respe ctive ap plica tion to rem ove the da ta. If you a re deletin g multiple items a nd one of th e low mem ory n otes is shown again, try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item).
120 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠DIFFERENT WAYS TO ST O RE DATA ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to m ake a backup c opy of all data to your computer . See "Conne ct your phone to a com puter" on page 1 17. ⢠Se nd images t o your e- mai l addre ss and the n sa ve the im ages to you r com puter . ⢠Send data by Blue tooth conn ection to a c ompatible devic e. ⢠Store data on a compatible me mory card. ⢠PHONE DISPLAY If missing, discolored, or bright dot s a ppear on the screen when you turn on your phone, this is a charact e ristic of this type of display . Some displays may contain pixel s or dots that rem ain on or off. This is n ormal, not a fault. ⢠BLUE TOOTH CONNEC TION If you ca nnot end a Blue toot h con necti on, che ck to see if an othe r devic e is pairin g with (connec te d to) you r phone but not sendi ng data . If so, you c an dis conne ct it by dea ctivat ing the B lue tooth li nk alto gethe r . Selec t Me nu > Connect. > Bluetooth , and select Blue toot h > Off . If you c annot find a de vice using Blu etooth technology , check the followin g: ⢠Both de vices h ave activ ated the ir Bluetooth connec tions. ⢠The distance betw een the two devices is not over 30 fe et (1 0 meters) or that the re are no walls or other obstruc tions between t he devices. ⢠The other device is not in Hidden mode. ⢠Both de vices a re com patib le. ⢠MULT IME DIA MESSAGING If the phone can not receiv e a multi media me ssage beca use mem ory is full, check the am ount of memory in use (see âÂÂMe m ory low â on page 1 19). If th e no te s Retrieving message or Tryi ng to retrieve message again are sh own briefly , y our phone is trying t o retrieve a multimedia messa ge from the multimedia messagi ng center . T o stop t he notes fr o m d i spl a ying, you need to end the da ta conn ection b ec a use t he phone i s attemp ting to star t the conn ection ag ai n and aga in. Al so, tr y the followi ng so luti ons : Check that th e settings for multim edia messag ing have been defined corre ctly and that th ere are no m istakes in phone n umbers or addresses. Se l ect Men u > Mess aging > Opti ons > S ett ings > Mu ltim edia mess age . To stop th e pho ne from makin g a data conne ction, you ha ve th e follo wing options. Select Me nu > M essa ging > Option s > Se ttings > Mult ime dia message , and th en:
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 12 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia T r oubleshooting ⢠Select On r ece ivin g ms g. > De fer re triev al if yo u want the mu ltimedia messaging ce nter to save the message to be retrieved later , for example , after you have checke d the se ttings. Afte r this c hange, the phone still needs to send information not es to the ne twork. Wh en you w ant to re trie ve th e mes sage, sele ct Retr . imme diate ly . ⢠Se le ct On receiving msg. > Reject message if yo u wa nt to reject a ll inco ming multime dia mess a ges . After thi s change, the phone nee d s to send i nformation notes to th e network and the m ultim edia messagin g center will delet e all multime dia mes sages that are w aiting to be sent to you. ⢠Select Mult imedia recept ion > Off if you w ant to ignore all in coming multime dia mes sages. After th is chan ge the phone will not m ake any netw ork connectio ns relate d to mu ltimedia messagin g. ⢠MESSAGING If you are composing a m essage and you cannot select a con tact from the contacts directory , the contact card does not hav e a phone number or an e- mail address. Add the m issing informatio n to the con tact card in Contacts . ⢠BROWSER SERVIC ES If you r ece ive t he me ssage N o valid acc ess point defined. De fine on e in Web setti ngs , you need to insert the prope r browser settings. Contact your service provider for i nstructions . â¢L O G If the log appear em pty , you may have activate d a filter , and no c ommunic ation events fittin g that filte r have been logged. To see all events in Logs , se le ct Option s > Filte r > All com muni cation . ⢠PC CON N ECTI V ITY If you have problems conn ecting the phone to a PC, m ake sure that Nok ia PC Suite is installed and ru nning on the PC. See the PC Sui te user gu ide on th e CD-ROM pro vided wit h the p h on e. For f urther info rmati on on how to us e PC Su ite, see t he help fun ction of PC Suite , or visit the support page s at w ww .n okia.ca . ⢠APPLICATION N OT RESPONDING If you need to c lose an applicati on that is not responding, ope n the application switching window by pressing and holding the Menu key . Then scroll to the application, and press th e Cl ear key to close the a pplication.
122 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia 16 Referen ce information ⢠BATTERY INFORMATION Charging and dischar ging Y our device is powered by a rechargeable batte ry . The full pe rformance of a n ew battery is achieved only after tw o or three comple te charge and discharge cycles. The batte ry can be charged and dis charged hundre ds of times but it will eventually wear out. When the t a lk and standby times are noti c eably s h orter than normal, buy a new battery . U se only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your b attery only with Nok ia approved chargers designated for th is device. Unplug th e charger from the electrical plug an d the device whe n not in use. Do not lea ve the batte ry conne cted to a ch arger , s ince ov ercharging may shorten its lifetime . If left unus ed, a fully cha rged batte ry wil l lose its charge over time. Use the batte ry only for its intended pu rpose. Never use any charger or battery that is da maged. Do not short-circ uit the battery . Acciden tal short-circ uiting can occ ur when a metallic object suc h as a coin, clip, or pen causes dire ct con nection of the positive ( ) and ne gative (-) te rminals of the batte ry . (The se look like m etal strips on the battery . ) This m ight happen, for example, when you carry a s pare battery in your pocket or purse. Sho rt-circuiting the termin als may damage the battery or the con necting object. Leaving the battery in hot or col d places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, wil l reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery and its ability to charge. Alwa ys try to keep the batt ery between 5 9ðF and 7 7ðF (15ðC and 25ðC ). A de vice with a hot or cold batt ery may not w ork tempo rarily , e ven when the bat tery is full y charged. B attery performance is partic ularly limit ed in temper atures well be low freezing. Do not dispose o f batteries in a fire, a s th ey may ex plod e. Batt erie s may al so explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local re gulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Al wa ys us e ori gin al N okia bat terie s for your saf ety . T o chec k that you ar e getting an ori ginal Nokia batt ery , purcha se it from an aut h orize d Nokia de aler , look for the Nok ia Original Enhance men ts logo on th e packaging, and inspect the hol ogram label us ing the following steps.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 123 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rma tio n Successful comple tion of the four steps is not a tota l ass urance of the aut hen ticity of th e bat tery. If you ha ve an y rea son to be lieve that your b attery is not a n authent ic origina l Nokia batte ry, yo u should refrain from using it and ta ke it to the nearest au thorized Nokia service point or dealer for assis tan ce. Your authorized Nokia s ervice poin t or d ealer wi ll inspe ct the ba ttery for authentic ity. If aut henticity c annot be ve rified, return the ba ttery to th e place of purc hase. AUTHENTI CATE HOLOGRAM 1 Wh en looking at the hologram label, you should see the Nokia con necting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia O riginal Enhancem ents logo when looking from anoth er angle. 2 Wh en you angle th e ho logram. to t he left , right, down, and u p sides of th e logo, you should see 1, 2, 3 , and 4 d ots on each side res pective ly . 3 Scratch t he side of the label to reveal a 20 -digit code, for e xample, 12345 6789 1 987654 32 1 0. T urn the ba ttery so that th e numbers are f acing up wa rd s. The 20 -digit code read s starting from the number a t the to p row follow ed by the bottom row . 4 Confirm that the 20 -digit code is valid by ve rifying it at the Nokia we bsite. Go to www .no kia. com /bat teryc hec k . WHAT IF Y OUR BA TTERY IS NO T AUTHENTIC? If you c annot confirm th at you r Nokia b a ttery with t he hologram label is an authent ic Nok ia batte ry , ple ase do not use th e battery . T a ke it t o the n earest authorize d Nokia s e rvice poi nt or deale r for assist anc e. T he use of a batt ery that is not approved by the manufac turer may be dangerou s and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its e nhancements. It may also invalid ate an y app roval or wa rranty applying to th e d evice. To find out more about original Nokia batteries v isit www .nokia.com/battery .
124 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia â¢E N H A N C E M E N T S A fe w p racti cal rule s abo ut a cces sor ies an d en hanc em ents: ⢠K eep all acce ssories and enhance ments out of the reach of small ch ildren. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhan cement, grasp and pul l the plug, not t he cord. ⢠Chec k re gular ly th at enha ncem en ts i nsta lled in a veh icle are m ount ed and are operating prope rly . ⢠Installation of any c omplex car enh ancements must be made by qualifie d personnel only . ⢠ENHANCE MENT S , BATT ERIES , AND CHARGERS For ava ilability of a pproved enha ncemen ts, check with your dea ler . Battery The 90 0 mAh, Li-Ion based BL-5 C battery provides po wer in a thin and lig ht package. V a riation in operation times wi ll occ ur depending on the charger used , the S IM card , network and usage sett i ngs, usag e style, and en vi ro nm ents. See "Technical in formation" on page 13 1. Th is de vice is in ten ded for use wh en supplied w ith power from ACP-12U. See also âÂÂInse rt the batteryâ on page 18 and âÂÂCharge th e batteryâ on page 18 .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 125 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rma tio n Other compatible Nokia enhancements Phone adapter HDA-1 0 accessibility enhancement The HDA-10 phone adapter i s a Nok ia enha ncement that all ows you to conne ct your mobile phon e to a T elecommu nicati ons Device for the Deaf (TT Y/ TDD) to make a cal l in digital mode. If you are using a phone adapter , you must activate it on y our mobile phone by selecting Me nu > S ettin gs > En han cement > Enh ancemen t in us e > TTY . Headset audio ⢠Wireless headsets ( H DW-3 with Blu etooth, HS-21W Wireles s Clip-on Headse t and HS-1 1W Ba se W ir ele ss Hea dse t) ⢠Wireless boom headse t (wit h Bluetooth ) (HS-4W ) ⢠Boom headset (HDB-4) ⢠Stan dard hea d set (HS-5) ⢠Phone adapter (HDA-1 0) (See âÂÂPhone adapte r HDA-1 0 a ccessibility enhanc em entâ on page 125. ) Po w e r ⢠Charge r (ACP-12U ) ⢠Compact Travel C harger ( AC-1U) Data ⢠Co nnec tivity cable (DK U-2) ⢠RS-MMC (64 MB and 128 MB) Car ⢠Adva nced in stallation car kit (CK- 7W) ⢠Mobile c harger (LCH-12) Ima ging ⢠Came ra flash (PD-2) Messagin g ⢠Di gital pen (SU-1 B) Cover/carryin g ⢠Xpress -on⢠cove rs and sty le packs ⢠Wri s t stra p
126 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia In ad dition to the Nokia 66 7 0 phone, y ou will n eed the foll owing for TTY/TDD commun ication : ⢠A TTY/TD D device that is cellu lar ready or cellula r compatible ⢠A cable for conne cting the TTY/TD D to your phon e, usually supplie d by the manu facturer of t he TTY/TDD device ⢠The phon e adapter (HDA-10), which can be purchased separate ly as an enha ncem ent. For more information, see âÂÂAccessibility s olutionsâ on page 15. ⢠CARE A ND MAINTENANCE Y our de vice is a prod uct of sup erior de sign and cr aftsma nship and should be tre ate d with ca r e . The suggestions belo w will help you prote ct your warrant y covera ge and enjoy your d evic e for many yea rs. ⢠K eep the device dry . Precipitation, humidity , and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the batte r y and allow the device to dry comple tely before replac ing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty , dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do n o t stor e the dev i ce in hot a reas. Hi gh tempe ratur es can shor ten the li fe of elect ronic device s, damage batteri es, and warp or me lt certa in plast ics. ⢠Do not s tore th e dev ice in cold are as. Whe n the device return s to its n ormal temperat ure, moisture can form inside th e device and dam age electron ic circuit bo ards. ⢠Do not a ttempt to open the device other than as in structed in thi s guide. ⢠Do not drop, knoc k, or shake the device. Rough h andling can bre ak internal circuit bo ards and fine me chanics . ⢠Do not us e hars h che micals, cle aning solven ts, or st rong dete rgents to clea n the device . ⢠Do not paint the devic e. P a int can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, cl ean, dry cloth to cle an any lenses (such as camera , proxim ity sensor , and light sensor lens es). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attac h ments co uld damage the device and may violate re gulations governing radio devices. All of the above sugge stions apply equally to your device, b attery , ch arger , or any enhanc ement. I f any device i s not wo r kin g p roper l y , tak e it to the ne arest aut horiz ed serv ice facility for service .
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 127 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rmati on ⢠ADDIT IONAL SAFETY INFORMATION Operating environment Rememb er to follow any speci al regula tions in force in an y area a nd always switch off your dev ice w hen its use is prohibi ted or when it ma y caus e interference or danger . Use the device only in its normal ope rating positions. This de vice mee ts RF ex posu re guid eline s when us ed eith er in the no rmal use position aga inst the ear or w hen position ed at least 7 /8 inch ( 2.2 cm) a way from the body . When a carry case, belt clip, or holde r is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain m etal and should position the device at le ast 7/8 inch (2 .2 cm) aw ay from your body . P arts of the de vic e are magn etic. Metallic materia ls may be attracted to the device, and persons with a hearing aid should not ho ld the device to t he ear with th e hearin g aid. Alw ays secu re the dev ice in its holder , because metallic materials may be attracte d by the earpiece. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storag e media near the device , because information store d on them may b e eras ed. Y our dev ice a n d i ts enha ncem ents ma y contai n small p a rts. K eep t hem out o f reach of sma ll chil dren. Medical dev ices Operation of any radio transmitting e q uipment, including wireless phon es, may interfere w ith the func tionality of in adequately prote cted medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the me dical device t o determ ine if the y are adequatel y shielded fro m external RF ener gy or if you hav e a ny q uestions. S witch off your phon e in h ealth care faciliti es when any regulations posted in these areas i nstruct you to do so. Hospital s or heal t h ca re faciliti es may be usin g equipme nt tha t could b e sens itive to externa l RF ene rgy . P ACEMAKERS P ace ma ker man ufa ctur ers r ecom m e nd th at a mini mum sepa rat ion of 6 i nche s (15.3 cm) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avo id potential in terfere nce w ith the pacema ker . Th ese recomme ndati ons are consistent with the inde pendent research by and re commendations of Wireless Te c hnology Res earch. T o minimize th e potential for interferenc e, p ersons with pace make rs should : ⢠Always keep the device more t han 6 inc hes (15.3 cm ) from their pace maker w hen th e device is sw itche d on ⢠Not c arry th e devi ce in a br east po cke t ⢠Hold the de vice to th e ear opposite th e pacemaker If you h ave any re ason to su spect that interferenc e is taking p lace, s witch off you r device im mediat ely .
128 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia HE ARI N G AID Some digital wire less devices may inte rfere with som e hearing aids. If interference occurs , c onsult your servic e provider . Ve h i c l e s RF signals may affec t improperly ins talled or in adequately shielded ele ctronic s yste ms in m otor vehic les such a s elec tronic fuel inj ection s ystems, electr onic anti skid (antiloc k) braking syst ems, el ectronic speed control system s, air bag sy stems. Fo r more in forma tion , check wit h the manuf act ure r or its repr esent ative of your vehic le or any equ ipment that h as been adde d. Only qu alified personn el should s ervice th e device, or install th e device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or servi ce may be dangerous and may invalidate any warrant y that may a pply to the d evic e. Chec k re gularly that all wirele ss device equipment in your v ehicle is mounte d and operating properly . Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or e x plosive materials in the sa me compartme nt as the device, its part s, or enhancements. For vehic les equipped w ith an air bag, remember that an air bags inflate with great force. Do n ot place objects, including in st all ed or po rtabl e wireless equipme nt in th e area over the ai r bag or in the air ba g d eplo y ment ar ea. If in -ve hicle wirele ss e quipm en t is impr oper ly ins talle d and the a i r bag inflate s, se rious injury c ould result. P otentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all si gns and instructions. P ote ntially explosive atm ospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off you r vehicle engine. Sparks in such a reas could caus e an explosion or fire re sulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuellin g poin ts such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of ra d io equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution are as, chemical pla nts or where blasting ope rations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. The y include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage fac ilities, vehicle s using liqu efied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas wh ere the ai r contains c hemicals or particles such as grai n, dust or met al powders. FCC regulations prohibit using your wireless device w hile in t he air . The use of wireless te lephones in an aircraft ma y be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, dis rupt the wireless t elephone n etwork, a nd may be illegal. Failure to observe these instructions may le ad to susp ension or d enial of telephone services to the offender , leg al action, or both.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 129 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Re fe rence info rmati on ⢠EMERGE NCY CAL LS Impor tant : Wireless phones, including this phon e, operate using radio signals, wireless netw orks, landline ne tworks, and user-programm ed functions . Beca use of this, conn ections in all c onditions cannot be guarante ed. Y ou should ne ver rely so lely on a ny wireless phone for essentia l commu nications like medica l em ergencies . To mak e an emer genc y c all: 1 If the phone is not on, sw itch it on . Ch eck for adequate signal strength . Some netw orks may re quire that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the pho ne. 2 Press t h e End ke y as m any t imes a s neede d t o cle ar th e disp lay a n d r eady the pho ne for calls. 3 K ey in the off icial emerge ncy numb er for you r pr esent l ocat ion. Emergen cy numbers v ary by locatio n. 4 Press t he Call key . If cert a in f eatures are in use, you may first need to turn those featu res off before you ca n make an eme rgency call. Cons ult this guide or your serv ice provider . When making an emergen cy call, give all the n ecessary infor mation as accurately as possible. Y ou r wireless phone may be the only m eans of communic ation at the scene of an accident. D o not end the call unt il given perm ission to do so.
130 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia ⢠Certificati on inform ation (S AR) THE NOKIA 667 0 DEVICE MEETS GUID ELINES FOR EXPO SURE TO RADIO W AVES. Y our m obile de vice i s a radio transmit ter and re ceiv er . It is desig ned and ma nuf ac tur e d no t to exceed the limits for exposure to r adio freque ncy (RF) energ y recommended by inte rnational guide lines (ICNIRP). The s e limits e s tablis h permitted level s of RF energy for t he gener al populat ion. The guidelines ar e based on standa rds th at w ere deve loped by indep end ent sc ienti fic organ ization s thr ough period ic and thorough eval uation of scient ific studies. The standards and guide lines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure t he safety of the publi c, reg ar dle s s o f a ge an d he a lth an d t o ac cou nt fo r any va ri at ion s i n me asur e me nt s. The expo sure guidel i nes f o r mobil e devices employ a u n it o f measurement kn o wn as the Specific Ab s o rption Rate or SAR. The SAR li m it stated in the internati o nal guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams o f tissue. Tests for SAR are condu cted using standar d operati ng posi tion s with the dev ice tra nsmit ting at its high est cer tifie d power le vel i n all test ed fr equenc y bands. The actu al SAR lev el of an operat ing de vice can be well be low th e maximu m valu e because the device is desig n ed to use only the power r equired to reach the netw ork. Th at amoun t changes dep end ing on a n umber of facto rs such as how close you are to a network base station. The high est SAR value when tested acco rdin g to int erna tion al test ing pro ced ure s for us e at the ea r for dev ice t ype RH-67 is 0.22 W/ kg and for device ty pe RH-68 is 0.5 2 W/kg . Y our phoneâ s device type is l i sted on the lab el located under the ba ttery . SAR val ues ma y vary depen ding on natio na l report ing and testi ng requ irem ents and t he net w ork b and. Use of devic e accessories and enhanc em ents may r esult in di ffer ent SAR value s. Addi tion al SAR inf ormat ion ma y be pr ovide d unde r pr oduct i nforma tion at www .nokia.com . USA and Canada: The SAR limit of U SA (FCC) and Canada (IC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue. Device types RH-67 and RH-68 have also been tested against th is SAR limit. The highest SAR v alue reported unde r this standard during product ce rtification for us e at the ear for device type RH -67 is 0.42 W/kg and when properly w orn on the body is 0 .58 W/kg. The h ighest SAR value reporte d under this standard du ring product certification for use at the ear for device t ype RH-68 is 0.73 W/kg and when prope rly worn on the bod y is 0.60 W /kg. Information about this device c an be found on the FCC's website a t <http://www .f cc.gov /oet/fccid> by searching the equipme nt autho rization syst em using FCC ID: QV VRH -67 a nd QV VRH -68.
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 13 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia Re fe rence info rmati on ⢠T ECHNICAL INFORMATION We igh t 4.16 oz (1 1 8 g) with 900 âÂÂmAh Li-Io n battery Siz e V olum e: 5. 7 cubic inches (93.5 cc) Leng th: 4.27 in (108.6 mm) Wi dth: 2.1 i n (5 3.0 mm) Thickne ss: 0. 7 in (1 8.7 mm) Fr equen cy range Noki a 667 0 GSM9 00 880âÂÂ915 MH z (TX) 925âÂÂ96 0 MH z (RX) GSM1 800 17 1 0 âÂÂ1785 M Hz (TX) 1805âÂÂ1 880 M Hz ( RX) GSM1 900 1850âÂÂ1 9 1 0 MHz ( TX) 1930âÂÂ1 990 M Hz ( RX) Nokia 667 0 b GSM8 50 824âÂÂ84 9 MH z (TX) 869âÂÂ89 4 MH z (RX) GSM1 800 17 1 0 âÂÂ1785 M Hz (TX) 1805âÂÂ1 880 M Hz ( RX) GSM1 900 1850âÂÂ1 9 1 0 MHz ( TX) 1930âÂÂ1 990 M Hz ( RX) Tr a n s m i t t e r outp ut pow er Up to 2 W Batter y voltage 3.7 V Operating tem pe ra tu re 14 ðF t o 13 1ðF (-1 0 ðC to 55ðC ) a Tal k t im e, sta ndb y ti me a. Battery ta lk and stan dby times are es timates only an d depend on signal strength, network condi tions, features us ed, battery age and condition ( including the effect of charging ha bits), temperatures t o which bat tery is exposed, us e in digital mode, and ma ny other factors. Please n ote that the amou nt of time a phone is used for cal ls will affect it s standby time. Likewise, the amount of time t hat the phone is turned on an d in the standby m ode will affect its talk t ime. Ta l k time: up to 3 hours Stand-by tim e: up to 10 day s Charging t ime w ith 900â mAh Li-Ion battery a nd the ACP-12U charger: approxima tely 1 .5 hours
132 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 133 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia In dex Numerics 1-t ouch di ali ng Assign numbers 34 Make calls 27 A Access points 68 Accessibility solutions 15 Accessories , See E nhancemen ts Ala rm Clo ck 88 Tone 89 Turn off or snooz e 88 Ans wer a c all 28 Ant en na 19 Application manager 76 Applications Add voice com mands to 79 Install applic ations 77 Java app lication settin gs 77 Rem ove files 78 Audio files, See Media fi les B Background im age, See T hem es Battery Charge 18 Insert 18 Talk time and standby time 124 Bluetooth connection 11 2 Close c onnection 115 Conne ction re quests 114 Icon s 114 Pairing 114 Rece ive data 115 Send data 113 Settings 113 Browser Ac cess poi nt s 68 Bookmarks 107 Brows e 108 Connect 107 End connections 11 0 Ico ns 10 7 Servi ce message settin g s 64 Service m essage s 58 WAP and XHTML pages 106 C Cache, clear 111 Calculator 86 Calen dar 39 Alarm tone 40 Delete ma ny entries simulta neously 41 Settin gs 40 Vie ws 40 Call lists, See Log Call regi ster, See Log Call restriction 74 Call timers 30 Calls 1-touc h dialing 27 Answer 28 Confe ren ce calls 27 Dialed 30 Duration t imers 30 For ward ing 28 Inte rnational 26 Make a ca ll 26 Missed 30 Options du ring a call 28 Re cent 30 Reje ct 28 Settin gs 67 Settin gs for forwarding 29 Transfer 28 Use th e Contacts directo ry 26
134 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Camer a 42 Memo ry consum ption 43 Record videos 43 Self-timer 43 Settings 44 Take p icture s 42 CD-ROM 117 Cell broadcas t messages 61 Cell info display 75 Certificates (Certif.) Mana gemen t 73 Trust se ttings 74 Char gers 124 Clear me mory Calendar ent ries 41 Clock 88 Code PIN, See PIN code Security, See Security Computer con nections 117 Conferen ce calls 27 Connection Bluetooth 112 End 11 6 Indicators, See Ic ons Manager 115 Settings 68 USB 115 View de tails 116 Contact car ds Assign 1-touch dialing 34 Assign default numbe rs and addresses 32 Crea te 32 Data im port 41 Insert ima ges 32 Remo te s ynch ronization 118 Ringing tones 33 Voic e tags 33 , 34 Contact groups 35 Conver ter 86 Add exchange ra t es 87 Conv ert currenc ies 87 Conv ert units 86 Copy SIM card t o phone mem ory 33 Text 55 Cus tomer care 15 D Data im port 41 Date, settings 71 Delivery reports 52 Dialed nu mbers 30 Display settings 67 See also Themes Download files to Gallery 49 E Edit Conta c t ca rds 32 Text 52 Th em es 84 E-mail Dele te 60 Remote mailbox 59 Retr ie ve 59 Settin gs 63 Und elet e 60 Enha nceme nt s Activate 75 Description s 124 Rules for use 12 4 Settin gs 75 F File formats Re alP l ayer 46 File manager 78
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 135 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Files, open 49 Fixed dialing 73 Folders Create and organize 24 Ope n 49 Forward calls 28 Frequencies 12 G Gallery 48 Download files from the Internet 49 Folde rs 49 Pictu re m ess ages 49 Upload image s 50 Wallpape r images 49 Game s 95 GIF an im ations 45 Go- to m enu ( shor tcut s) 84 GPRS Conne ction tim er 31 Data c ounter 30 , 31 Settings 70 GSM data connections 11 6 H Handsfr ee us e, See Loud sp eake r I Icons 20 Activity 21 Blue tooth connec tion 11 4 Browse r 107 Data c onnectio n 21 Enhanc em ent 22 GPRS c onnect ion 116 In s tan dby m ode 20 Text input 52 , 53 Voice volum e 22 Idle state, See Standby mode IM, Se e Instant m essaging 96 Ima ge se rver 50 Imag es 49 Add to a contact card 32 Full scre en 45 Keyboard shortc uts when viewing imag es 45 Mem ory c ons umpt ion 43 Move the focus 45 Wallpa pers folder 49 Zoom 45 Import data from othe r Nokia phones 41 Indicators, See Icons Inse rt Batte ry 18 Memory card 17 SIM card 16 Inst al l Applications 77 Java file s 77 Instant mess aging (IM) Cont acts 100 Conversat ions 98 Group c hat 10 2 Log in 97 Log off 105 Servic e provider icon s 96 Settin gs 97 Intern et access points (I AP), See Access points Internet service provider (ISP), See Access points J Ja va Inst all application s 77 Settin gs 77 K Keyguard 25 Keypad lock, See Keyguard Keys, phone key definitions 5
136 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia L Lang ua ge For writin g 66 Set phone lan guage 66 Left selection key 67 Liste n to messages, See Voice mail Lock code 19 , 72 Lock keypad, See Keyguard Lock/unlock memor y card, See Me mor y c ard Log Data c ounter 30 Erase c ontents 30 , 31 Filter 31 Ge nera l (all ca lls an d con nect ions) 31 Recent calls, missed, a nd received calls 29 Settings 31 Lou dspe ak er 25 M Mai l E-mail 59 Voice mail 26 Make calls 26 Media files File form ats 46 Mute 46 Play 46 Search for 46 Sound and v ideo 48 Media gallery, See Gallery Me mory ca rd 89 Adapter 90 Back up and restore phone m emory 91 Form at 90 Insert 17 Lock with password 91 Memo ry consum ption 91 Remove pas sword 91 Unl ock 91 Video clips 89 Memor y l ow Ch eck m emor y cons umpt ion 91 Troubleshoot ing 11 9 Memory, view details 78 Menu 22 Me nu key 5 , 22 Rea rra nge th e main Me nu 23 Messaging Deliv ery reports 52 Inbox 57 Main v iew 51 Messages on the SIM card 61 My folders 58 Outbox 60 Se nt f old er se ttin gs 65 Settin gs 61 Text me ssages 55 Wri te tex t 52 Missed calls 30 MMC, se e Mem ory card Mobile browser, See Browser Model number 12 Movie director 47 Music files, See M edi a files Mute Active call 28 Media file s 46 Ringin g tone o n incomin g call 28 My folders 58 N Network Services 13 Notes 86 O Options lists 23 Organize the main M e nu 23 Outbox 60
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 137 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia P Packet data , See GPRS Paste text 55 PC Suite 117 Personal notes 93 Personalize Al arm cloc k ton e 89 Calendar alarm tone 40 Phone Adapter 125 Display, Se e Th emes Illustration 5 Model num ber 12 Network frequencies 12 Phonebook, See Contact cards Picture messages 49 Pictures, See Came ra and Gallery PIN code Unblock 72 Use when powering on 19 Play m e dia files 46 Power on and off 19 Predictive text input Ho w to use 53 Tips 54 Turn off 54 Pr esen ce 35 Availability information 36 Blo cked 37 Private 37 Public 36 Settings 38 Vie wers 36 Profiles 82 Renam e 83 Settings 82 Purchase downloads 110 Q Quick guide 6 R RealPlayer 46 File formats 46 Play media file s 46 Settin gs 47 Strea m l ive con ten t 46 Receive Calls 28 Data by Blue tooth conne ction 11 5 Messages 57 Ringing ton es, Operator logos, and sett ings , s ee Smart messages Recent calls log, See Log Record Sounds 87 Vide os 43 Voice comma nds 79 Reject calls 28 Remote Mailbox 59 Synch ronization 11 7 Remote synchronizatio n 11 7 Remove an application 78 Reports 52 Restricting calls 74 Right sele ction key 67 Ringing tones Add a pe rsonal ringing tone 33 Change 82 Mute 28 Re ceive in a sm art messa ge 58 RS-M MC, see Memo ry card S Screen s aver Display 84 Settin gs 67 Scroll key 22 Search For an ite m 24 For me dia files 46
138 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Security Codes 72 PIN, lock, and PUK codes 72 Security ce rtificates 73 Settings 72 Selection keys, changing 67 Self-timer (for came ra) 43 Send Data by Blue tooth conn ection 113 Message s 55 Service command editor 61 Set time and date 19 Settings 66â 75 Applicat i ons (Java) 77 Blue tooth connec tion 11 3 Calendar 40 Call forwarding 29 Call restric tion 74 Came ra 44 Cell broadcast (info service) 65 Certificates 73 Clo ck 88 Conne ction 68 Data call (GPRS) 71 Date and t ime 71 Display 67 E-mail 63 Enhanc em ents 75 Fixed dialing 73 Gene ral 66 Lock co de 19 , 72 Log 31 Messagin g 61 Messaging, Sent folder 65 Phone 66 PIN code 72 RealPl ayer 47 Security 72 Sounds (cu stomize Profile s) 82 Te xt me ssages 62 Video recorder 44 Wa llet 95 Shared memory 13 Shortcuts Add menu shortcuts 84 Go t o me nu 84 Whe n viewing images 45 SIM card Copy names and n umbers 33 Definit ion 11 9 Inse rt 16 Messages 61 Smart messages 57 Snooze alarm 88 Software Inst all application s 77 Remove applica tions 78 Sound files, See Media files Speed dialing , See 1 -touch dialing Standby mode Screen description 20 Settin gs 67 standby times and talk times 13 1 Stop alarm clock 88 Store data 12 0 Subscribed contacts ( Pr esence) 35 Switch between applications 23 Synchronization 11 7 SyncML 117 T Ta lk t ime 131 Templates folder 58 Text Copy and paste 55 Inp ut 52 Messag es, writ e and sen d 55 Templates 58
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 139 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia Theme s Edit 84 Rest ore 84 Wallpape rs folde r 49 Thumbnails, in contact card 32 Tickets 94 Time and date settings 71 To- do 41 Tools 1-touch dialing 27 , 34 Ap pli cat ion ma nage r 76 Device mana ger 80 File man ager 78 Voice mail 26 Trac k list 50 Traditional text input 52 Transf e r c alls 28 Troubleshooting 119 TTY/TDD communication 15 , 125 U Uni t conv ert er 86 Upload images 50 USB connection 115 USSD commands 61 V Video clips Creat e and sav e 43 Ope n 49 Video player, See RealPlayer Video recorder Create and save video clips 43 View Conne ction de tails 116 GIF ani m ation s 45 Voice commands 79 Add 79 Change or dele te 80 Start application s 80 Voice dialing, See Voice tags Voice mail 26 Chang e t he num ber 27 Forwa rd calls to voice ma il 29 List en to mes sages 26 Voice messages, Se e Voice mail Voice recorder 87 Voice tags 33 Add, change, and de lete 34 Make calls 34 Volume control 25 W Wallet Cre ate a walle t profile 93 Create personal notes 93 En ter th e wa llet code 92 Reset code 95 Retriev e data into browser 94 Settin gs 95 Store personal c ard details 92 View ticke t details 94 Wallpaper, See Themes WAP pages, See Browser Web, See Br ows er Write text Predicti ve te xt input 53 Traditi onal text input 52 X XHTML pages, See Browser Z Zoom On sav ed imag es 45 When re cording video 43 When takin g a pi cture 42
140 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 14 1 Copyright é 20 05 Nokia NOTES
142 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
Nokia 667 0 User Guide 143 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES
144 Copyrigh t é 2005 Nokia NOTES